Adding upstream version 2:8.1.0875.upstream/2%8.1.0875upstream

Signed-off-by: Daniel Baumann <daniel.baumann@progress-linux.org>

1 files changed, 12579 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/runtime/doc/eval.txt b/runtime/doc/eval.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..50ca376
--- /dev/null
+++ b/runtime/doc/eval.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,12579 @@
+*eval.txt*	For Vim version 8.1.  Last change: 2019 Feb 03
+
+
+		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
+
+
+Expression evaluation			*expression* *expr* *E15* *eval*
+
+Using expressions is introduced in chapter 41 of the user manual |usr_41.txt|.
+
+Note: Expression evaluation can be disabled at compile time.  If this has been
+done, the features in this document are not available.  See |+eval| and
+|no-eval-feature|.
+
+1.  Variables			|variables|
+    1.1 Variable types
+    1.2 Function references		|Funcref|
+    1.3 Lists				|Lists|
+    1.4 Dictionaries			|Dictionaries|
+    1.5 Blobs				|Blobs|
+    1.6 More about variables		|more-variables|
+2.  Expression syntax		|expression-syntax|
+3.  Internal variable		|internal-variables|
+4.  Builtin Functions		|functions|
+5.  Defining functions		|user-functions|
+6.  Curly braces names		|curly-braces-names|
+7.  Commands			|expression-commands|
+8.  Exception handling		|exception-handling|
+9.  Examples			|eval-examples|
+10. No +eval feature		|no-eval-feature|
+11. The sandbox			|eval-sandbox|
+12. Textlock			|textlock|
+13. Testing			|testing|
+
+{Vi does not have any of these commands}
+
+==============================================================================
+1. Variables						*variables*
+
+1.1 Variable types ~
+						*E712* *E896* *E897* *E899*
+There are nine types of variables:
+
+Number		A 32 or 64 bit signed number.  |expr-number| *Number*
+		64-bit Numbers are available only when compiled with the
+		|+num64| feature.
+		Examples:  -123  0x10  0177  0b1011
+
+Float		A floating point number. |floating-point-format| *Float*
+		{only when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+		Examples: 123.456  1.15e-6  -1.1e3
+
+							*E928*
+String		A NUL terminated string of 8-bit unsigned characters (bytes).
+		|expr-string| Examples: "ab\txx\"--"  'x-z''a,c'
+
+List		An ordered sequence of items, see |List| for details.
+		Example: [1, 2, ['a', 'b']]
+
+Dictionary	An associative, unordered array: Each entry has a key and a
+		value. |Dictionary|
+		Example: {'blue': "#0000ff", 'red': "#ff0000"}
+
+Funcref		A reference to a function |Funcref|.
+		Example: function("strlen")
+		It can be bound to a dictionary and arguments, it then works
+		like a Partial.
+		Example: function("Callback", [arg], myDict)
+
+Special		|v:false|, |v:true|, |v:none| and |v:null|.  *Special*
+
+Job		Used for a job, see |job_start()|. *Job* *Jobs*
+
+Channel		Used for a channel, see |ch_open()|. *Channel* *Channels*
+
+Blob		Binary Large Object. Stores any sequence of bytes.  See |Blob|
+		for details
+		Example: 0zFF00ED015DAF
+		0z is an empty Blob.
+
+The Number and String types are converted automatically, depending on how they
+are used.
+
+Conversion from a Number to a String is by making the ASCII representation of
+the Number.  Examples:
+	Number 123	-->	String "123" ~
+	Number 0	-->	String "0" ~
+	Number -1	-->	String "-1" ~
+							*octal*
+Conversion from a String to a Number is done by converting the first digits to
+a number.  Hexadecimal "0xf9", Octal "017", and Binary "0b10" numbers are
+recognized.  If the String doesn't start with digits, the result is zero.
+Examples:
+	String "456"	-->	Number 456 ~
+	String "6bar"	-->	Number 6 ~
+	String "foo"	-->	Number 0 ~
+	String "0xf1"	-->	Number 241 ~
+	String "0100"	-->	Number 64 ~
+	String "0b101"	-->	Number 5 ~
+	String "-8"	-->	Number -8 ~
+	String "+8"	-->	Number 0 ~
+
+To force conversion from String to Number, add zero to it: >
+	:echo "0100" + 0
+<	64 ~
+
+To avoid a leading zero to cause octal conversion, or for using a different
+base, use |str2nr()|.
+
+						*TRUE* *FALSE* *Boolean*
+For boolean operators Numbers are used.  Zero is FALSE, non-zero is TRUE.
+You can also use |v:false| and |v:true|.  When TRUE is returned from a
+function it is the Number one, FALSE is the number zero.
+
+Note that in the command: >
+	:if "foo"
+	:" NOT executed
+"foo" is converted to 0, which means FALSE.  If the string starts with a
+non-zero number it means TRUE: >
+	:if "8foo"
+	:" executed
+To test for a non-empty string, use empty(): >
+	:if !empty("foo")
+<
+							*non-zero-arg*
+Function arguments often behave slightly different from |TRUE|: If the
+argument is present and it evaluates to a non-zero Number, |v:true| or a
+non-empty String, then the value is considered to be TRUE.
+Note that " " and "0" are also non-empty strings, thus considered to be TRUE.
+A List, Dictionary or Float is not a Number or String, thus evaluate to FALSE.
+
+		*E745* *E728* *E703* *E729* *E730* *E731* *E908* *E910* *E913*
+		*E974* *E975* *E976*
+|List|, |Dictionary|, |Funcref|, |Job|, |Channel| and |Blob| types are not
+automatically converted.
+
+							*E805* *E806* *E808*
+When mixing Number and Float the Number is converted to Float.  Otherwise
+there is no automatic conversion of Float.  You can use str2float() for String
+to Float, printf() for Float to String and float2nr() for Float to Number.
+
+			*E891* *E892* *E893* *E894* *E907* *E911* *E914*
+When expecting a Float a Number can also be used, but nothing else.
+
+						*no-type-checking*
+You will not get an error if you try to change the type of a variable.
+
+
+1.2 Function references ~
+					*Funcref* *E695* *E718*
+A Funcref variable is obtained with the |function()| function, the |funcref()|
+function or created with the lambda expression |expr-lambda|.  It can be used
+in an expression in the place of a function name, before the parenthesis
+around the arguments, to invoke the function it refers to.  Example: >
+
+	:let Fn = function("MyFunc")
+	:echo Fn()
+<							*E704* *E705* *E707*
+A Funcref variable must start with a capital, "s:", "w:", "t:" or "b:".  You
+can use "g:" but the following name must still start with a capital.  You
+cannot have both a Funcref variable and a function with the same name.
+
+A special case is defining a function and directly assigning its Funcref to a
+Dictionary entry.  Example: >
+	:function dict.init() dict
+	:   let self.val = 0
+	:endfunction
+
+The key of the Dictionary can start with a lower case letter.  The actual
+function name is not used here.  Also see |numbered-function|.
+
+A Funcref can also be used with the |:call| command: >
+	:call Fn()
+	:call dict.init()
+
+The name of the referenced function can be obtained with |string()|. >
+	:let func = string(Fn)
+
+You can use |call()| to invoke a Funcref and use a list variable for the
+arguments: >
+	:let r = call(Fn, mylist)
+<
+								*Partial*
+A Funcref optionally binds a Dictionary and/or arguments.  This is also called
+a Partial.  This is created by passing the Dictionary and/or arguments to
+function() or funcref().  When calling the function the Dictionary and/or
+arguments will be passed to the function.  Example: >
+
+	let Cb = function('Callback', ['foo'], myDict)
+	call Cb('bar')
+
+This will invoke the function as if using: >
+	call myDict.Callback('foo', 'bar')
+
+This is very useful when passing a function around, e.g. in the arguments of
+|ch_open()|.
+
+Note that binding a function to a Dictionary also happens when the function is
+a member of the Dictionary: >
+
+	let myDict.myFunction = MyFunction
+	call myDict.myFunction()
+
+Here MyFunction() will get myDict passed as "self".  This happens when the
+"myFunction" member is accessed.  When making assigning "myFunction" to
+otherDict and calling it, it will be bound to otherDict: >
+
+	let otherDict.myFunction = myDict.myFunction
+	call otherDict.myFunction()
+
+Now "self" will be "otherDict".  But when the dictionary was bound explicitly
+this won't happen: >
+
+	let myDict.myFunction = function(MyFunction, myDict)
+	let otherDict.myFunction = myDict.myFunction
+	call otherDict.myFunction()
+
+Here "self" will be "myDict", because it was bound explicitly.
+
+
+1.3 Lists ~
+						*list* *List* *Lists* *E686*
+A List is an ordered sequence of items.  An item can be of any type.  Items
+can be accessed by their index number.  Items can be added and removed at any
+position in the sequence.
+
+
+List creation ~
+							*E696* *E697*
+A List is created with a comma separated list of items in square brackets.
+Examples: >
+	:let mylist = [1, two, 3, "four"]
+	:let emptylist = []
+
+An item can be any expression.  Using a List for an item creates a
+List of Lists: >
+	:let nestlist = [[11, 12], [21, 22], [31, 32]]
+
+An extra comma after the last item is ignored.
+
+
+List index ~
+							*list-index* *E684*
+An item in the List can be accessed by putting the index in square brackets
+after the List.  Indexes are zero-based, thus the first item has index zero. >
+	:let item = mylist[0]		" get the first item: 1
+	:let item = mylist[2]		" get the third item: 3
+
+When the resulting item is a list this can be repeated: >
+	:let item = nestlist[0][1]	" get the first list, second item: 12
+<
+A negative index is counted from the end.  Index -1 refers to the last item in
+the List, -2 to the last but one item, etc. >
+	:let last = mylist[-1]		" get the last item: "four"
+
+To avoid an error for an invalid index use the |get()| function.  When an item
+is not available it returns zero or the default value you specify: >
+	:echo get(mylist, idx)
+	:echo get(mylist, idx, "NONE")
+
+
+List concatenation ~
+
+Two lists can be concatenated with the "+" operator: >
+	:let longlist = mylist + [5, 6]
+	:let mylist += [7, 8]
+
+To prepend or append an item turn the item into a list by putting [] around
+it.  To change a list in-place see |list-modification| below.
+
+
+Sublist ~
+							*sublist*
+A part of the List can be obtained by specifying the first and last index,
+separated by a colon in square brackets: >
+	:let shortlist = mylist[2:-1]	" get List [3, "four"]
+
+Omitting the first index is similar to zero.  Omitting the last index is
+similar to -1. >
+	:let endlist = mylist[2:]	" from item 2 to the end: [3, "four"]
+	:let shortlist = mylist[2:2]	" List with one item: [3]
+	:let otherlist = mylist[:]	" make a copy of the List
+
+If the first index is beyond the last item of the List or the second item is
+before the first item, the result is an empty list.  There is no error
+message.
+
+If the second index is equal to or greater than the length of the list the
+length minus one is used: >
+	:let mylist = [0, 1, 2, 3]
+	:echo mylist[2:8]		" result: [2, 3]
+
+NOTE: mylist[s:e] means using the variable "s:e" as index.  Watch out for
+using a single letter variable before the ":".  Insert a space when needed:
+mylist[s : e].
+
+
+List identity ~
+							*list-identity*
+When variable "aa" is a list and you assign it to another variable "bb", both
+variables refer to the same list.  Thus changing the list "aa" will also
+change "bb": >
+	:let aa = [1, 2, 3]
+	:let bb = aa
+	:call add(aa, 4)
+	:echo bb
+<	[1, 2, 3, 4]
+
+Making a copy of a list is done with the |copy()| function.  Using [:] also
+works, as explained above.  This creates a shallow copy of the list: Changing
+a list item in the list will also change the item in the copied list: >
+	:let aa = [[1, 'a'], 2, 3]
+	:let bb = copy(aa)
+	:call add(aa, 4)
+	:let aa[0][1] = 'aaa'
+	:echo aa
+<	[[1, aaa], 2, 3, 4] >
+	:echo bb
+<	[[1, aaa], 2, 3]
+
+To make a completely independent list use |deepcopy()|.  This also makes a
+copy of the values in the list, recursively.  Up to a hundred levels deep.
+
+The operator "is" can be used to check if two variables refer to the same
+List.  "isnot" does the opposite.  In contrast "==" compares if two lists have
+the same value. >
+	:let alist = [1, 2, 3]
+	:let blist = [1, 2, 3]
+	:echo alist is blist
+<	0 >
+	:echo alist == blist
+<	1
+
+Note about comparing lists: Two lists are considered equal if they have the
+same length and all items compare equal, as with using "==".  There is one
+exception: When comparing a number with a string they are considered
+different.  There is no automatic type conversion, as with using "==" on
+variables.  Example: >
+	echo 4 == "4"
+<	1 >
+	echo [4] == ["4"]
+<	0
+
+Thus comparing Lists is more strict than comparing numbers and strings.  You
+can compare simple values this way too by putting them in a list: >
+
+	:let a = 5
+	:let b = "5"
+	:echo a == b
+<	1 >
+	:echo [a] == [b]
+<	0
+
+
+List unpack ~
+
+To unpack the items in a list to individual variables, put the variables in
+square brackets, like list items: >
+	:let [var1, var2] = mylist
+
+When the number of variables does not match the number of items in the list
+this produces an error.  To handle any extra items from the list append ";"
+and a variable name: >
+	:let [var1, var2; rest] = mylist
+
+This works like: >
+	:let var1 = mylist[0]
+	:let var2 = mylist[1]
+	:let rest = mylist[2:]
+
+Except that there is no error if there are only two items.  "rest" will be an
+empty list then.
+
+
+List modification ~
+							*list-modification*
+To change a specific item of a list use |:let| this way: >
+	:let list[4] = "four"
+	:let listlist[0][3] = item
+
+To change part of a list you can specify the first and last item to be
+modified.  The value must at least have the number of items in the range: >
+	:let list[3:5] = [3, 4, 5]
+
+Adding and removing items from a list is done with functions.  Here are a few
+examples: >
+	:call insert(list, 'a')		" prepend item 'a'
+	:call insert(list, 'a', 3)	" insert item 'a' before list[3]
+	:call add(list, "new")		" append String item
+	:call add(list, [1, 2])		" append a List as one new item
+	:call extend(list, [1, 2])	" extend the list with two more items
+	:let i = remove(list, 3)	" remove item 3
+	:unlet list[3]			" idem
+	:let l = remove(list, 3, -1)	" remove items 3 to last item
+	:unlet list[3 : ]		" idem
+	:call filter(list, 'v:val !~ "x"')  " remove items with an 'x'
+
+Changing the order of items in a list: >
+	:call sort(list)		" sort a list alphabetically
+	:call reverse(list)		" reverse the order of items
+	:call uniq(sort(list))		" sort and remove duplicates
+
+
+For loop ~
+
+The |:for| loop executes commands for each item in a list.  A variable is set
+to each item in the list in sequence.  Example: >
+	:for item in mylist
+	:   call Doit(item)
+	:endfor
+
+This works like: >
+	:let index = 0
+	:while index < len(mylist)
+	:   let item = mylist[index]
+	:   :call Doit(item)
+	:   let index = index + 1
+	:endwhile
+
+If all you want to do is modify each item in the list then the |map()|
+function will be a simpler method than a for loop.
+
+Just like the |:let| command, |:for| also accepts a list of variables.  This
+requires the argument to be a list of lists. >
+	:for [lnum, col] in [[1, 3], [2, 8], [3, 0]]
+	:   call Doit(lnum, col)
+	:endfor
+
+This works like a |:let| command is done for each list item.  Again, the types
+must remain the same to avoid an error.
+
+It is also possible to put remaining items in a List variable: >
+	:for [i, j; rest] in listlist
+	:   call Doit(i, j)
+	:   if !empty(rest)
+	:      echo "remainder: " . string(rest)
+	:   endif
+	:endfor
+
+
+List functions ~
+						*E714*
+Functions that are useful with a List: >
+	:let r = call(funcname, list)	" call a function with an argument list
+	:if empty(list)			" check if list is empty
+	:let l = len(list)		" number of items in list
+	:let big = max(list)		" maximum value in list
+	:let small = min(list)		" minimum value in list
+	:let xs = count(list, 'x')	" count nr of times 'x' appears in list
+	:let i = index(list, 'x')	" index of first 'x' in list
+	:let lines = getline(1, 10)	" get ten text lines from buffer
+	:call append('$', lines)	" append text lines in buffer
+	:let list = split("a b c")	" create list from items in a string
+	:let string = join(list, ', ')	" create string from list items
+	:let s = string(list)		" String representation of list
+	:call map(list, '">> " . v:val')  " prepend ">> " to each item
+
+Don't forget that a combination of features can make things simple.  For
+example, to add up all the numbers in a list: >
+	:exe 'let sum = ' . join(nrlist, '+')
+
+
+1.4 Dictionaries ~
+				*dict* *Dict* *Dictionaries* *Dictionary*
+A Dictionary is an associative array: Each entry has a key and a value.  The
+entry can be located with the key.  The entries are stored without a specific
+ordering.
+
+
+Dictionary creation ~
+						*E720* *E721* *E722* *E723*
+A Dictionary is created with a comma separated list of entries in curly
+braces.  Each entry has a key and a value, separated by a colon.  Each key can
+only appear once.  Examples: >
+	:let mydict = {1: 'one', 2: 'two', 3: 'three'}
+	:let emptydict = {}
+<							*E713* *E716* *E717*
+A key is always a String.  You can use a Number, it will be converted to a
+String automatically.  Thus the String '4' and the number 4 will find the same
+entry.  Note that the String '04' and the Number 04 are different, since the
+Number will be converted to the String '4'.  The empty string can be used as a
+key.
+
+A value can be any expression.  Using a Dictionary for a value creates a
+nested Dictionary: >
+	:let nestdict = {1: {11: 'a', 12: 'b'}, 2: {21: 'c'}}
+
+An extra comma after the last entry is ignored.
+
+
+Accessing entries ~
+
+The normal way to access an entry is by putting the key in square brackets: >
+	:let val = mydict["one"]
+	:let mydict["four"] = 4
+
+You can add new entries to an existing Dictionary this way, unlike Lists.
+
+For keys that consist entirely of letters, digits and underscore the following
+form can be used |expr-entry|: >
+	:let val = mydict.one
+	:let mydict.four = 4
+
+Since an entry can be any type, also a List and a Dictionary, the indexing and
+key lookup can be repeated: >
+	:echo dict.key[idx].key
+
+
+Dictionary to List conversion ~
+
+You may want to loop over the entries in a dictionary.  For this you need to
+turn the Dictionary into a List and pass it to |:for|.
+
+Most often you want to loop over the keys, using the |keys()| function: >
+	:for key in keys(mydict)
+	:   echo key . ': ' . mydict[key]
+	:endfor
+
+The List of keys is unsorted.  You may want to sort them first: >
+	:for key in sort(keys(mydict))
+
+To loop over the values use the |values()| function:  >
+	:for v in values(mydict)
+	:   echo "value: " . v
+	:endfor
+
+If you want both the key and the value use the |items()| function.  It returns
+a List in which each item is a List with two items, the key and the value: >
+	:for [key, value] in items(mydict)
+	:   echo key . ': ' . value
+	:endfor
+
+
+Dictionary identity ~
+							*dict-identity*
+Just like Lists you need to use |copy()| and |deepcopy()| to make a copy of a
+Dictionary.  Otherwise, assignment results in referring to the same
+Dictionary: >
+	:let onedict = {'a': 1, 'b': 2}
+	:let adict = onedict
+	:let adict['a'] = 11
+	:echo onedict['a']
+	11
+
+Two Dictionaries compare equal if all the key-value pairs compare equal.  For
+more info see |list-identity|.
+
+
+Dictionary modification ~
+							*dict-modification*
+To change an already existing entry of a Dictionary, or to add a new entry,
+use |:let| this way: >
+	:let dict[4] = "four"
+	:let dict['one'] = item
+
+Removing an entry from a Dictionary is done with |remove()| or |:unlet|.
+Three ways to remove the entry with key "aaa" from dict: >
+	:let i = remove(dict, 'aaa')
+	:unlet dict.aaa
+	:unlet dict['aaa']
+
+Merging a Dictionary with another is done with |extend()|: >
+	:call extend(adict, bdict)
+This extends adict with all entries from bdict.  Duplicate keys cause entries
+in adict to be overwritten.  An optional third argument can change this.
+Note that the order of entries in a Dictionary is irrelevant, thus don't
+expect ":echo adict" to show the items from bdict after the older entries in
+adict.
+
+Weeding out entries from a Dictionary can be done with |filter()|: >
+	:call filter(dict, 'v:val =~ "x"')
+This removes all entries from "dict" with a value not matching 'x'.
+
+
+Dictionary function ~
+				*Dictionary-function* *self* *E725* *E862*
+When a function is defined with the "dict" attribute it can be used in a
+special way with a dictionary.  Example: >
+	:function Mylen() dict
+	:   return len(self.data)
+	:endfunction
+	:let mydict = {'data': [0, 1, 2, 3], 'len': function("Mylen")}
+	:echo mydict.len()
+
+This is like a method in object oriented programming.  The entry in the
+Dictionary is a |Funcref|.  The local variable "self" refers to the dictionary
+the function was invoked from.
+
+It is also possible to add a function without the "dict" attribute as a
+Funcref to a Dictionary, but the "self" variable is not available then.
+
+				*numbered-function* *anonymous-function*
+To avoid the extra name for the function it can be defined and directly
+assigned to a Dictionary in this way: >
+	:let mydict = {'data': [0, 1, 2, 3]}
+	:function mydict.len()
+	:   return len(self.data)
+	:endfunction
+	:echo mydict.len()
+
+The function will then get a number and the value of dict.len is a |Funcref|
+that references this function.  The function can only be used through a
+|Funcref|.  It will automatically be deleted when there is no |Funcref|
+remaining that refers to it.
+
+It is not necessary to use the "dict" attribute for a numbered function.
+
+If you get an error for a numbered function, you can find out what it is with
+a trick.  Assuming the function is 42, the command is: >
+	:function {42}
+
+
+Functions for Dictionaries ~
+							*E715*
+Functions that can be used with a Dictionary: >
+	:if has_key(dict, 'foo')	" TRUE if dict has entry with key "foo"
+	:if empty(dict)			" TRUE if dict is empty
+	:let l = len(dict)		" number of items in dict
+	:let big = max(dict)		" maximum value in dict
+	:let small = min(dict)		" minimum value in dict
+	:let xs = count(dict, 'x')	" count nr of times 'x' appears in dict
+	:let s = string(dict)		" String representation of dict
+	:call map(dict, '">> " . v:val')  " prepend ">> " to each item
+
+
+1.5 Blobs ~
+						*blob* *Blob* *Blobs* *E978*
+A Blob mostly behaves like a |List| of numbers, where the numbers have an
+8-bit value, from 0 to 255.
+
+
+Blob creation ~
+
+A Blob can be created with a |blob-literal|: >
+	:let b = 0zFF00ED015DAF
+Dots can be inserted between bytes (pair of hex characters) for readability,
+they don't change the value: >
+	:let b = 0zFF00.ED01.5DAF
+
+A blob can be read from a file with |readfile()| passing the {type} argument
+set to "B", for example: >
+	:let b = readfile('image.png', 'B')
+
+A blob can be read from a channel with the |ch_readblob()| function.
+
+
+Blob index ~
+							*blob-index* *E979*
+A byte in the Blob can be accessed by putting the index in square brackets
+after the Blob.  Indexes are zero-based, thus the first byte has index zero. >
+	:let myblob = 0z00112233
+	:let byte = myblob[0]		" get the first byte: 0x00
+	:let byte = myblob[2]		" get the third byte: 0x22
+
+A negative index is counted from the end.  Index -1 refers to the last byte in
+the Blob, -2 to the last but one byte, etc. >
+	:let last = myblob[-1]		" get the last byte: 0x33
+
+To avoid an error for an invalid index use the |get()| function.  When an item
+is not available it returns -1 or the default value you specify: >
+	:echo get(myblob, idx)
+	:echo get(myblob, idx, 999)
+
+
+Blob iteration ~
+
+The |:for| loop executes commands for each byte of a Blob.  The loop variable is
+set to each byte in the Blob.  Example: >
+	:for byte in 0z112233
+	:   call Doit(byte)
+	:endfor
+This calls Doit() with 0x11, 0x22 and 0x33.
+
+
+Blob concatenation ~
+
+Two blobs can be concatenated with the "+" operator: >
+	:let longblob = myblob + 0z4455
+	:let myblob += 0z6677
+
+To change a blob in-place see |blob-modification| below.
+
+
+Part of a blob ~
+
+A part of the Blob can be obtained by specifying the first and last index,
+separated by a colon in square brackets: >
+	:let myblob = 0z00112233
+	:let shortblob = myblob[1:2]	" get 0z1122
+	:let shortblob = myblob[2:-1]	" get 0z2233
+
+Omitting the first index is similar to zero.  Omitting the last index is
+similar to -1. >
+	:let endblob = myblob[2:]	" from item 2 to the end: 0z2233
+	:let shortblob = myblob[2:2]	" Blob with one byte: 0z22
+	:let otherblob = myblob[:]	" make a copy of the Blob
+
+If the first index is beyond the last byte of the Blob or the second index is
+before the first index, the result is an empty Blob.  There is no error
+message.
+
+If the second index is equal to or greater than the length of the list the
+length minus one is used: >
+	:echo myblob[2:8]		" result: 0z2233
+
+
+Blob modification ~
+							*blob-modification*
+To change a specific byte of a blob use |:let| this way: >
+	:let blob[4] = 0x44
+
+When the index is just one beyond the end of the Blob, it is appended. Any
+higher index is an error.
+
+To change a sequence of bytes the [:] notation can be used: >
+	let blob[1:3] = 0z445566
+The length of the replaced bytes must be exactly the same as the value
+provided. *E972*
+
+To change part of a blob you can specify the first and last byte to be
+modified.  The value must have the same number of bytes in the range: >
+	:let blob[3:5] = 0z334455
+
+You can also use the functions |add()|, |remove()| and |insert()|.
+
+
+Blob identity ~
+
+Blobs can be compared for equality: >
+	if blob == 0z001122
+And for equal identity: >
+	if blob is otherblob
+<							*blob-identity* *E977*
+When variable "aa" is a Blob and you assign it to another variable "bb", both
+variables refer to the same Blob.  Then the "is" operator returns true.
+
+When making a copy using [:] or |copy()| the values are the same, but the
+identity is different: >
+	:let blob = 0z112233
+	:let blob2 = blob
+	:echo blob == blob2
+<	1 >
+	:echo blob is blob2
+<	1 >
+	:let blob3 = blob[:]
+	:echo blob == blob3
+<	1 >
+	:echo blob is blob3
+<	0
+
+Making a copy of a Blob is done with the |copy()| function.  Using [:] also
+works, as explained above.
+
+
+1.6 More about variables ~
+							*more-variables*
+If you need to know the type of a variable or expression, use the |type()|
+function.
+
+When the '!' flag is included in the 'viminfo' option, global variables that
+start with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase letter, are
+stored in the viminfo file |viminfo-file|.
+
+When the 'sessionoptions' option contains "global", global variables that
+start with an uppercase letter and contain at least one lowercase letter are
+stored in the session file |session-file|.
+
+variable name		can be stored where ~
+my_var_6		not
+My_Var_6		session file
+MY_VAR_6		viminfo file
+
+
+It's possible to form a variable name with curly braces, see
+|curly-braces-names|.
+
+==============================================================================
+2. Expression syntax					*expression-syntax*
+
+Expression syntax summary, from least to most significant:
+
+|expr1|	expr2
+	expr2 ? expr1 : expr1	if-then-else
+
+|expr2|	expr3
+	expr3 || expr3 ..	logical OR
+
+|expr3|	expr4
+	expr4 && expr4 ..	logical AND
+
+|expr4|	expr5
+	expr5 == expr5		equal
+	expr5 != expr5		not equal
+	expr5 >	 expr5		greater than
+	expr5 >= expr5		greater than or equal
+	expr5 <	 expr5		smaller than
+	expr5 <= expr5		smaller than or equal
+	expr5 =~ expr5		regexp matches
+	expr5 !~ expr5		regexp doesn't match
+
+	expr5 ==? expr5		equal, ignoring case
+	expr5 ==# expr5		equal, match case
+	etc.			As above, append ? for ignoring case, # for
+				matching case
+
+	expr5 is expr5		same |List|, |Dictionary| or |Blob| instance
+	expr5 isnot expr5	different |List|, |Dictionary| or |Blob|
+				instance
+
+|expr5|	expr6
+	expr6 +	 expr6 ..	number addition, list or blob concatenation
+	expr6 -	 expr6 ..	number subtraction
+	expr6 .	 expr6 ..	string concatenation
+
+|expr6|	expr7
+	expr7 *	 expr7 ..	number multiplication
+	expr7 /	 expr7 ..	number division
+	expr7 %	 expr7 ..	number modulo
+
+|expr7|	expr8
+	! expr7			logical NOT
+	- expr7			unary minus
+	+ expr7			unary plus
+
+|expr8|	expr9
+	expr8[expr1]		byte of a String or item of a |List|
+	expr8[expr1 : expr1]	substring of a String or sublist of a |List|
+	expr8.name		entry in a |Dictionary|
+	expr8(expr1, ...)	function call with |Funcref| variable
+
+|expr9|	number			number constant
+	"string"		string constant, backslash is special
+	'string'		string constant, ' is doubled
+	[expr1, ...]		|List|
+	{expr1: expr1, ...}	|Dictionary|
+	&option			option value
+	(expr1)			nested expression
+	variable		internal variable
+	va{ria}ble		internal variable with curly braces
+	$VAR			environment variable
+	@r			contents of register 'r'
+	function(expr1, ...)	function call
+	func{ti}on(expr1, ...)	function call with curly braces
+	{args -> expr1}		lambda expression
+
+
+".." indicates that the operations in this level can be concatenated.
+Example: >
+	&nu || &list && &shell == "csh"
+
+All expressions within one level are parsed from left to right.
+
+
+expr1							*expr1* *E109*
+-----
+
+expr2 ? expr1 : expr1
+
+The expression before the '?' is evaluated to a number.  If it evaluates to
+|TRUE|, the result is the value of the expression between the '?' and ':',
+otherwise the result is the value of the expression after the ':'.
+Example: >
+	:echo lnum == 1 ? "top" : lnum
+
+Since the first expression is an "expr2", it cannot contain another ?:.  The
+other two expressions can, thus allow for recursive use of ?:.
+Example: >
+	:echo lnum == 1 ? "top" : lnum == 1000 ? "last" : lnum
+
+To keep this readable, using |line-continuation| is suggested: >
+	:echo lnum == 1
+	:\	? "top"
+	:\	: lnum == 1000
+	:\		? "last"
+	:\		: lnum
+
+You should always put a space before the ':', otherwise it can be mistaken for
+use in a variable such as "a:1".
+
+
+expr2 and expr3						*expr2* *expr3*
+---------------
+
+expr3 || expr3 ..	logical OR		*expr-barbar*
+expr4 && expr4 ..	logical AND		*expr-&&*
+
+The "||" and "&&" operators take one argument on each side.  The arguments
+are (converted to) Numbers.  The result is:
+
+    input			 output ~
+n1	n2		n1 || n2	n1 && n2 ~
+|FALSE|	|FALSE|		|FALSE|		|FALSE|
+|FALSE|	|TRUE|		|TRUE|		|FALSE|
+|TRUE|	|FALSE|		|TRUE|		|FALSE|
+|TRUE|	|TRUE|		|TRUE|		|TRUE|
+
+The operators can be concatenated, for example: >
+
+	&nu || &list && &shell == "csh"
+
+Note that "&&" takes precedence over "||", so this has the meaning of: >
+
+	&nu || (&list && &shell == "csh")
+
+Once the result is known, the expression "short-circuits", that is, further
+arguments are not evaluated.  This is like what happens in C.  For example: >
+
+	let a = 1
+	echo a || b
+
+This is valid even if there is no variable called "b" because "a" is |TRUE|,
+so the result must be |TRUE|.  Similarly below: >
+
+	echo exists("b") && b == "yes"
+
+This is valid whether "b" has been defined or not.  The second clause will
+only be evaluated if "b" has been defined.
+
+
+expr4							*expr4*
+-----
+
+expr5 {cmp} expr5
+
+Compare two expr5 expressions, resulting in a 0 if it evaluates to false, or 1
+if it evaluates to true.
+
+			*expr-==*  *expr-!=*  *expr->*	 *expr->=*
+			*expr-<*   *expr-<=*  *expr-=~*  *expr-!~*
+			*expr-==#* *expr-!=#* *expr->#*  *expr->=#*
+			*expr-<#*  *expr-<=#* *expr-=~#* *expr-!~#*
+			*expr-==?* *expr-!=?* *expr->?*  *expr->=?*
+			*expr-<?*  *expr-<=?* *expr-=~?* *expr-!~?*
+			*expr-is* *expr-isnot* *expr-is#* *expr-isnot#*
+			*expr-is?* *expr-isnot?*
+		use 'ignorecase'    match case	   ignore case ~
+equal			==		==#		==?
+not equal		!=		!=#		!=?
+greater than		>		>#		>?
+greater than or equal	>=		>=#		>=?
+smaller than		<		<#		<?
+smaller than or equal	<=		<=#		<=?
+regexp matches		=~		=~#		=~?
+regexp doesn't match	!~		!~#		!~?
+same instance		is		is#		is?
+different instance	isnot		isnot#		isnot?
+
+Examples:
+"abc" ==# "Abc"	  evaluates to 0
+"abc" ==? "Abc"	  evaluates to 1
+"abc" == "Abc"	  evaluates to 1 if 'ignorecase' is set, 0 otherwise
+
+							*E691* *E692*
+A |List| can only be compared with a |List| and only "equal", "not equal",
+"is" and "isnot" can be used.  This compares the values of the list,
+recursively.  Ignoring case means case is ignored when comparing item values.
+
+							*E735* *E736*
+A |Dictionary| can only be compared with a |Dictionary| and only "equal", "not
+equal", "is" and "isnot" can be used.  This compares the key/values of the
+|Dictionary| recursively.  Ignoring case means case is ignored when comparing
+item values.
+
+							*E694*
+A |Funcref| can only be compared with a |Funcref| and only "equal", "not
+equal", "is" and "isnot" can be used.  Case is never ignored.  Whether
+arguments or a Dictionary are bound (with a partial) matters.  The
+Dictionaries must also be equal (or the same, in case of "is") and the
+arguments must be equal (or the same).
+
+To compare Funcrefs to see if they refer to the same function, ignoring bound
+Dictionary and arguments, use |get()| to get the function name: >
+	if get(Part1, 'name') == get(Part2, 'name')
+	   " Part1 and Part2 refer to the same function
+
+Using "is" or "isnot" with a |List|, |Dictionary| or |Blob| checks whether
+the expressions are referring to the same |List|, |Dictionary| or |Blob|
+instance.  A copy of a |List| is different from the original |List|.  When
+using "is" without a |List|, |Dictionary| or |Blob|, it is equivalent to
+using "equal", using "isnot" equivalent to using "not equal".  Except that
+a different type means the values are different: >
+	echo 4 == '4'
+	1
+	echo 4 is '4'
+	0
+	echo 0 is []
+	0
+"is#"/"isnot#" and "is?"/"isnot?" can be used to match and ignore case.
+
+When comparing a String with a Number, the String is converted to a Number,
+and the comparison is done on Numbers.  This means that: >
+	echo 0 == 'x'
+	1
+because 'x' converted to a Number is zero.  However: >
+	echo [0] == ['x']
+	0
+Inside a List or Dictionary this conversion is not used.
+
+When comparing two Strings, this is done with strcmp() or stricmp().  This
+results in the mathematical difference (comparing byte values), not
+necessarily the alphabetical difference in the local language.
+
+When using the operators with a trailing '#', or the short version and
+'ignorecase' is off, the comparing is done with strcmp(): case matters.
+
+When using the operators with a trailing '?', or the short version and
+'ignorecase' is set, the comparing is done with stricmp(): case is ignored.
+
+'smartcase' is not used.
+
+The "=~" and "!~" operators match the lefthand argument with the righthand
+argument, which is used as a pattern.  See |pattern| for what a pattern is.
+This matching is always done like 'magic' was set and 'cpoptions' is empty, no
+matter what the actual value of 'magic' or 'cpoptions' is.  This makes scripts
+portable.  To avoid backslashes in the regexp pattern to be doubled, use a
+single-quote string, see |literal-string|.
+Since a string is considered to be a single line, a multi-line pattern
+(containing \n, backslash-n) will not match.  However, a literal NL character
+can be matched like an ordinary character.  Examples:
+	"foo\nbar" =~ "\n"	evaluates to 1
+	"foo\nbar" =~ "\\n"	evaluates to 0
+
+
+expr5 and expr6						*expr5* *expr6*
+---------------
+expr6 + expr6  Number addition, |List| or |Blob| concatenation	*expr-+*
+expr6 - expr6  Number subtraction				*expr--*
+expr6 . expr6  String concatenation				*expr-.*
+
+For |Lists| only "+" is possible and then both expr6 must be a list.  The
+result is a new list with the two lists Concatenated.
+
+expr7 * expr7  Number multiplication				*expr-star*
+expr7 / expr7  Number division					*expr-/*
+expr7 % expr7  Number modulo					*expr-%*
+
+For all, except ".", Strings are converted to Numbers.
+For bitwise operators see |and()|, |or()| and |xor()|.
+
+Note the difference between "+" and ".":
+	"123" + "456" = 579
+	"123" . "456" = "123456"
+
+Since '.' has the same precedence as '+' and '-', you need to read: >
+	1 . 90 + 90.0
+As: >
+	(1 . 90) + 90.0
+That works, since the String "190" is automatically converted to the Number
+190, which can be added to the Float 90.0.  However: >
+	1 . 90 * 90.0
+Should be read as: >
+	1 . (90 * 90.0)
+Since '.' has lower precedence than '*'.  This does NOT work, since this
+attempts to concatenate a Float and a String.
+
+When dividing a Number by zero the result depends on the value:
+	  0 / 0  = -0x80000000	(like NaN for Float)
+	 >0 / 0  =  0x7fffffff	(like positive infinity)
+	 <0 / 0  = -0x7fffffff	(like negative infinity)
+	(before Vim 7.2 it was always 0x7fffffff)
+
+When 64-bit Number support is enabled:
+	  0 / 0  = -0x8000000000000000	(like NaN for Float)
+	 >0 / 0  =  0x7fffffffffffffff	(like positive infinity)
+	 <0 / 0  = -0x7fffffffffffffff	(like negative infinity)
+
+When the righthand side of '%' is zero, the result is 0.
+
+None of these work for |Funcref|s.
+
+. and % do not work for Float. *E804*
+
+
+expr7							*expr7*
+-----
+! expr7			logical NOT		*expr-!*
+- expr7			unary minus		*expr-unary--*
++ expr7			unary plus		*expr-unary-+*
+
+For '!' |TRUE| becomes |FALSE|, |FALSE| becomes |TRUE| (one).
+For '-' the sign of the number is changed.
+For '+' the number is unchanged.
+
+A String will be converted to a Number first.
+
+These three can be repeated and mixed.  Examples:
+	!-1	    == 0
+	!!8	    == 1
+	--9	    == 9
+
+
+expr8							*expr8*
+-----
+This expression is either |expr9| or a sequence of the alternatives below,
+in any order.  E.g., these are all possible:
+	expr9[expr1].name
+	expr9.name[expr1]
+	expr9(expr1, ...)[expr1].name
+
+
+expr8[expr1]		item of String or |List|	*expr-[]* *E111*
+							*E909* *subscript*
+If expr8 is a Number or String this results in a String that contains the
+expr1'th single byte from expr8.  expr8 is used as a String, expr1 as a
+Number.  This doesn't recognize multi-byte encodings, see `byteidx()` for
+an alternative, or use `split()` to turn the string into a list of characters.
+
+Index zero gives the first byte.  This is like it works in C.  Careful:
+text column numbers start with one!  Example, to get the byte under the
+cursor: >
+	:let c = getline(".")[col(".") - 1]
+
+If the length of the String is less than the index, the result is an empty
+String.  A negative index always results in an empty string (reason: backward
+compatibility).  Use [-1:] to get the last byte.
+
+If expr8 is a |List| then it results the item at index expr1.  See |list-index|
+for possible index values.  If the index is out of range this results in an
+error.  Example: >
+	:let item = mylist[-1]		" get last item
+
+Generally, if a |List| index is equal to or higher than the length of the
+|List|, or more negative than the length of the |List|, this results in an
+error.
+
+
+expr8[expr1a : expr1b]	substring or sublist		*expr-[:]*
+
+If expr8 is a Number or String this results in the substring with the bytes
+from expr1a to and including expr1b.  expr8 is used as a String, expr1a and
+expr1b are used as a Number.  This doesn't recognize multi-byte encodings, see
+|byteidx()| for computing the indexes.
+
+If expr1a is omitted zero is used.  If expr1b is omitted the length of the
+string minus one is used.
+
+A negative number can be used to measure from the end of the string.  -1 is
+the last character, -2 the last but one, etc.
+
+If an index goes out of range for the string characters are omitted.  If
+expr1b is smaller than expr1a the result is an empty string.
+
+Examples: >
+	:let c = name[-1:]		" last byte of a string
+	:let c = name[-2:-2]		" last but one byte of a string
+	:let s = line(".")[4:]		" from the fifth byte to the end
+	:let s = s[:-3]			" remove last two bytes
+<
+							*slice*
+If expr8 is a |List| this results in a new |List| with the items indicated by
+the indexes expr1a and expr1b.  This works like with a String, as explained
+just above. Also see |sublist| below.  Examples: >
+	:let l = mylist[:3]		" first four items
+	:let l = mylist[4:4]		" List with one item
+	:let l = mylist[:]		" shallow copy of a List
+
+If expr8 is a |Blob| this results in a new |Blob| with the bytes in the
+indexes expr1a and expr1b, inclusive.  Examples: >
+	:let b = 0zDEADBEEF
+	:let bs = b[1:2]		" 0zADBE
+	:let bs = b[:]			" copy of 0zDEADBEEF
+
+Using expr8[expr1] or expr8[expr1a : expr1b] on a |Funcref| results in an
+error.
+
+Watch out for confusion between a namespace and a variable followed by a colon
+for a sublist: >
+	mylist[n:]     " uses variable n
+	mylist[s:]     " uses namespace s:, error!
+
+
+expr8.name		entry in a |Dictionary|		*expr-entry*
+
+If expr8 is a |Dictionary| and it is followed by a dot, then the following
+name will be used as a key in the |Dictionary|.  This is just like:
+expr8[name].
+
+The name must consist of alphanumeric characters, just like a variable name,
+but it may start with a number.  Curly braces cannot be used.
+
+There must not be white space before or after the dot.
+
+Examples: >
+	:let dict = {"one": 1, 2: "two"}
+	:echo dict.one
+	:echo dict .2
+
+Note that the dot is also used for String concatenation.  To avoid confusion
+always put spaces around the dot for String concatenation.
+
+
+expr8(expr1, ...)	|Funcref| function call
+
+When expr8 is a |Funcref| type variable, invoke the function it refers to.
+
+
+
+							*expr9*
+number
+------
+number			number constant			*expr-number*
+				*hex-number* *octal-number* *binary-number*
+
+Decimal, Hexadecimal (starting with 0x or 0X), Binary (starting with 0b or 0B)
+and Octal (starting with 0).
+
+						*floating-point-format*
+Floating point numbers can be written in two forms:
+
+	[-+]{N}.{M}
+	[-+]{N}.{M}[eE][-+]{exp}
+
+{N} and {M} are numbers.  Both {N} and {M} must be present and can only
+contain digits.
+[-+] means there is an optional plus or minus sign.
+{exp} is the exponent, power of 10.
+Only a decimal point is accepted, not a comma.  No matter what the current
+locale is.
+{only when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+Examples:
+	123.456
+	+0.0001
+	55.0
+	-0.123
+	1.234e03
+	1.0E-6
+	-3.1416e+88
+
+These are INVALID:
+	3.		empty {M}
+	1e40		missing .{M}
+
+Rationale:
+Before floating point was introduced, the text "123.456" was interpreted as
+the two numbers "123" and "456", both converted to a string and concatenated,
+resulting in the string "123456".  Since this was considered pointless, and we
+could not find it intentionally being used in Vim scripts, this backwards
+incompatibility was accepted in favor of being able to use the normal notation
+for floating point numbers.
+
+							*float-pi* *float-e*
+A few useful values to copy&paste: >
+	:let pi = 3.14159265359
+	:let e  = 2.71828182846
+Or, if you don't want to write them in as floating-point literals, you can
+also use functions, like the following: >
+	:let pi = acos(-1.0)
+	:let e  = exp(1.0)
+<
+						*floating-point-precision*
+The precision and range of floating points numbers depends on what "double"
+means in the library Vim was compiled with.  There is no way to change this at
+runtime.
+
+The default for displaying a |Float| is to use 6 decimal places, like using
+printf("%g", f).  You can select something else when using the |printf()|
+function.  Example: >
+	:echo printf('%.15e', atan(1))
+<	7.853981633974483e-01
+
+
+
+string					*string* *String* *expr-string* *E114*
+------
+"string"		string constant		*expr-quote*
+
+Note that double quotes are used.
+
+A string constant accepts these special characters:
+\...	three-digit octal number (e.g., "\316")
+\..	two-digit octal number (must be followed by non-digit)
+\.	one-digit octal number (must be followed by non-digit)
+\x..	byte specified with two hex numbers (e.g., "\x1f")
+\x.	byte specified with one hex number (must be followed by non-hex char)
+\X..	same as \x..
+\X.	same as \x.
+\u....	character specified with up to 4 hex numbers, stored according to the
+	current value of 'encoding' (e.g., "\u02a4")
+\U....	same as \u but allows up to 8 hex numbers.
+\b	backspace <BS>
+\e	escape <Esc>
+\f	formfeed <FF>
+\n	newline <NL>
+\r	return <CR>
+\t	tab <Tab>
+\\	backslash
+\"	double quote
+\<xxx>	Special key named "xxx".  e.g. "\<C-W>" for CTRL-W.  This is for use
+	in mappings, the 0x80 byte is escaped.
+	To use the double quote character it must be escaped: "<M-\">".
+	Don't use <Char-xxxx> to get a utf-8 character, use \uxxxx as
+	mentioned above.
+
+Note that "\xff" is stored as the byte 255, which may be invalid in some
+encodings.  Use "\u00ff" to store character 255 according to the current value
+of 'encoding'.
+
+Note that "\000" and "\x00" force the end of the string.
+
+
+blob-literal				*blob-literal* *E973*
+------------
+
+Hexadecimal starting with 0z or 0Z, with an arbitrary number of bytes.
+The sequence must be an even number of hex characters.  Example: >
+	:let b = 0zFF00ED015DAF
+
+
+literal-string						*literal-string* *E115*
+---------------
+'string'		string constant			*expr-'*
+
+Note that single quotes are used.
+
+This string is taken as it is.  No backslashes are removed or have a special
+meaning.  The only exception is that two quotes stand for one quote.
+
+Single quoted strings are useful for patterns, so that backslashes do not need
+to be doubled.  These two commands are equivalent: >
+	if a =~ "\\s*"
+	if a =~ '\s*'
+
+
+option						*expr-option* *E112* *E113*
+------
+&option			option value, local value if possible
+&g:option		global option value
+&l:option		local option value
+
+Examples: >
+	echo "tabstop is " . &tabstop
+	if &insertmode
+
+Any option name can be used here.  See |options|.  When using the local value
+and there is no buffer-local or window-local value, the global value is used
+anyway.
+
+
+register						*expr-register* *@r*
+--------
+@r			contents of register 'r'
+
+The result is the contents of the named register, as a single string.
+Newlines are inserted where required.  To get the contents of the unnamed
+register use @" or @@.  See |registers| for an explanation of the available
+registers.
+
+When using the '=' register you get the expression itself, not what it
+evaluates to.  Use |eval()| to evaluate it.
+
+
+nesting							*expr-nesting* *E110*
+-------
+(expr1)			nested expression
+
+
+environment variable					*expr-env*
+--------------------
+$VAR			environment variable
+
+The String value of any environment variable.  When it is not defined, the
+result is an empty string.
+						*expr-env-expand*
+Note that there is a difference between using $VAR directly and using
+expand("$VAR").  Using it directly will only expand environment variables that
+are known inside the current Vim session.  Using expand() will first try using
+the environment variables known inside the current Vim session.  If that
+fails, a shell will be used to expand the variable.  This can be slow, but it
+does expand all variables that the shell knows about.  Example: >
+	:echo $shell
+	:echo expand("$shell")
+The first one probably doesn't echo anything, the second echoes the $shell
+variable (if your shell supports it).
+
+
+internal variable					*expr-variable*
+-----------------
+variable		internal variable
+See below |internal-variables|.
+
+
+function call		*expr-function* *E116* *E118* *E119* *E120*
+-------------
+function(expr1, ...)	function call
+See below |functions|.
+
+
+lambda expression				*expr-lambda* *lambda*
+-----------------
+{args -> expr1}		lambda expression
+
+A lambda expression creates a new unnamed function which returns the result of
+evaluating |expr1|.  Lambda expressions differ from |user-functions| in
+the following ways:
+
+1. The body of the lambda expression is an |expr1| and not a sequence of |Ex|
+   commands.
+2. The prefix "a:" should not be used for arguments.  E.g.: >
+	:let F = {arg1, arg2 -> arg1 - arg2}
+	:echo F(5, 2)
+<	3
+
+The arguments are optional.  Example: >
+	:let F = {-> 'error function'}
+	:echo F()
+<	error function
+							*closure*
+Lambda expressions can access outer scope variables and arguments.  This is
+often called a closure.  Example where "i" and "a:arg" are used in a lambda
+while they already exist in the function scope.  They remain valid even after
+the function returns: >
+	:function Foo(arg)
+	:  let i = 3
+	:  return {x -> x + i - a:arg}
+	:endfunction
+	:let Bar = Foo(4)
+	:echo Bar(6)
+<	5
+
+Note that the variables must exist in the outer scope before the lamba is
+defined for this to work.  See also |:func-closure|.
+
+Lambda and closure support can be checked with: >
+	if has('lambda')
+
+Examples for using a lambda expression with |sort()|, |map()| and |filter()|: >
+	:echo map([1, 2, 3], {idx, val -> val + 1})
+<	[2, 3, 4] >
+	:echo sort([3,7,2,1,4], {a, b -> a - b})
+<	[1, 2, 3, 4, 7]
+
+The lambda expression is also useful for Channel, Job and timer: >
+	:let timer = timer_start(500,
+			\ {-> execute("echo 'Handler called'", "")},
+			\ {'repeat': 3})
+<	Handler called
+	Handler called
+	Handler called
+
+Note how execute() is used to execute an Ex command.  That's ugly though.
+
+
+Lambda expressions have internal names like '<lambda>42'.  If you get an error
+for a lambda expression, you can find what it is with the following command: >
+	:function {'<lambda>42'}
+See also: |numbered-function|
+
+==============================================================================
+3. Internal variable				*internal-variables* *E461*
+
+An internal variable name can be made up of letters, digits and '_'.  But it
+cannot start with a digit.  It's also possible to use curly braces, see
+|curly-braces-names|.
+
+An internal variable is created with the ":let" command |:let|.
+An internal variable is explicitly destroyed with the ":unlet" command
+|:unlet|.
+Using a name that is not an internal variable or refers to a variable that has
+been destroyed results in an error.
+
+There are several name spaces for variables.  Which one is to be used is
+specified by what is prepended:
+
+		(nothing) In a function: local to a function; otherwise: global
+|buffer-variable|    b:	  Local to the current buffer.
+|window-variable|    w:	  Local to the current window.
+|tabpage-variable|   t:	  Local to the current tab page.
+|global-variable|    g:	  Global.
+|local-variable|     l:	  Local to a function.
+|script-variable|    s:	  Local to a |:source|'ed Vim script.
+|function-argument|  a:	  Function argument (only inside a function).
+|vim-variable|       v:	  Global, predefined by Vim.
+
+The scope name by itself can be used as a |Dictionary|.  For example, to
+delete all script-local variables: >
+	:for k in keys(s:)
+	:    unlet s:[k]
+	:endfor
+<
+						*buffer-variable* *b:var* *b:*
+A variable name that is preceded with "b:" is local to the current buffer.
+Thus you can have several "b:foo" variables, one for each buffer.
+This kind of variable is deleted when the buffer is wiped out or deleted with
+|:bdelete|.
+
+One local buffer variable is predefined:
+					*b:changedtick* *changetick*
+b:changedtick	The total number of changes to the current buffer.  It is
+		incremented for each change.  An undo command is also a change
+		in this case.  This can be used to perform an action only when
+		the buffer has changed.  Example: >
+		    :if my_changedtick != b:changedtick
+		    :	let my_changedtick = b:changedtick
+		    :	call My_Update()
+		    :endif
+<		You cannot change or delete the b:changedtick variable.
+
+						*window-variable* *w:var* *w:*
+A variable name that is preceded with "w:" is local to the current window.  It
+is deleted when the window is closed.
+
+						*tabpage-variable* *t:var* *t:*
+A variable name that is preceded with "t:" is local to the current tab page,
+It is deleted when the tab page is closed. {not available when compiled
+without the |+windows| feature}
+
+						*global-variable* *g:var* *g:*
+Inside functions global variables are accessed with "g:".  Omitting this will
+access a variable local to a function.  But "g:" can also be used in any other
+place if you like.
+
+						*local-variable* *l:var* *l:*
+Inside functions local variables are accessed without prepending anything.
+But you can also prepend "l:" if you like.  However, without prepending "l:"
+you may run into reserved variable names.  For example "count".  By itself it
+refers to "v:count".  Using "l:count" you can have a local variable with the
+same name.
+
+						*script-variable* *s:var*
+In a Vim script variables starting with "s:" can be used.  They cannot be
+accessed from outside of the scripts, thus are local to the script.
+
+They can be used in:
+- commands executed while the script is sourced
+- functions defined in the script
+- autocommands defined in the script
+- functions and autocommands defined in functions and autocommands which were
+  defined in the script (recursively)
+- user defined commands defined in the script
+Thus not in:
+- other scripts sourced from this one
+- mappings
+- menus
+- etc.
+
+Script variables can be used to avoid conflicts with global variable names.
+Take this example: >
+
+	let s:counter = 0
+	function MyCounter()
+	  let s:counter = s:counter + 1
+	  echo s:counter
+	endfunction
+	command Tick call MyCounter()
+
+You can now invoke "Tick" from any script, and the "s:counter" variable in
+that script will not be changed, only the "s:counter" in the script where
+"Tick" was defined is used.
+
+Another example that does the same: >
+
+	let s:counter = 0
+	command Tick let s:counter = s:counter + 1 | echo s:counter
+
+When calling a function and invoking a user-defined command, the context for
+script variables is set to the script where the function or command was
+defined.
+
+The script variables are also available when a function is defined inside a
+function that is defined in a script.  Example: >
+
+	let s:counter = 0
+	function StartCounting(incr)
+	  if a:incr
+	    function MyCounter()
+	      let s:counter = s:counter + 1
+	    endfunction
+	  else
+	    function MyCounter()
+	      let s:counter = s:counter - 1
+	    endfunction
+	  endif
+	endfunction
+
+This defines the MyCounter() function either for counting up or counting down
+when calling StartCounting().  It doesn't matter from where StartCounting() is
+called, the s:counter variable will be accessible in MyCounter().
+
+When the same script is sourced again it will use the same script variables.
+They will remain valid as long as Vim is running.  This can be used to
+maintain a counter: >
+
+	if !exists("s:counter")
+	  let s:counter = 1
+	  echo "script executed for the first time"
+	else
+	  let s:counter = s:counter + 1
+	  echo "script executed " . s:counter . " times now"
+	endif
+
+Note that this means that filetype plugins don't get a different set of script
+variables for each buffer.  Use local buffer variables instead |b:var|.
+
+
+PREDEFINED VIM VARIABLES			*vim-variable* *v:var* *v:*
+								*E963*
+Some variables can be set by the user, but the type cannot be changed.
+
+					*v:beval_col* *beval_col-variable*
+v:beval_col	The number of the column, over which the mouse pointer is.
+		This is the byte index in the |v:beval_lnum| line.
+		Only valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option.
+
+					*v:beval_bufnr* *beval_bufnr-variable*
+v:beval_bufnr	The number of the buffer, over which the mouse pointer is. Only
+		valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option.
+
+					*v:beval_lnum* *beval_lnum-variable*
+v:beval_lnum	The number of the line, over which the mouse pointer is. Only
+		valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option.
+
+					*v:beval_text* *beval_text-variable*
+v:beval_text	The text under or after the mouse pointer.  Usually a word as
+		it is useful for debugging a C program.  'iskeyword' applies,
+		but a dot and "->" before the position is included.  When on a
+		']' the text before it is used, including the matching '[' and
+		word before it.  When on a Visual area within one line the
+		highlighted text is used.  Also see |<cexpr>|.
+		Only valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option.
+
+					*v:beval_winnr* *beval_winnr-variable*
+v:beval_winnr	The number of the window, over which the mouse pointer is. Only
+		valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option.  The first
+		window has number zero (unlike most other places where a
+		window gets a number).
+
+					*v:beval_winid* *beval_winid-variable*
+v:beval_winid	The |window-ID| of the window, over which the mouse pointer
+		is.  Otherwise like v:beval_winnr.
+
+					*v:char* *char-variable*
+v:char		Argument for evaluating 'formatexpr' and used for the typed
+		character when using <expr> in an abbreviation |:map-<expr>|.
+		It is also used by the |InsertCharPre| and |InsertEnter| events.
+
+			*v:charconvert_from* *charconvert_from-variable*
+v:charconvert_from
+		The name of the character encoding of a file to be converted.
+		Only valid while evaluating the 'charconvert' option.
+
+			*v:charconvert_to* *charconvert_to-variable*
+v:charconvert_to
+		The name of the character encoding of a file after conversion.
+		Only valid while evaluating the 'charconvert' option.
+
+					*v:cmdarg* *cmdarg-variable*
+v:cmdarg	This variable is used for two purposes:
+		1. The extra arguments given to a file read/write command.
+		   Currently these are "++enc=" and "++ff=".  This variable is
+		   set before an autocommand event for a file read/write
+		   command is triggered.  There is a leading space to make it
+		   possible to append this variable directly after the
+		   read/write command.  Note: The "+cmd" argument isn't
+		   included here, because it will be executed anyway.
+		2. When printing a PostScript file with ":hardcopy" this is
+		   the argument for the ":hardcopy" command.  This can be used
+		   in 'printexpr'.
+
+					*v:cmdbang* *cmdbang-variable*
+v:cmdbang	Set like v:cmdarg for a file read/write command.  When a "!"
+		was used the value is 1, otherwise it is 0.  Note that this
+		can only be used in autocommands.  For user commands |<bang>|
+		can be used.
+
+				*v:completed_item* *completed_item-variable*
+v:completed_item
+		|Dictionary| containing the |complete-items| for the most
+		recently completed word after |CompleteDone|.  The
+		|Dictionary| is empty if the completion failed.
+
+					*v:count* *count-variable*
+v:count		The count given for the last Normal mode command.  Can be used
+		to get the count before a mapping.  Read-only.  Example: >
+	:map _x :<C-U>echo "the count is " . v:count<CR>
+<		Note: The <C-U> is required to remove the line range that you
+		get when typing ':' after a count.
+		When there are two counts, as in "3d2w", they are multiplied,
+		just like what happens in the command, "d6w" for the example.
+		Also used for evaluating the 'formatexpr' option.
+		"count" also works, for backwards compatibility.
+
+					*v:count1* *count1-variable*
+v:count1	Just like "v:count", but defaults to one when no count is
+		used.
+
+						*v:ctype* *ctype-variable*
+v:ctype		The current locale setting for characters of the runtime
+		environment.  This allows Vim scripts to be aware of the
+		current locale encoding.  Technical: it's the value of
+		LC_CTYPE.  When not using a locale the value is "C".
+		This variable can not be set directly, use the |:language|
+		command.
+		See |multi-lang|.
+
+					*v:dying* *dying-variable*
+v:dying		Normally zero.  When a deadly signal is caught it's set to
+		one.  When multiple signals are caught the number increases.
+		Can be used in an autocommand to check if Vim didn't
+		terminate normally. {only works on Unix}
+		Example: >
+	:au VimLeave * if v:dying | echo "\nAAAAaaaarrrggghhhh!!!\n" | endif
+<		Note: if another deadly signal is caught when v:dying is one,
+		VimLeave autocommands will not be executed.
+
+					*v:errmsg* *errmsg-variable*
+v:errmsg	Last given error message.  It's allowed to set this variable.
+		Example: >
+	:let v:errmsg = ""
+	:silent! next
+	:if v:errmsg != ""
+	:  ... handle error
+<		"errmsg" also works, for backwards compatibility.
+
+				*v:errors* *errors-variable* *assert-return*
+v:errors	Errors found by assert functions, such as |assert_true()|.
+		This is a list of strings.
+		The assert functions append an item when an assert fails.
+		The return value indicates this: a one is returned if an item
+		was added to v:errors, otherwise zero is returned.
+		To remove old results make it empty: >
+	:let v:errors = []
+<		If v:errors is set to anything but a list it is made an empty
+		list by the assert function.
+
+					*v:event* *event-variable*
+v:event		Dictionary containing information about the current
+		|autocommand|.  The dictionary is emptied when the |autocommand|
+		finishes, please refer to |dict-identity| for how to get an
+		independent copy of it.
+
+					*v:exception* *exception-variable*
+v:exception	The value of the exception most recently caught and not
+		finished.  See also |v:throwpoint| and |throw-variables|.
+		Example: >
+	:try
+	:  throw "oops"
+	:catch /.*/
+	:  echo "caught" v:exception
+	:endtry
+<		Output: "caught oops".
+
+					*v:false* *false-variable*
+v:false		A Number with value zero. Used to put "false" in JSON.  See
+		|json_encode()|.
+		When used as a string this evaluates to "v:false". >
+			echo v:false
+<			v:false ~
+		That is so that eval() can parse the string back to the same
+		value.  Read-only.
+
+					*v:fcs_reason* *fcs_reason-variable*
+v:fcs_reason	The reason why the |FileChangedShell| event was triggered.
+		Can be used in an autocommand to decide what to do and/or what
+		to set v:fcs_choice to.  Possible values:
+			deleted		file no longer exists
+			conflict	file contents, mode or timestamp was
+					changed and buffer is modified
+			changed		file contents has changed
+			mode		mode of file changed
+			time		only file timestamp changed
+
+					*v:fcs_choice* *fcs_choice-variable*
+v:fcs_choice	What should happen after a |FileChangedShell| event was
+		triggered.  Can be used in an autocommand to tell Vim what to
+		do with the affected buffer:
+			reload		Reload the buffer (does not work if
+					the file was deleted).
+			ask		Ask the user what to do, as if there
+					was no autocommand.  Except that when
+					only the timestamp changed nothing
+					will happen.
+			<empty>		Nothing, the autocommand should do
+					everything that needs to be done.
+		The default is empty.  If another (invalid) value is used then
+		Vim behaves like it is empty, there is no warning message.
+
+					*v:fname_in* *fname_in-variable*
+v:fname_in	The name of the input file.  Valid while evaluating:
+			option		used for ~
+			'charconvert'	file to be converted
+			'diffexpr'	original file
+			'patchexpr'	original file
+			'printexpr'	file to be printed
+		And set to the swap file name for |SwapExists|.
+
+					*v:fname_out* *fname_out-variable*
+v:fname_out	The name of the output file.  Only valid while
+		evaluating:
+			option		used for ~
+			'charconvert'	resulting converted file (*)
+			'diffexpr'	output of diff
+			'patchexpr'	resulting patched file
+		(*) When doing conversion for a write command (e.g., ":w
+		file") it will be equal to v:fname_in.  When doing conversion
+		for a read command (e.g., ":e file") it will be a temporary
+		file and different from v:fname_in.
+
+					*v:fname_new* *fname_new-variable*
+v:fname_new	The name of the new version of the file.  Only valid while
+		evaluating 'diffexpr'.
+
+					*v:fname_diff* *fname_diff-variable*
+v:fname_diff	The name of the diff (patch) file.  Only valid while
+		evaluating 'patchexpr'.
+
+					*v:folddashes* *folddashes-variable*
+v:folddashes	Used for 'foldtext': dashes representing foldlevel of a closed
+		fold.
+		Read-only in the |sandbox|. |fold-foldtext|
+
+					*v:foldlevel* *foldlevel-variable*
+v:foldlevel	Used for 'foldtext': foldlevel of closed fold.
+		Read-only in the |sandbox|. |fold-foldtext|
+
+					*v:foldend* *foldend-variable*
+v:foldend	Used for 'foldtext': last line of closed fold.
+		Read-only in the |sandbox|. |fold-foldtext|
+
+					*v:foldstart* *foldstart-variable*
+v:foldstart	Used for 'foldtext': first line of closed fold.
+		Read-only in the |sandbox|. |fold-foldtext|
+
+					*v:hlsearch* *hlsearch-variable*
+v:hlsearch	Variable that indicates whether search highlighting is on.
+		Setting it makes sense only if 'hlsearch' is enabled which
+		requires |+extra_search|. Setting this variable to zero acts
+		like the |:nohlsearch| command, setting it to one acts like >
+			let &hlsearch = &hlsearch
+<		Note that the value is restored when returning from a
+		function. |function-search-undo|.
+
+					*v:insertmode* *insertmode-variable*
+v:insertmode	Used for the |InsertEnter| and |InsertChange| autocommand
+		events.  Values:
+			i	Insert mode
+			r	Replace mode
+			v	Virtual Replace mode
+
+						*v:key* *key-variable*
+v:key		Key of the current item of a |Dictionary|.  Only valid while
+		evaluating the expression used with |map()| and |filter()|.
+		Read-only.
+
+						*v:lang* *lang-variable*
+v:lang		The current locale setting for messages of the runtime
+		environment.  This allows Vim scripts to be aware of the
+		current language.  Technical: it's the value of LC_MESSAGES.
+		The value is system dependent.
+		This variable can not be set directly, use the |:language|
+		command.
+		It can be different from |v:ctype| when messages are desired
+		in a different language than what is used for character
+		encoding.  See |multi-lang|.
+
+						*v:lc_time* *lc_time-variable*
+v:lc_time	The current locale setting for time messages of the runtime
+		environment.  This allows Vim scripts to be aware of the
+		current language.  Technical: it's the value of LC_TIME.
+		This variable can not be set directly, use the |:language|
+		command.  See |multi-lang|.
+
+						*v:lnum* *lnum-variable*
+v:lnum		Line number for the 'foldexpr' |fold-expr|, 'formatexpr' and
+		'indentexpr' expressions, tab page number for 'guitablabel'
+		and 'guitabtooltip'.  Only valid while one of these
+		expressions is being evaluated.  Read-only when in the
+		|sandbox|.
+
+					*v:mouse_win* *mouse_win-variable*
+v:mouse_win	Window number for a mouse click obtained with |getchar()|.
+		First window has number 1, like with |winnr()|.  The value is
+		zero when there was no mouse button click.
+
+					*v:mouse_winid* *mouse_winid-variable*
+v:mouse_winid	Window ID for a mouse click obtained with |getchar()|.
+		The value is zero when there was no mouse button click.
+
+					*v:mouse_lnum* *mouse_lnum-variable*
+v:mouse_lnum	Line number for a mouse click obtained with |getchar()|.
+		This is the text line number, not the screen line number.  The
+		value is zero when there was no mouse button click.
+
+					*v:mouse_col* *mouse_col-variable*
+v:mouse_col	Column number for a mouse click obtained with |getchar()|.
+		This is the screen column number, like with |virtcol()|.  The
+		value is zero when there was no mouse button click.
+
+					*v:none* *none-variable* *None*
+v:none		An empty String. Used to put an empty item in JSON.  See
+		|json_encode()|.
+		When used as a number this evaluates to zero.
+		When used as a string this evaluates to "v:none". >
+			echo v:none
+<			v:none ~
+		That is so that eval() can parse the string back to the same
+		value.  Read-only.
+
+					*v:null* *null-variable*
+v:null		An empty String. Used to put "null" in JSON.  See
+		|json_encode()|.
+		When used as a number this evaluates to zero.
+		When used as a string this evaluates to "v:null". >
+			echo v:null
+<			v:null ~
+		That is so that eval() can parse the string back to the same
+		value.  Read-only.
+
+					*v:oldfiles* *oldfiles-variable*
+v:oldfiles	List of file names that is loaded from the |viminfo| file on
+		startup.  These are the files that Vim remembers marks for.
+		The length of the List is limited by the ' argument of the
+		'viminfo' option (default is 100).
+		When the |viminfo| file is not used the List is empty.
+		Also see |:oldfiles| and |c_#<|.
+		The List can be modified, but this has no effect on what is
+		stored in the |viminfo| file later.  If you use values other
+		than String this will cause trouble.
+		{only when compiled with the |+viminfo| feature}
+
+						    *v:option_new*
+v:option_new    New value of the option. Valid while executing an |OptionSet|
+		autocommand.
+						    *v:option_old*
+v:option_old    Old value of the option. Valid while executing an |OptionSet|
+		autocommand.
+						    *v:option_type*
+v:option_type   Scope of the set command. Valid while executing an
+		|OptionSet| autocommand. Can be either "global" or "local"
+					*v:operator* *operator-variable*
+v:operator	The last operator given in Normal mode.  This is a single
+		character except for commands starting with <g> or <z>,
+		in which case it is two characters.  Best used alongside
+		|v:prevcount| and |v:register|.  Useful if you want to cancel
+		Operator-pending mode and then use the operator, e.g.: >
+			:omap O <Esc>:call MyMotion(v:operator)<CR>
+<		The value remains set until another operator is entered, thus
+		don't expect it to be empty.
+		v:operator is not set for |:delete|, |:yank| or other Ex
+		commands.
+		Read-only.
+
+					*v:prevcount* *prevcount-variable*
+v:prevcount	The count given for the last but one Normal mode command.
+		This is the v:count value of the previous command.  Useful if
+		you want to cancel Visual or Operator-pending mode and then
+		use the count, e.g.: >
+			:vmap % <Esc>:call MyFilter(v:prevcount)<CR>
+<		Read-only.
+
+					*v:profiling* *profiling-variable*
+v:profiling	Normally zero.  Set to one after using ":profile start".
+		See |profiling|.
+
+					*v:progname* *progname-variable*
+v:progname	Contains the name (with path removed) with which Vim was
+		invoked.  Allows you to do special initialisations for |view|,
+		|evim| etc., or any other name you might symlink to Vim.
+		Read-only.
+
+					*v:progpath* *progpath-variable*
+v:progpath	Contains the command with which Vim was invoked, including the
+		path.  Useful if you want to message a Vim server using a
+		|--remote-expr|.
+		To get the full path use: >
+			echo exepath(v:progpath)
+<		If the path is relative it will be expanded to the full path,
+		so that it still works after `:cd`. Thus starting "./vim"
+		results in "/home/user/path/to/vim/src/vim".
+		On MS-Windows the executable may be called "vim.exe", but the
+		".exe" is not added to v:progpath.
+		Read-only.
+
+					*v:register* *register-variable*
+v:register	The name of the register in effect for the current normal mode
+		command (regardless of whether that command actually used a
+		register).  Or for the currently executing normal mode mapping
+		(use this in custom commands that take a register).
+		If none is supplied it is the default register '"', unless
+		'clipboard' contains "unnamed" or "unnamedplus", then it is
+		'*' or '+'.
+		Also see |getreg()| and |setreg()|
+
+					*v:scrollstart* *scrollstart-variable*
+v:scrollstart	String describing the script or function that caused the
+		screen to scroll up.  It's only set when it is empty, thus the
+		first reason is remembered.  It is set to "Unknown" for a
+		typed command.
+		This can be used to find out why your script causes the
+		hit-enter prompt.
+
+					*v:servername* *servername-variable*
+v:servername	The resulting registered |client-server-name| if any.
+		Read-only.
+
+
+v:searchforward			*v:searchforward* *searchforward-variable*
+		Search direction:  1 after a forward search, 0 after a
+		backward search.  It is reset to forward when directly setting
+		the last search pattern, see |quote/|.
+		Note that the value is restored when returning from a
+		function. |function-search-undo|.
+		Read-write.
+
+					*v:shell_error* *shell_error-variable*
+v:shell_error	Result of the last shell command.  When non-zero, the last
+		shell command had an error.  When zero, there was no problem.
+		This only works when the shell returns the error code to Vim.
+		The value -1 is often used when the command could not be
+		executed.  Read-only.
+		Example: >
+	:!mv foo bar
+	:if v:shell_error
+	:  echo 'could not rename "foo" to "bar"!'
+	:endif
+<		"shell_error" also works, for backwards compatibility.
+
+					*v:statusmsg* *statusmsg-variable*
+v:statusmsg	Last given status message.  It's allowed to set this variable.
+
+					*v:swapname* *swapname-variable*
+v:swapname	Only valid when executing |SwapExists| autocommands: Name of
+		the swap file found.  Read-only.
+
+					*v:swapchoice* *swapchoice-variable*
+v:swapchoice	|SwapExists| autocommands can set this to the selected choice
+		for handling an existing swap file:
+			'o'	Open read-only
+			'e'	Edit anyway
+			'r'	Recover
+			'd'	Delete swapfile
+			'q'	Quit
+			'a'	Abort
+		The value should be a single-character string.  An empty value
+		results in the user being asked, as would happen when there is
+		no SwapExists autocommand.  The default is empty.
+
+					*v:swapcommand* *swapcommand-variable*
+v:swapcommand	Normal mode command to be executed after a file has been
+		opened.  Can be used for a |SwapExists| autocommand to have
+		another Vim open the file and jump to the right place.  For
+		example, when jumping to a tag the value is ":tag tagname\r".
+		For ":edit +cmd file" the value is ":cmd\r".
+
+				*v:t_TYPE* *v:t_bool* *t_bool-variable*
+v:t_bool	Value of |Boolean| type.  Read-only.  See: |type()|
+					*v:t_channel* *t_channel-variable*
+v:t_channel	Value of |Channel| type.  Read-only.  See: |type()|
+					*v:t_dict* *t_dict-variable*
+v:t_dict	Value of |Dictionary| type.  Read-only.  See: |type()|
+					*v:t_float* *t_float-variable*
+v:t_float	Value of |Float| type.  Read-only.  See: |type()|
+					*v:t_func* *t_func-variable*
+v:t_func	Value of |Funcref| type.  Read-only.  See: |type()|
+					*v:t_job* *t_job-variable*
+v:t_job		Value of |Job| type.  Read-only.  See: |type()|
+					*v:t_list* *t_list-variable*
+v:t_list	Value of |List| type.  Read-only.  See: |type()|
+					*v:t_none* *t_none-variable*
+v:t_none	Value of |None| type.  Read-only.  See: |type()|
+					*v:t_number* *t_number-variable*
+v:t_number	Value of |Number| type.  Read-only.  See: |type()|
+					*v:t_string* *t_string-variable*
+v:t_string	Value of |String| type.  Read-only.  See: |type()|
+					*v:t_blob* *t_blob-variable*
+v:t_blob	Value of |Blob| type.  Read-only.  See: |type()|
+
+				*v:termresponse* *termresponse-variable*
+v:termresponse	The escape sequence returned by the terminal for the |t_RV|
+		termcap entry.  It is set when Vim receives an escape sequence
+		that starts with ESC [ or CSI and ends in a 'c', with only
+		digits, ';' and '.' in between.
+		When this option is set, the TermResponse autocommand event is
+		fired, so that you can react to the response from the
+		terminal.
+		The response from a new xterm is: "<Esc>[ Pp ; Pv ; Pc c".  Pp
+		is the terminal type: 0 for vt100 and 1 for vt220.  Pv is the
+		patch level (since this was introduced in patch 95, it's
+		always 95 or bigger).  Pc is always zero.
+		{only when compiled with |+termresponse| feature}
+
+						*v:termblinkresp*
+v:termblinkresp	The escape sequence returned by the terminal for the |t_RC|
+		termcap entry.  This is used to find out whether the terminal
+		cursor is blinking. This is used by |term_getcursor()|.
+
+						*v:termstyleresp*
+v:termstyleresp	The escape sequence returned by the terminal for the |t_RS|
+		termcap entry.  This is used to find out what the shape of the
+		cursor is.  This is used by |term_getcursor()|.
+
+						*v:termrbgresp*
+v:termrbgresp	The escape sequence returned by the terminal for the |t_RB|
+		termcap entry.  This is used to find out what the terminal
+		background color is, see 'background'.
+
+						*v:termrfgresp*
+v:termrfgresp	The escape sequence returned by the terminal for the |t_RF|
+		termcap entry.  This is used to find out what the terminal
+		foreground color is.
+
+						*v:termu7resp*
+v:termu7resp	The escape sequence returned by the terminal for the |t_u7|
+		termcap entry.  This is used to find out what the terminal
+		does with ambiguous width characters, see 'ambiwidth'.
+
+					*v:testing* *testing-variable*
+v:testing	Must be set before using `test_garbagecollect_now()`.
+		Also, when set certain error messages won't be shown for 2
+		seconds. (e.g. "'dictionary' option is empty")
+
+				*v:this_session* *this_session-variable*
+v:this_session	Full filename of the last loaded or saved session file.  See
+		|:mksession|.  It is allowed to set this variable.  When no
+		session file has been saved, this variable is empty.
+		"this_session" also works, for backwards compatibility.
+
+					*v:throwpoint* *throwpoint-variable*
+v:throwpoint	The point where the exception most recently caught and not
+		finished was thrown.  Not set when commands are typed.  See
+		also |v:exception| and |throw-variables|.
+		Example: >
+	:try
+	:  throw "oops"
+	:catch /.*/
+	:  echo "Exception from" v:throwpoint
+	:endtry
+<		Output: "Exception from test.vim, line 2"
+
+						*v:true* *true-variable*
+v:true		A Number with value one. Used to put "true" in JSON.  See
+		|json_encode()|.
+		When used as a string this evaluates to "v:true". >
+			echo v:true
+<			v:true ~
+		That is so that eval() can parse the string back to the same
+		value.  Read-only.
+						*v:val* *val-variable*
+v:val		Value of the current item of a |List| or |Dictionary|.  Only
+		valid while evaluating the expression used with |map()| and
+		|filter()|.  Read-only.
+
+					*v:version* *version-variable*
+v:version	Version number of Vim: Major version number times 100 plus
+		minor version number.  Version 5.0 is 500.  Version 5.1 (5.01)
+		is 501.  Read-only.  "version" also works, for backwards
+		compatibility.
+		Use |has()| to check if a certain patch was included, e.g.: >
+			if has("patch-7.4.123")
+<		Note that patch numbers are specific to the version, thus both
+		version 5.0 and 5.1 may have a patch 123, but these are
+		completely different.
+
+				*v:vim_did_enter* *vim_did_enter-variable*
+v:vim_did_enter	Zero until most of startup is done.  It is set to one just
+		before |VimEnter| autocommands are triggered.
+
+					*v:warningmsg* *warningmsg-variable*
+v:warningmsg	Last given warning message.  It's allowed to set this variable.
+
+					*v:windowid* *windowid-variable*
+v:windowid	When any X11 based GUI is running or when running in a
+		terminal and Vim connects to the X server (|-X|) this will be
+		set to the window ID.
+		When an MS-Windows GUI is running this will be set to the
+		window handle.
+		Otherwise the value is zero.
+		Note: for windows inside Vim use |winnr()| or |win_getid()|,
+		see |window-ID|.
+
+==============================================================================
+4. Builtin Functions					*functions*
+
+See |function-list| for a list grouped by what the function is used for.
+
+(Use CTRL-] on the function name to jump to the full explanation.)
+
+USAGE				RESULT	DESCRIPTION	~
+
+abs({expr})			Float or Number  absolute value of {expr}
+acos({expr})			Float	arc cosine of {expr}
+add({object}, {item})		List/Blob   append {item} to {object}
+and({expr}, {expr})		Number	bitwise AND
+append({lnum}, {text})		Number	append {text} below line {lnum}
+appendbufline({expr}, {lnum}, {text})
+				Number	append {text} below line {lnum}
+					in buffer {expr}
+argc([{winid}])			Number	number of files in the argument list
+argidx()			Number	current index in the argument list
+arglistid([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]]) Number	argument list id
+argv({nr} [, {winid}])		String	{nr} entry of the argument list
+argv([-1, {winid}])		List	the argument list
+assert_beeps({cmd})		Number	assert {cmd} causes a beep
+assert_equal({exp}, {act} [, {msg}])
+				Number	assert {exp} is equal to {act}
+assert_equalfile({fname-one}, {fname-two})
+				Number	assert file contents is equal
+assert_exception({error} [, {msg}])
+				Number	assert {error} is in v:exception
+assert_fails({cmd} [, {error} [, {msg}]])
+				Number	assert {cmd} fails
+assert_false({actual} [, {msg}])
+				Number	assert {actual} is false
+assert_inrange({lower}, {upper}, {actual} [, {msg}])
+				Number	assert {actual} is inside the range
+assert_match({pat}, {text} [, {msg}])
+				Number	assert {pat} matches {text}
+assert_notequal({exp}, {act} [, {msg}])
+				Number	assert {exp} is not equal {act}
+assert_notmatch({pat}, {text} [, {msg}])
+				Number	assert {pat} not matches {text}
+assert_report({msg})		Number	report a test failure
+assert_true({actual} [, {msg}])	Number	assert {actual} is true
+asin({expr})			Float	arc sine of {expr}
+atan({expr})			Float	arc tangent of {expr}
+atan2({expr1}, {expr2})		Float	arc tangent of {expr1} / {expr2}
+balloon_show({expr})		none	show {expr} inside the balloon
+balloon_split({msg})		List	split {msg} as used for a balloon
+browse({save}, {title}, {initdir}, {default})
+				String	put up a file requester
+browsedir({title}, {initdir})	String	put up a directory requester
+bufexists({expr})		Number	|TRUE| if buffer {expr} exists
+buflisted({expr})		Number	|TRUE| if buffer {expr} is listed
+bufloaded({expr})		Number	|TRUE| if buffer {expr} is loaded
+bufname({expr})			String	Name of the buffer {expr}
+bufnr({expr} [, {create}])	Number	Number of the buffer {expr}
+bufwinid({expr})		Number	window ID of buffer {expr}
+bufwinnr({expr})		Number	window number of buffer {expr}
+byte2line({byte})		Number	line number at byte count {byte}
+byteidx({expr}, {nr})		Number	byte index of {nr}'th char in {expr}
+byteidxcomp({expr}, {nr})	Number	byte index of {nr}'th char in {expr}
+call({func}, {arglist} [, {dict}])
+				any	call {func} with arguments {arglist}
+ceil({expr})			Float	round {expr} up
+ch_canread({handle})		Number	check if there is something to read
+ch_close({handle})		none	close {handle}
+ch_close_in({handle})		none	close in part of {handle}
+ch_evalexpr({handle}, {expr} [, {options}])
+				any	evaluate {expr} on JSON {handle}
+ch_evalraw({handle}, {string} [, {options}])
+				any	evaluate {string} on raw {handle}
+ch_getbufnr({handle}, {what})	Number	get buffer number for {handle}/{what}
+ch_getjob({channel})		Job	get the Job of {channel}
+ch_info({handle})		String	info about channel {handle}
+ch_log({msg} [, {handle}])	none	write {msg} in the channel log file
+ch_logfile({fname} [, {mode}])	none	start logging channel activity
+ch_open({address} [, {options}])
+				Channel	open a channel to {address}
+ch_read({handle} [, {options}]) String	read from {handle}
+ch_readblob({handle} [, {options}])
+				Blob	read Blob from {handle}
+ch_readraw({handle} [, {options}])
+				String	read raw from {handle}
+ch_sendexpr({handle}, {expr} [, {options}])
+				any	send {expr} over JSON {handle}
+ch_sendraw({handle}, {expr} [, {options}])
+				any	send {expr} over raw {handle}
+ch_setoptions({handle}, {options})
+				none	set options for {handle}
+ch_status({handle} [, {options}])
+				String	status of channel {handle}
+changenr()			Number	current change number
+char2nr({expr} [, {utf8}])	Number	ASCII/UTF8 value of first char in {expr}
+cindent({lnum})			Number	C indent for line {lnum}
+clearmatches()			none	clear all matches
+col({expr})			Number	column nr of cursor or mark
+complete({startcol}, {matches}) none	set Insert mode completion
+complete_add({expr})		Number	add completion match
+complete_check()		Number	check for key typed during completion
+confirm({msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]])
+				Number	number of choice picked by user
+copy({expr})			any	make a shallow copy of {expr}
+cos({expr})			Float	cosine of {expr}
+cosh({expr})			Float	hyperbolic cosine of {expr}
+count({comp}, {expr} [, {ic} [, {start}]])
+				Number	count how many {expr} are in {comp}
+cscope_connection([{num}, {dbpath} [, {prepend}]])
+				Number	checks existence of cscope connection
+cursor({lnum}, {col} [, {off}])
+				Number	move cursor to {lnum}, {col}, {off}
+cursor({list})			Number	move cursor to position in {list}
+debugbreak({pid})		Number  interrupt process being debugged
+deepcopy({expr} [, {noref}])	any	make a full copy of {expr}
+delete({fname} [, {flags}])	Number	delete the file or directory {fname}
+deletebufline({expr}, {first} [, {last}])
+				Number	delete lines from buffer {expr}
+did_filetype()			Number	|TRUE| if FileType autocmd event used
+diff_filler({lnum})		Number	diff filler lines about {lnum}
+diff_hlID({lnum}, {col})	Number	diff highlighting at {lnum}/{col}
+empty({expr})			Number	|TRUE| if {expr} is empty
+escape({string}, {chars})	String	escape {chars} in {string} with '\'
+eval({string})			any	evaluate {string} into its value
+eventhandler()			Number	|TRUE| if inside an event handler
+executable({expr})		Number	1 if executable {expr} exists
+execute({command})		String	execute {command} and get the output
+exepath({expr})			String	full path of the command {expr}
+exists({expr})			Number	|TRUE| if {expr} exists
+extend({expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}])
+				List/Dict insert items of {expr2} into {expr1}
+exp({expr})			Float	exponential of {expr}
+expand({expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]])
+				any	expand special keywords in {expr}
+feedkeys({string} [, {mode}])	Number	add key sequence to typeahead buffer
+filereadable({file})		Number	|TRUE| if {file} is a readable file
+filewritable({file})		Number	|TRUE| if {file} is a writable file
+filter({expr1}, {expr2})	List/Dict  remove items from {expr1} where
+					{expr2} is 0
+finddir({name} [, {path} [, {count}]])
+				String	find directory {name} in {path}
+findfile({name} [, {path} [, {count}]])
+				String	find file {name} in {path}
+float2nr({expr})		Number	convert Float {expr} to a Number
+floor({expr})			Float	round {expr} down
+fmod({expr1}, {expr2})		Float	remainder of {expr1} / {expr2}
+fnameescape({fname})		String	escape special characters in {fname}
+fnamemodify({fname}, {mods})	String	modify file name
+foldclosed({lnum})		Number	first line of fold at {lnum} if closed
+foldclosedend({lnum})		Number	last line of fold at {lnum} if closed
+foldlevel({lnum})		Number	fold level at {lnum}
+foldtext()			String	line displayed for closed fold
+foldtextresult({lnum})		String	text for closed fold at {lnum}
+foreground()			Number	bring the Vim window to the foreground
+funcref({name} [, {arglist}] [, {dict}])
+				Funcref	reference to function {name}
+function({name} [, {arglist}] [, {dict}])
+				Funcref	named reference to function {name}
+garbagecollect([{atexit}])	none	free memory, breaking cyclic references
+get({list}, {idx} [, {def}])	any	get item {idx} from {list} or {def}
+get({dict}, {key} [, {def}])	any	get item {key} from {dict} or {def}
+get({func}, {what})		any	get property of funcref/partial {func}
+getbufinfo([{expr}])		List	information about buffers
+getbufline({expr}, {lnum} [, {end}])
+				List	lines {lnum} to {end} of buffer {expr}
+getbufvar({expr}, {varname} [, {def}])
+				any	variable {varname} in buffer {expr}
+getchangelist({expr})		List	list of change list items
+getchar([expr])			Number	get one character from the user
+getcharmod()			Number	modifiers for the last typed character
+getcharsearch()			Dict	last character search
+getcmdline()			String	return the current command-line
+getcmdpos()			Number	return cursor position in command-line
+getcmdtype()			String	return current command-line type
+getcmdwintype()			String	return current command-line window type
+getcompletion({pat}, {type} [, {filtered}])
+				List	list of cmdline completion matches
+getcurpos()			List	position of the cursor
+getcwd([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]])	String	get the current working directory
+getfontname([{name}])		String	name of font being used
+getfperm({fname})		String	file permissions of file {fname}
+getfsize({fname})		Number	size in bytes of file {fname}
+getftime({fname})		Number	last modification time of file
+getftype({fname})		String	description of type of file {fname}
+getjumplist([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]])
+				List	list of jump list items
+getline({lnum})			String	line {lnum} of current buffer
+getline({lnum}, {end})		List	lines {lnum} to {end} of current buffer
+getloclist({nr} [, {what}])	List	list of location list items
+getmatches()			List	list of current matches
+getpid()			Number	process ID of Vim
+getpos({expr})			List	position of cursor, mark, etc.
+getqflist([{what}])		List	list of quickfix items
+getreg([{regname} [, 1 [, {list}]]])
+				String or List   contents of register
+getregtype([{regname}])		String	type of register
+gettabinfo([{expr}])		List	list of tab pages
+gettabvar({nr}, {varname} [, {def}])
+				any	variable {varname} in tab {nr} or {def}
+gettabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {name} [, {def}])
+				any	{name} in {winnr} in tab page {tabnr}
+gettagstack([{nr}])		Dict	get the tag stack of window {nr}
+getwininfo([{winid}])		List	list of info about each window
+getwinpos([{timeout}])		List	X and Y coord in pixels of the Vim window
+getwinposx()			Number	X coord in pixels of the Vim window
+getwinposy()			Number	Y coord in pixels of the Vim window
+getwinvar({nr}, {varname} [, {def}])
+				any	variable {varname} in window {nr}
+glob({expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list} [, {alllinks}]]])
+				any	expand file wildcards in {expr}
+glob2regpat({expr})		String	convert a glob pat into a search pat
+globpath({path}, {expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list} [, {alllinks}]]])
+				String	do glob({expr}) for all dirs in {path}
+has({feature})			Number	|TRUE| if feature {feature} supported
+has_key({dict}, {key})		Number	|TRUE| if {dict} has entry {key}
+haslocaldir([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]])
+				Number	|TRUE| if the window executed |:lcd|
+hasmapto({what} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]])
+				Number	|TRUE| if mapping to {what} exists
+histadd({history}, {item})	String	add an item to a history
+histdel({history} [, {item}])	String	remove an item from a history
+histget({history} [, {index}])	String	get the item {index} from a history
+histnr({history})		Number	highest index of a history
+hlexists({name})		Number	|TRUE| if highlight group {name} exists
+hlID({name})			Number	syntax ID of highlight group {name}
+hostname()			String	name of the machine Vim is running on
+iconv({expr}, {from}, {to})	String	convert encoding of {expr}
+indent({lnum})			Number	indent of line {lnum}
+index({object}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]])
+				Number	index in {object} where {expr} appears
+input({prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]])
+				String	get input from the user
+inputdialog({prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]])
+				String	like input() but in a GUI dialog
+inputlist({textlist})		Number	let the user pick from a choice list
+inputrestore()			Number	restore typeahead
+inputsave()			Number	save and clear typeahead
+inputsecret({prompt} [, {text}]) String	like input() but hiding the text
+insert({object}, {item} [, {idx}]) List	insert {item} in {object} [before {idx}]
+invert({expr})			Number	bitwise invert
+isdirectory({directory})	Number	|TRUE| if {directory} is a directory
+islocked({expr})		Number	|TRUE| if {expr} is locked
+isnan({expr})			Number	|TRUE| if {expr} is NaN
+items({dict})			List	key-value pairs in {dict}
+job_getchannel({job})		Channel	get the channel handle for {job}
+job_info([{job}])		Dict	get information about {job}
+job_setoptions({job}, {options}) none	set options for {job}
+job_start({command} [, {options}])
+				Job	start a job
+job_status({job})		String	get the status of {job}
+job_stop({job} [, {how}])	Number	stop {job}
+join({list} [, {sep}])		String	join {list} items into one String
+js_decode({string})		any	decode JS style JSON
+js_encode({expr})		String	encode JS style JSON
+json_decode({string})		any	decode JSON
+json_encode({expr})		String	encode JSON
+keys({dict})			List	keys in {dict}
+len({expr})			Number	the length of {expr}
+libcall({lib}, {func}, {arg})	String	call {func} in library {lib} with {arg}
+libcallnr({lib}, {func}, {arg})	Number	idem, but return a Number
+line({expr})			Number	line nr of cursor, last line or mark
+line2byte({lnum})		Number	byte count of line {lnum}
+lispindent({lnum})		Number	Lisp indent for line {lnum}
+localtime()			Number	current time
+log({expr})			Float	natural logarithm (base e) of {expr}
+log10({expr})			Float	logarithm of Float {expr} to base 10
+luaeval({expr} [, {expr}])	any	evaluate |Lua| expression
+map({expr1}, {expr2})		List/Dict  change each item in {expr1} to {expr}
+maparg({name} [, {mode} [, {abbr} [, {dict}]]])
+				String or Dict
+					rhs of mapping {name} in mode {mode}
+mapcheck({name} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]])
+				String	check for mappings matching {name}
+match({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]])
+				Number	position where {pat} matches in {expr}
+matchadd({group}, {pattern} [, {priority} [, {id} [, {dict}]]])
+				Number	highlight {pattern} with {group}
+matchaddpos({group}, {pos} [, {priority} [, {id} [, {dict}]]])
+				Number	highlight positions with {group}
+matcharg({nr})			List	arguments of |:match|
+matchdelete({id})		Number	delete match identified by {id}
+matchend({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]])
+				Number	position where {pat} ends in {expr}
+matchlist({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]])
+				List	match and submatches of {pat} in {expr}
+matchstr({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]])
+				String	{count}'th match of {pat} in {expr}
+matchstrpos({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]])
+				List	{count}'th match of {pat} in {expr}
+max({expr})			Number	maximum value of items in {expr}
+min({expr})			Number	minimum value of items in {expr}
+mkdir({name} [, {path} [, {prot}]])
+				Number	create directory {name}
+mode([expr])			String	current editing mode
+mzeval({expr})			any	evaluate |MzScheme| expression
+nextnonblank({lnum})		Number	line nr of non-blank line >= {lnum}
+nr2char({expr} [, {utf8}])	String	single char with ASCII/UTF8 value {expr}
+or({expr}, {expr})		Number	bitwise OR
+pathshorten({expr})		String	shorten directory names in a path
+perleval({expr})		any	evaluate |Perl| expression
+pow({x}, {y})			Float	{x} to the power of {y}
+prevnonblank({lnum})		Number	line nr of non-blank line <= {lnum}
+printf({fmt}, {expr1}...)	String	format text
+prompt_setcallback({buf}, {expr}) none	set prompt callback function
+prompt_setinterrupt({buf}, {text}) none	set prompt interrupt function
+prompt_setprompt({buf}, {text}) none	set prompt text
+prop_add({lnum}, {col}, {props})  none	add a text property
+prop_clear({lnum} [, {lnum-end} [, {props}]])
+				none	remove all text properties
+prop_find({props} [, {direction}])
+				Dict	search for a text property
+prop_list({lnum} [, {props})	List	text properties in {lnum}
+prop_remove({props} [, {lnum} [, {lnum-end}]])
+				Number	remove a text property
+prop_type_add({name}, {props})	none	define a new property type
+prop_type_change({name}, {props})
+				none	change an existing property type
+prop_type_delete({name} [, {props}])
+				none	delete a property type
+prop_type_get([{name} [, {props}])
+				Dict	get property type values
+prop_type_list([{props}])	List	get list of property types
+pumvisible()			Number	whether popup menu is visible
+pyeval({expr})			any	evaluate |Python| expression
+py3eval({expr})			any	evaluate |python3| expression
+pyxeval({expr})			any	evaluate |python_x| expression
+range({expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]])
+				List	items from {expr} to {max}
+readfile({fname} [, {type} [, {max}]])
+				List	get list of lines from file {fname}
+reg_executing()			String	get the executing register name
+reg_recording()			String	get the recording register name
+reltime([{start} [, {end}]])	List	get time value
+reltimefloat({time})		Float	turn the time value into a Float
+reltimestr({time})		String	turn time value into a String
+remote_expr({server}, {string} [, {idvar} [, {timeout}]])
+				String	send expression
+remote_foreground({server})	Number	bring Vim server to the foreground
+remote_peek({serverid} [, {retvar}])
+				Number	check for reply string
+remote_read({serverid} [, {timeout}])
+				String	read reply string
+remote_send({server}, {string} [, {idvar}])
+				String	send key sequence
+remote_startserver({name})	none	become server {name}
+remove({list}, {idx} [, {end}])	any/List 
+					remove items {idx}-{end} from {list}
+remove({blob}, {idx} [, {end}])	Number/Blob
+					remove bytes {idx}-{end} from {blob}
+remove({dict}, {key})		any	remove entry {key} from {dict}
+rename({from}, {to})		Number	rename (move) file from {from} to {to}
+repeat({expr}, {count})		String	repeat {expr} {count} times
+resolve({filename})		String	get filename a shortcut points to
+reverse({list})			List	reverse {list} in-place
+round({expr})			Float	round off {expr}
+screenattr({row}, {col})	Number	attribute at screen position
+screenchar({row}, {col})	Number	character at screen position
+screencol()			Number	current cursor column
+screenrow()			Number	current cursor row
+search({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]])
+				Number	search for {pattern}
+searchdecl({name} [, {global} [, {thisblock}]])
+				Number	search for variable declaration
+searchpair({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} [...]]])
+				Number	search for other end of start/end pair
+searchpairpos({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} [...]]])
+				List	search for other end of start/end pair
+searchpos({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]])
+				List	search for {pattern}
+server2client({clientid}, {string})
+				Number	send reply string
+serverlist()			String	get a list of available servers
+setbufline({expr}, {lnum}, {text})
+				Number	set line {lnum} to {text} in buffer
+					{expr}
+setbufvar({expr}, {varname}, {val})
+				none	set {varname} in buffer {expr} to {val}
+setcharsearch({dict})		Dict	set character search from {dict}
+setcmdpos({pos})		Number	set cursor position in command-line
+setfperm({fname}, {mode})	Number	set {fname} file permissions to {mode}
+setline({lnum}, {line})		Number	set line {lnum} to {line}
+setloclist({nr}, {list} [, {action} [, {what}]])
+				Number	modify location list using {list}
+setmatches({list})		Number	restore a list of matches
+setpos({expr}, {list})		Number	set the {expr} position to {list}
+setqflist({list} [, {action} [, {what}]])
+				Number	modify quickfix list using {list}
+setreg({n}, {v} [, {opt}])	Number	set register to value and type
+settabvar({nr}, {varname}, {val}) none	set {varname} in tab page {nr} to {val}
+settabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}, {val})
+				none	set {varname} in window {winnr} in tab
+					page {tabnr} to {val}
+settagstack({nr}, {dict} [, {action}])
+				Number	modify tag stack using {dict}
+setwinvar({nr}, {varname}, {val}) none	set {varname} in window {nr} to {val}
+sha256({string})		String	SHA256 checksum of {string}
+shellescape({string} [, {special}])
+				String	escape {string} for use as shell
+					command argument
+shiftwidth([{col}])		Number	effective value of 'shiftwidth'
+sign_define({name} [, {dict}])	Number	define or update a sign
+sign_getdefined([{name}])	List	get a list of defined signs
+sign_getplaced([{expr} [, {dict}]])
+				List	get a list of placed signs
+sign_jump({id}, {group}, {expr})
+				Number	jump to a sign
+sign_place({id}, {group}, {name}, {expr} [, {dict}])
+				Number	place a sign
+sign_undefine([{name}])		Number	undefine a sign
+sign_unplace({group} [, {dict}])
+				Number	unplace a sign
+simplify({filename})		String	simplify filename as much as possible
+sin({expr})			Float	sine of {expr}
+sinh({expr})			Float	hyperbolic sine of {expr}
+sort({list} [, {func} [, {dict}]])
+				List	sort {list}, using {func} to compare
+soundfold({word})		String	sound-fold {word}
+spellbadword()			String	badly spelled word at cursor
+spellsuggest({word} [, {max} [, {capital}]])
+				List	spelling suggestions
+split({expr} [, {pat} [, {keepempty}]])
+				List	make |List| from {pat} separated {expr}
+sqrt({expr})			Float	square root of {expr}
+str2float({expr})		Float	convert String to Float
+str2nr({expr} [, {base}])	Number	convert String to Number
+strchars({expr} [, {skipcc}])	Number	character length of the String {expr}
+strcharpart({str}, {start} [, {len}])
+				String	{len} characters of {str} at {start}
+strdisplaywidth({expr} [, {col}]) Number display length of the String {expr}
+strftime({format} [, {time}])	String	time in specified format
+strgetchar({str}, {index})	Number	get char {index} from {str}
+stridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}])
+				Number	index of {needle} in {haystack}
+string({expr})			String	String representation of {expr} value
+strlen({expr})			Number	length of the String {expr}
+strpart({str}, {start} [, {len}])
+				String	{len} characters of {str} at {start}
+strridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}])
+				Number	last index of {needle} in {haystack}
+strtrans({expr})		String	translate string to make it printable
+strwidth({expr})		Number	display cell length of the String {expr}
+submatch({nr} [, {list}])	String or List
+					specific match in ":s" or substitute()
+substitute({expr}, {pat}, {sub}, {flags})
+				String	all {pat} in {expr} replaced with {sub}
+swapinfo({fname})		Dict	information about swap file {fname}
+swapname({expr})		String	swap file of buffer {expr}
+synID({lnum}, {col}, {trans})	Number	syntax ID at {lnum} and {col}
+synIDattr({synID}, {what} [, {mode}])
+				String	attribute {what} of syntax ID {synID}
+synIDtrans({synID})		Number	translated syntax ID of {synID}
+synconcealed({lnum}, {col})	List	info about concealing
+synstack({lnum}, {col})		List	stack of syntax IDs at {lnum} and {col}
+system({expr} [, {input}])	String	output of shell command/filter {expr}
+systemlist({expr} [, {input}])	List	output of shell command/filter {expr}
+tabpagebuflist([{arg}])		List	list of buffer numbers in tab page
+tabpagenr([{arg}])		Number	number of current or last tab page
+tabpagewinnr({tabarg} [, {arg}]) Number	number of current window in tab page
+taglist({expr} [, {filename}])	List	list of tags matching {expr}
+tagfiles()			List	tags files used
+tan({expr})			Float	tangent of {expr}
+tanh({expr})			Float	hyperbolic tangent of {expr}
+tempname()			String	name for a temporary file
+term_dumpdiff({filename}, {filename} [, {options}])
+				Number  display difference between two dumps
+term_dumpload({filename} [, {options}])
+				Number	displaying a screen dump
+term_dumpwrite({buf}, {filename} [, {options}])
+				none	dump terminal window contents
+term_getaltscreen({buf})	Number	get the alternate screen flag
+term_getansicolors({buf})	List	get ANSI palette in GUI color mode
+term_getattr({attr}, {what})	Number	get the value of attribute {what}
+term_getcursor({buf})		List	get the cursor position of a terminal
+term_getjob({buf})		Job	get the job associated with a terminal
+term_getline({buf}, {row})	String	get a line of text from a terminal
+term_getscrolled({buf})		Number	get the scroll count of a terminal
+term_getsize({buf})		List	get the size of a terminal
+term_getstatus({buf})		String	get the status of a terminal
+term_gettitle({buf})		String	get the title of a terminal
+term_gettty({buf}, [{input}])	String	get the tty name of a terminal
+term_list()			List	get the list of terminal buffers
+term_scrape({buf}, {row})	List	get row of a terminal screen
+term_sendkeys({buf}, {keys})	none	send keystrokes to a terminal
+term_setansicolors({buf}, {colors})
+				none	set ANSI palette in GUI color mode
+term_setkill({buf}, {how})	none	set signal to stop job in terminal
+term_setrestore({buf}, {command}) none	set command to restore terminal
+term_setsize({buf}, {rows}, {cols})
+				none	set the size of a terminal
+term_start({cmd}, {options})	Number	open a terminal window and run a job
+term_wait({buf} [, {time}])	Number  wait for screen to be updated
+test_alloc_fail({id}, {countdown}, {repeat})
+				none	make memory allocation fail
+test_autochdir()		none	enable 'autochdir' during startup
+test_feedinput({string})	none	add key sequence to input buffer
+test_garbagecollect_now()	none	free memory right now for testing
+test_ignore_error({expr})	none	ignore a specific error
+test_null_blob()		Blob	null value for testing
+test_null_channel()		Channel	null value for testing
+test_null_dict()		Dict	null value for testing
+test_null_job()			Job	null value for testing
+test_null_list()		List	null value for testing
+test_null_partial()		Funcref	null value for testing
+test_null_string()		String	null value for testing
+test_option_not_set({name})	none	reset flag indicating option was set
+test_override({expr}, {val})	none	test with Vim internal overrides
+test_scrollbar({which}, {value}, {dragging})
+				none	scroll in the GUI for testing
+test_settime({expr})		none	set current time for testing
+timer_info([{id}])		List	information about timers
+timer_pause({id}, {pause})	none	pause or unpause a timer
+timer_start({time}, {callback} [, {options}])
+				Number	create a timer
+timer_stop({timer})		none	stop a timer
+timer_stopall()			none	stop all timers
+tolower({expr})			String	the String {expr} switched to lowercase
+toupper({expr})			String	the String {expr} switched to uppercase
+tr({src}, {fromstr}, {tostr})	String	translate chars of {src} in {fromstr}
+					to chars in {tostr}
+trim({text} [, {mask}])		String	trim characters in {mask} from {text}
+trunc({expr})			Float	truncate Float {expr}
+type({name})			Number	type of variable {name}
+undofile({name})		String	undo file name for {name}
+undotree()			List	undo file tree
+uniq({list} [, {func} [, {dict}]])
+				List	remove adjacent duplicates from a list
+values({dict})			List	values in {dict}
+virtcol({expr})			Number	screen column of cursor or mark
+visualmode([expr])		String	last visual mode used
+wildmenumode()			Number	whether 'wildmenu' mode is active
+win_findbuf({bufnr})		List	find windows containing {bufnr}
+win_getid([{win} [, {tab}]])	Number	get window ID for {win} in {tab}
+win_gotoid({expr})		Number	go to window with ID {expr}
+win_id2tabwin({expr})		List	get tab and window nr from window ID
+win_id2win({expr})		Number	get window nr from window ID
+win_screenpos({nr})		List	get screen position of window {nr}
+winbufnr({nr})			Number	buffer number of window {nr}
+wincol()			Number	window column of the cursor
+winheight({nr})			Number	height of window {nr}
+winlayout([{tabnr}])		List	layout of windows in tab {tabnr}
+winline()			Number	window line of the cursor
+winnr([{expr}])			Number	number of current window
+winrestcmd()			String	returns command to restore window sizes
+winrestview({dict})		none	restore view of current window
+winsaveview()			Dict	save view of current window
+winwidth({nr})			Number	width of window {nr}
+wordcount()			Dict	get byte/char/word statistics
+writefile({object}, {fname} [, {flags}])
+				Number	write |Blob| or |List| of lines to file
+xor({expr}, {expr})		Number	bitwise XOR
+
+
+abs({expr})							*abs()*
+		Return the absolute value of {expr}.  When {expr} evaluates to
+		a |Float| abs() returns a |Float|.  When {expr} can be
+		converted to a |Number| abs() returns a |Number|.  Otherwise
+		abs() gives an error message and returns -1.
+		Examples: >
+			echo abs(1.456)
+<			1.456  >
+			echo abs(-5.456)
+<			5.456  >
+			echo abs(-4)
+<			4
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+acos({expr})							*acos()*
+		Return the arc cosine of {expr} measured in radians, as a
+		|Float| in the range of [0, pi].
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range
+		[-1, 1].
+		Examples: >
+			:echo acos(0)
+<			1.570796 >
+			:echo acos(-0.5)
+<			2.094395
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+add({object}, {expr})					*add()*
+		Append the item {expr} to |List| or |Blob| {object}.  Returns
+		the resulting |List| or |Blob|.  Examples: >
+			:let alist = add([1, 2, 3], item)
+			:call add(mylist, "woodstock")
+<		Note that when {expr} is a |List| it is appended as a single
+		item.  Use |extend()| to concatenate |Lists|.
+		When {object} is a |Blob| then  {expr} must be a number.
+		Use |insert()| to add an item at another position.
+
+
+and({expr}, {expr})					*and()*
+		Bitwise AND on the two arguments.  The arguments are converted
+		to a number.  A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error.
+		Example: >
+			:let flag = and(bits, 0x80)
+
+
+append({lnum}, {text})					*append()*
+		When {text} is a |List|: Append each item of the |List| as a
+		text line below line {lnum} in the current buffer.
+		Otherwise append {text} as one text line below line {lnum} in
+		the current buffer.
+		{lnum} can be zero to insert a line before the first one.
+		Returns 1 for failure ({lnum} out of range or out of memory),
+		0 for success.  Example: >
+			:let failed = append(line('$'), "# THE END")
+			:let failed = append(0, ["Chapter 1", "the beginning"])
+
+appendbufline({expr}, {lnum}, {text})			*appendbufline()*
+		Like |append()| but append the text in buffer {expr}.
+
+		For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()|.
+
+		{lnum} is used like with |append()|.  Note that using |line()|
+		would use the current buffer, not the one appending to.
+		Use "$" to append at the end of the buffer.
+
+		On success 0 is returned, on failure 1 is returned.
+
+		If {expr} is not a valid buffer or {lnum} is not valid, an
+		error message is given. Example: >
+			:let failed = appendbufline(13, 0, "# THE START")
+<
+							*argc()*
+argc([{winid}])
+		The result is the number of files in the argument list.  See
+		|arglist|.
+		If {winid} is not supplied, the argument list of the current
+		window is used.
+		If {winid} is -1, the global argument list is used.
+		Otherwise {winid} specifies the window of which the argument
+		list is used: either the window number or the window ID.
+		Returns -1 if the {winid} argument is invalid.
+
+							*argidx()*
+argidx()	The result is the current index in the argument list.  0 is
+		the first file.  argc() - 1 is the last one.  See |arglist|.
+
+							*arglistid()*
+arglistid([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]])
+		Return the argument list ID.  This is a number which
+		identifies the argument list being used.  Zero is used for the
+		global argument list.  See |arglist|.
+		Returns -1 if the arguments are invalid.
+
+		Without arguments use the current window.
+		With {winnr} only use this window in the current tab page.
+		With {winnr} and {tabnr} use the window in the specified tab
+		page.
+		{winnr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
+
+							*argv()*
+argv([{nr} [, {winid}])
+		The result is the {nr}th file in the argument list.  See
+		|arglist|.  "argv(0)" is the first one.  Example: >
+	:let i = 0
+	:while i < argc()
+	:  let f = escape(fnameescape(argv(i)), '.')
+	:  exe 'amenu Arg.' . f . ' :e ' . f . '<CR>'
+	:  let i = i + 1
+	:endwhile
+<		Without the {nr} argument, or when {nr} is -1, a |List| with
+		the whole |arglist| is returned.
+
+		The {winid} argument specifies the window ID, see |argc()|.
+
+assert_beeps({cmd})					*assert_beeps()*
+		Run {cmd} and add an error message to |v:errors| if it does
+		NOT produce a beep or visual bell.
+		Also see |assert_fails()| and |assert-return|.
+
+							*assert_equal()*
+assert_equal({expected}, {actual} [, {msg}])
+		When {expected} and {actual} are not equal an error message is
+		added to |v:errors| and 1 is returned.  Otherwise zero is
+		returned |assert-return|.
+		There is no automatic conversion, the String "4" is different
+		from the Number 4.  And the number 4 is different from the
+		Float 4.0.  The value of 'ignorecase' is not used here, case
+		always matters.
+		When {msg} is omitted an error in the form "Expected
+		{expected} but got {actual}" is produced.
+		Example: >
+	assert_equal('foo', 'bar')
+<		Will result in a string to be added to |v:errors|:
+	test.vim line 12: Expected 'foo' but got 'bar' ~
+
+							*assert_equalfile()*
+assert_equalfile({fname-one}, {fname-two})
+		When the files {fname-one} and {fname-two} do not contain
+		exactly the same text an error message is added to |v:errors|.
+		Also see |assert-return|.
+		When {fname-one} or {fname-two} does not exist the error will
+		mention that.
+		Mainly useful with |terminal-diff|.
+
+assert_exception({error} [, {msg}])			*assert_exception()*
+		When v:exception does not contain the string {error} an error
+		message is added to |v:errors|.  Also see |assert-return|.
+		This can be used to assert that a command throws an exception.
+		Using the error number, followed by a colon, avoids problems
+		with translations: >
+			try
+			  commandthatfails
+			  call assert_false(1, 'command should have failed')
+			catch
+			  call assert_exception('E492:')
+			endtry
+
+assert_fails({cmd} [, {error} [, {msg}]])			*assert_fails()*
+		Run {cmd} and add an error message to |v:errors| if it does
+		NOT produce an error.  Also see |assert-return|.
+		When {error} is given it must match in |v:errmsg|.
+		Note that beeping is not considered an error, and some failing
+		commands only beep.  Use |assert_beeps()| for those.
+
+assert_false({actual} [, {msg}])				*assert_false()*
+		When {actual} is not false an error message is added to
+		|v:errors|, like with |assert_equal()|.
+		Also see |assert-return|.
+		A value is false when it is zero. When {actual} is not a
+		number the assert fails.
+		When {msg} is omitted an error in the form
+		"Expected False but got {actual}" is produced.
+
+assert_inrange({lower}, {upper}, {actual} [, {msg}])	 *assert_inrange()*
+		This asserts number values.  When {actual}  is lower than
+		{lower} or higher than {upper} an error message is added to
+		|v:errors|.  Also see |assert-return|.
+		When {msg} is omitted an error in the form
+		"Expected range {lower} - {upper}, but got {actual}" is
+		produced.
+
+								*assert_match()*
+assert_match({pattern}, {actual} [, {msg}])
+		When {pattern} does not match {actual} an error message is
+		added to |v:errors|.  Also see |assert-return|.
+
+		{pattern} is used as with |=~|: The matching is always done
+		like 'magic' was set and 'cpoptions' is empty, no matter what
+		the actual value of 'magic' or 'cpoptions' is.
+
+		{actual} is used as a string, automatic conversion applies.
+		Use "^" and "$" to match with the start and end of the text.
+		Use both to match the whole text.
+
+		When {msg} is omitted an error in the form
+		"Pattern {pattern} does not match {actual}" is produced.
+		Example: >
+	assert_match('^f.*o$', 'foobar')
+<		Will result in a string to be added to |v:errors|:
+	test.vim line 12: Pattern '^f.*o$' does not match 'foobar' ~
+
+							*assert_notequal()*
+assert_notequal({expected}, {actual} [, {msg}])
+		The opposite of `assert_equal()`: add an error message to
+		|v:errors| when {expected} and {actual} are equal.
+		Also see |assert-return|.
+
+							*assert_notmatch()*
+assert_notmatch({pattern}, {actual} [, {msg}])
+		The opposite of `assert_match()`: add an error message to
+		|v:errors| when {pattern} matches {actual}.
+		Also see |assert-return|.
+
+assert_report({msg})					*assert_report()*
+		Report a test failure directly, using {msg}.
+		Always returns one.
+
+assert_true({actual} [, {msg}])				*assert_true()*
+		When {actual} is not true an error message is added to
+		|v:errors|, like with |assert_equal()|.
+		Also see |assert-return|.
+		A value is TRUE when it is a non-zero number.  When {actual}
+		is not a number the assert fails.
+		When {msg} is omitted an error in the form "Expected True but
+		got {actual}" is produced.
+
+asin({expr})						*asin()*
+		Return the arc sine of {expr} measured in radians, as a |Float|
+		in the range of [-pi/2, pi/2].
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range
+		[-1, 1].
+		Examples: >
+			:echo asin(0.8)
+<			0.927295 >
+			:echo asin(-0.5)
+<			-0.523599
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+atan({expr})						*atan()*
+		Return the principal value of the arc tangent of {expr}, in
+		the range [-pi/2, +pi/2] radians, as a |Float|.
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo atan(100)
+<			1.560797 >
+			:echo atan(-4.01)
+<			-1.326405
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+atan2({expr1}, {expr2})					*atan2()*
+		Return the arc tangent of {expr1} / {expr2}, measured in
+		radians, as a |Float| in the range [-pi, pi].
+		{expr1} and {expr2} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo atan2(-1, 1)
+<			-0.785398 >
+			:echo atan2(1, -1)
+<			2.356194
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+balloon_show({expr})					*balloon_show()*
+		Show {expr} inside the balloon.  For the GUI {expr} is used as
+		a string.  For a terminal {expr} can be a list, which contains
+		the lines of the balloon.  If {expr} is not a list it will be
+		split with |balloon_split()|.
+
+		Example: >
+			func GetBalloonContent()
+			   " initiate getting the content
+			   return ''
+			endfunc
+			set balloonexpr=GetBalloonContent()
+
+			func BalloonCallback(result)
+			  call balloon_show(a:result)
+			endfunc
+<
+		The intended use is that fetching the content of the balloon
+		is initiated from 'balloonexpr'.  It will invoke an
+		asynchronous method, in which a callback invokes
+		balloon_show().  The 'balloonexpr' itself can return an
+		empty string or a placeholder.
+
+		When showing a balloon is not possible nothing happens, no
+		error message.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval| or
+		|+balloon_eval_term| feature}
+
+balloon_split({msg})					*balloon_split()*
+		Split {msg} into lines to be displayed in a balloon.  The
+		splits are made for the current window size and optimize to
+		show debugger output.
+		Returns a |List| with the split lines.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval_term|
+		feature}
+
+							*browse()*
+browse({save}, {title}, {initdir}, {default})
+		Put up a file requester.  This only works when "has("browse")"
+		returns |TRUE| (only in some GUI versions).
+		The input fields are:
+		    {save}	when |TRUE|, select file to write
+		    {title}	title for the requester
+		    {initdir}	directory to start browsing in
+		    {default}	default file name
+		When the "Cancel" button is hit, something went wrong, or
+		browsing is not possible, an empty string is returned.
+
+							*browsedir()*
+browsedir({title}, {initdir})
+		Put up a directory requester.  This only works when
+		"has("browse")" returns |TRUE| (only in some GUI versions).
+		On systems where a directory browser is not supported a file
+		browser is used.  In that case: select a file in the directory
+		to be used.
+		The input fields are:
+		    {title}	title for the requester
+		    {initdir}	directory to start browsing in
+		When the "Cancel" button is hit, something went wrong, or
+		browsing is not possible, an empty string is returned.
+
+bufexists({expr})					*bufexists()*
+		The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| if a buffer called
+		{expr} exists.
+		If the {expr} argument is a number, buffer numbers are used.
+		Number zero is the alternate buffer for the current window.
+
+		If the {expr} argument is a string it must match a buffer name
+		exactly.  The name can be:
+		- Relative to the current directory.
+		- A full path.
+		- The name of a buffer with 'buftype' set to "nofile".
+		- A URL name.
+		Unlisted buffers will be found.
+		Note that help files are listed by their short name in the
+		output of |:buffers|, but bufexists() requires using their
+		long name to be able to find them.
+		bufexists() may report a buffer exists, but to use the name
+		with a |:buffer| command you may need to use |expand()|.  Esp
+		for MS-Windows 8.3 names in the form "c:\DOCUME~1"
+		Use "bufexists(0)" to test for the existence of an alternate
+		file name.
+							*buffer_exists()*
+		Obsolete name: buffer_exists().
+
+buflisted({expr})					*buflisted()*
+		The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| if a buffer called
+		{expr} exists and is listed (has the 'buflisted' option set).
+		The {expr} argument is used like with |bufexists()|.
+
+bufloaded({expr})					*bufloaded()*
+		The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| if a buffer called
+		{expr} exists and is loaded (shown in a window or hidden).
+		The {expr} argument is used like with |bufexists()|.
+
+bufname({expr})						*bufname()*
+		The result is the name of a buffer, as it is displayed by the
+		":ls" command.
+		If {expr} is a Number, that buffer number's name is given.
+		Number zero is the alternate buffer for the current window.
+		If {expr} is a String, it is used as a |file-pattern| to match
+		with the buffer names.  This is always done like 'magic' is
+		set and 'cpoptions' is empty.  When there is more than one
+		match an empty string is returned.
+		"" or "%" can be used for the current buffer, "#" for the
+		alternate buffer.
+		A full match is preferred, otherwise a match at the start, end
+		or middle of the buffer name is accepted.  If you only want a
+		full match then put "^" at the start and "$" at the end of the
+		pattern.
+		Listed buffers are found first.  If there is a single match
+		with a listed buffer, that one is returned.  Next unlisted
+		buffers are searched for.
+		If the {expr} is a String, but you want to use it as a buffer
+		number, force it to be a Number by adding zero to it: >
+			:echo bufname("3" + 0)
+<		If the buffer doesn't exist, or doesn't have a name, an empty
+		string is returned. >
+	bufname("#")		alternate buffer name
+	bufname(3)		name of buffer 3
+	bufname("%")		name of current buffer
+	bufname("file2")	name of buffer where "file2" matches.
+<							*buffer_name()*
+		Obsolete name: buffer_name().
+
+							*bufnr()*
+bufnr({expr} [, {create}])
+		The result is the number of a buffer, as it is displayed by
+		the ":ls" command.  For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()|
+		above.
+		If the buffer doesn't exist, -1 is returned.  Or, if the
+		{create} argument is present and not zero, a new, unlisted,
+		buffer is created and its number is returned.
+		bufnr("$") is the last buffer: >
+	:let last_buffer = bufnr("$")
+<		The result is a Number, which is the highest buffer number
+		of existing buffers.  Note that not all buffers with a smaller
+		number necessarily exist, because ":bwipeout" may have removed
+		them.  Use bufexists() to test for the existence of a buffer.
+							*buffer_number()*
+		Obsolete name: buffer_number().
+							*last_buffer_nr()*
+		Obsolete name for bufnr("$"): last_buffer_nr().
+
+bufwinid({expr})					*bufwinid()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the |window-ID| of the first
+		window associated with buffer {expr}.  For the use of {expr},
+		see |bufname()| above.  If buffer {expr} doesn't exist or
+		there is no such window, -1 is returned.  Example: >
+
+	echo "A window containing buffer 1 is " . (bufwinid(1))
+<
+		Only deals with the current tab page.
+
+bufwinnr({expr})					*bufwinnr()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the number of the first
+		window associated with buffer {expr}.  For the use of {expr},
+		see |bufname()| above.  If buffer {expr} doesn't exist or
+		there is no such window, -1 is returned.  Example: >
+
+	echo "A window containing buffer 1 is " . (bufwinnr(1))
+
+<		The number can be used with |CTRL-W_w| and ":wincmd w"
+		|:wincmd|.
+		Only deals with the current tab page.
+
+byte2line({byte})					*byte2line()*
+		Return the line number that contains the character at byte
+		count {byte} in the current buffer.  This includes the
+		end-of-line character, depending on the 'fileformat' option
+		for the current buffer.  The first character has byte count
+		one.
+		Also see |line2byte()|, |go| and |:goto|.
+		{not available when compiled without the |+byte_offset|
+		feature}
+
+byteidx({expr}, {nr})					*byteidx()*
+		Return byte index of the {nr}'th character in the string
+		{expr}.  Use zero for the first character, it returns zero.
+		This function is only useful when there are multibyte
+		characters, otherwise the returned value is equal to {nr}.
+		Composing characters are not counted separately, their byte
+		length is added to the preceding base character.  See
+		|byteidxcomp()| below for counting composing characters
+		separately.
+		Example : >
+			echo matchstr(str, ".", byteidx(str, 3))
+<		will display the fourth character.  Another way to do the
+		same: >
+			let s = strpart(str, byteidx(str, 3))
+			echo strpart(s, 0, byteidx(s, 1))
+<		Also see |strgetchar()| and |strcharpart()|.
+
+		If there are less than {nr} characters -1 is returned.
+		If there are exactly {nr} characters the length of the string
+		in bytes is returned.
+
+byteidxcomp({expr}, {nr})					*byteidxcomp()*
+		Like byteidx(), except that a composing character is counted
+		as a separate character.  Example: >
+			let s = 'e' . nr2char(0x301)
+			echo byteidx(s, 1)
+			echo byteidxcomp(s, 1)
+			echo byteidxcomp(s, 2)
+<		The first and third echo result in 3 ('e' plus composing
+		character is 3 bytes), the second echo results in 1 ('e' is
+		one byte).
+		Only works different from byteidx() when 'encoding' is set to
+		a Unicode encoding.
+
+call({func}, {arglist} [, {dict}])			*call()* *E699*
+		Call function {func} with the items in |List| {arglist} as
+		arguments.
+		{func} can either be a |Funcref| or the name of a function.
+		a:firstline and a:lastline are set to the cursor line.
+		Returns the return value of the called function.
+		{dict} is for functions with the "dict" attribute.  It will be
+		used to set the local variable "self". |Dictionary-function|
+
+ceil({expr})							*ceil()*
+		Return the smallest integral value greater than or equal to
+		{expr} as a |Float| (round up).
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			echo ceil(1.456)
+<			2.0  >
+			echo ceil(-5.456)
+<			-5.0  >
+			echo ceil(4.0)
+<			4.0
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+ch_canread({handle})						*ch_canread()*
+		Return non-zero when there is something to read from {handle}.
+		{handle} can be a Channel or a Job that has a Channel.
+
+		This is useful to read from a channel at a convenient time,
+		e.g. from a timer.
+
+		Note that messages are dropped when the channel does not have
+		a callback.  Add a close callback to avoid that.
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
+
+ch_close({handle})						*ch_close()*
+		Close {handle}.  See |channel-close|.
+		{handle} can be a Channel or a Job that has a Channel.
+		A close callback is not invoked.
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
+
+ch_close_in({handle})						*ch_close_in()*
+		Close the "in" part of {handle}.  See |channel-close-in|.
+		{handle} can be a Channel or a Job that has a Channel.
+		A close callback is not invoked.
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
+
+ch_evalexpr({handle}, {expr} [, {options}])			*ch_evalexpr()*
+		Send {expr} over {handle}.  The {expr} is encoded
+		according to the type of channel.  The function cannot be used
+		with a raw channel.  See |channel-use|.
+		{handle} can be a Channel or a Job that has a Channel.
+								*E917*
+		{options} must be a Dictionary.  It must not have a "callback"
+		entry.  It can have a "timeout" entry to specify the timeout
+		for this specific request.
+
+		ch_evalexpr() waits for a response and returns the decoded
+		expression.  When there is an error or timeout it returns an
+		empty string.
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
+
+ch_evalraw({handle}, {string} [, {options}])		*ch_evalraw()*
+		Send {string} over {handle}.
+		{handle} can be a Channel or a Job that has a Channel.
+
+		Works like |ch_evalexpr()|, but does not encode the request or
+		decode the response.  The caller is responsible for the
+		correct contents.  Also does not add a newline for a channel
+		in NL mode, the caller must do that.  The NL in the response
+		is removed.
+		Note that Vim does not know when the text received on a raw
+		channel is complete, it may only return the first part and you
+		need to use |ch_readraw()| to fetch the rest.
+		See |channel-use|.
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
+
+ch_getbufnr({handle}, {what})				 *ch_getbufnr()*
+		Get the buffer number that {handle} is using for {what}.
+		{handle} can be a Channel or a Job that has a Channel.
+		{what} can be "err" for stderr, "out" for stdout or empty for
+		socket output.
+		Returns -1 when there is no buffer.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
+
+ch_getjob({channel})						*ch_getjob()*
+		Get the Job associated with {channel}.
+		If there is no job calling |job_status()| on the returned Job
+		will result in "fail".
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| and
+		|+job| features}
+
+ch_info({handle})						*ch_info()*
+		Returns a Dictionary with information about {handle}.  The
+		items are:
+		   "id"		  number of the channel
+		   "status"	  "open", "buffered" or "closed", like
+				  ch_status()
+		When opened with ch_open():
+		   "hostname"	  the hostname of the address
+		   "port"	  the port of the address
+		   "sock_status"  "open" or "closed"
+		   "sock_mode"	  "NL", "RAW", "JSON" or "JS"
+		   "sock_io"	  "socket"
+		   "sock_timeout" timeout in msec
+		When opened with job_start():
+		   "out_status"	  "open", "buffered" or "closed"
+		   "out_mode"	  "NL", "RAW", "JSON" or "JS"
+		   "out_io"	  "null", "pipe", "file" or "buffer"
+		   "out_timeout"  timeout in msec
+		   "err_status"	  "open", "buffered" or "closed"
+		   "err_mode"	  "NL", "RAW", "JSON" or "JS"
+		   "err_io"	  "out", "null", "pipe", "file" or "buffer"
+		   "err_timeout"  timeout in msec
+		   "in_status"	  "open" or "closed"
+		   "in_mode"	  "NL", "RAW", "JSON" or "JS"
+		   "in_io"	  "null", "pipe", "file" or "buffer"
+		   "in_timeout"	  timeout in msec
+
+ch_log({msg} [, {handle}])					*ch_log()*
+		Write {msg} in the channel log file, if it was opened with
+		|ch_logfile()|.
+		When {handle} is passed the channel number is used for the
+		message.
+		{handle} can be a Channel or a Job that has a Channel.  The
+		Channel must be open for the channel number to be used.
+
+ch_logfile({fname} [, {mode}])					*ch_logfile()*
+		Start logging channel activity to {fname}.
+		When {fname} is an empty string: stop logging.
+
+		When {mode} is omitted or "a" append to the file.
+		When {mode} is "w" start with an empty file.
+
+		Use |ch_log()| to write log messages.  The file is flushed
+		after every message, on Unix you can use "tail -f" to see what
+		is going on in real time.
+
+		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+		NOTE: the channel communication is stored in the file, be
+		aware that this may contain confidential and privacy sensitive
+		information, e.g. a password you type in a terminal window.
+
+
+ch_open({address} [, {options}])				*ch_open()*
+		Open a channel to {address}.  See |channel|.
+		Returns a Channel.  Use |ch_status()| to check for failure.
+
+		{address} has the form "hostname:port", e.g.,
+		"localhost:8765".
+
+		If {options} is given it must be a |Dictionary|.
+		See |channel-open-options|.
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
+
+ch_read({handle} [, {options}])					*ch_read()*
+		Read from {handle} and return the received message.
+		{handle} can be a Channel or a Job that has a Channel.
+		For a NL channel this waits for a NL to arrive, except when
+		there is nothing more to read (channel was closed).
+		See |channel-more|.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
+
+ch_readblob({handle} [, {options}])			*ch_readblob()*
+		Like ch_read() but reads binary data and returns a |Blob|.
+		See |channel-more|.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
+
+ch_readraw({handle} [, {options}])			*ch_readraw()*
+		Like ch_read() but for a JS and JSON channel does not decode
+		the message.  For a NL channel it does not block waiting for
+		the NL to arrive, but otherwise works like ch_read().
+		See |channel-more|.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
+
+ch_sendexpr({handle}, {expr} [, {options}])			*ch_sendexpr()*
+		Send {expr} over {handle}.  The {expr} is encoded
+		according to the type of channel.  The function cannot be used
+		with a raw channel.
+		See |channel-use|.				*E912*
+		{handle} can be a Channel or a Job that has a Channel.
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
+
+ch_sendraw({handle}, {expr} [, {options}])		*ch_sendraw()*
+		Send |String| or |Blob| {expr} over {handle}.
+		Works like |ch_sendexpr()|, but does not encode the request or
+		decode the response.  The caller is responsible for the
+		correct contents.  Also does not add a newline for a channel
+		in NL mode, the caller must do that.  The NL in the response
+		is removed.
+		See |channel-use|.
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
+
+ch_setoptions({handle}, {options})			*ch_setoptions()*
+		Set options on {handle}:
+			"callback"	the channel callback
+			"timeout"	default read timeout in msec
+			"mode"		mode for the whole channel
+		See |ch_open()| for more explanation.
+		{handle} can be a Channel or a Job that has a Channel.
+
+		Note that changing the mode may cause queued messages to be
+		lost.
+
+		These options cannot be changed:
+			"waittime"	only applies to |ch_open()|
+
+ch_status({handle} [, {options}])				*ch_status()*
+		Return the status of {handle}:
+			"fail"		failed to open the channel
+			"open"		channel can be used
+			"buffered"	channel can be read, not written to
+			"closed"	channel can not be used
+		{handle} can be a Channel or a Job that has a Channel.
+		"buffered" is used when the channel was closed but there is
+		still data that can be obtained with |ch_read()|.
+
+		If {options} is given it can contain a "part" entry to specify
+		the part of the channel to return the status for: "out" or
+		"err".  For example, to get the error status: >
+			ch_status(job, {"part": "err"})
+<
+changenr()						*changenr()*
+		Return the number of the most recent change.  This is the same
+		number as what is displayed with |:undolist| and can be used
+		with the |:undo| command.
+		When a change was made it is the number of that change.  After
+		redo it is the number of the redone change.  After undo it is
+		one less than the number of the undone change.
+
+char2nr({expr} [, {utf8}])					*char2nr()*
+		Return number value of the first char in {expr}.  Examples: >
+			char2nr(" ")		returns 32
+			char2nr("ABC")		returns 65
+<		When {utf8} is omitted or zero, the current 'encoding' is used.
+		Example for "utf-8": >
+			char2nr("á")		returns 225
+			char2nr("á"[0])		returns 195
+<		With {utf8} set to 1, always treat as utf-8 characters.
+		A combining character is a separate character.
+		|nr2char()| does the opposite.
+
+cindent({lnum})						*cindent()*
+		Get the amount of indent for line {lnum} according the C
+		indenting rules, as with 'cindent'.
+		The indent is counted in spaces, the value of 'tabstop' is
+		relevant.  {lnum} is used just like in |getline()|.
+		When {lnum} is invalid or Vim was not compiled the |+cindent|
+		feature, -1 is returned.
+		See |C-indenting|.
+
+clearmatches()						*clearmatches()*
+		Clears all matches previously defined by |matchadd()| and the
+		|:match| commands.
+
+							*col()*
+col({expr})	The result is a Number, which is the byte index of the column
+		position given with {expr}.  The accepted positions are:
+		    .	    the cursor position
+		    $	    the end of the cursor line (the result is the
+			    number of bytes in the cursor line plus one)
+		    'x	    position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is
+			    returned)
+		    v       In Visual mode: the start of the Visual area (the
+			    cursor is the end).  When not in Visual mode
+			    returns the cursor position.  Differs from |'<| in
+			    that it's updated right away.
+		Additionally {expr} can be [lnum, col]: a |List| with the line
+		and column number. Most useful when the column is "$", to get
+		the last column of a specific line.  When "lnum" or "col" is
+		out of range then col() returns zero.
+		To get the line number use |line()|.  To get both use
+		|getpos()|.
+		For the screen column position use |virtcol()|.
+		Note that only marks in the current file can be used.
+		Examples: >
+			col(".")		column of cursor
+			col("$")		length of cursor line plus one
+			col("'t")		column of mark t
+			col("'" . markname)	column of mark markname
+<		The first column is 1.  0 is returned for an error.
+		For an uppercase mark the column may actually be in another
+		buffer.
+		For the cursor position, when 'virtualedit' is active, the
+		column is one higher if the cursor is after the end of the
+		line.  This can be used to obtain the column in Insert mode: >
+			:imap <F2> <C-O>:let save_ve = &ve<CR>
+				\<C-O>:set ve=all<CR>
+				\<C-O>:echo col(".") . "\n" <Bar>
+				\let &ve = save_ve<CR>
+<
+
+complete({startcol}, {matches})			*complete()* *E785*
+		Set the matches for Insert mode completion.
+		Can only be used in Insert mode.  You need to use a mapping
+		with CTRL-R = (see |i_CTRL-R|).  It does not work after CTRL-O
+		or with an expression mapping.
+		{startcol} is the byte offset in the line where the completed
+		text start.  The text up to the cursor is the original text
+		that will be replaced by the matches.  Use col('.') for an
+		empty string.  "col('.') - 1" will replace one character by a
+		match.
+		{matches} must be a |List|.  Each |List| item is one match.
+		See |complete-items| for the kind of items that are possible.
+		Note that the after calling this function you need to avoid
+		inserting anything that would cause completion to stop.
+		The match can be selected with CTRL-N and CTRL-P as usual with
+		Insert mode completion.  The popup menu will appear if
+		specified, see |ins-completion-menu|.
+		Example: >
+	inoremap <F5> <C-R>=ListMonths()<CR>
+
+	func! ListMonths()
+	  call complete(col('.'), ['January', 'February', 'March',
+		\ 'April', 'May', 'June', 'July', 'August', 'September',
+		\ 'October', 'November', 'December'])
+	  return ''
+	endfunc
+<		This isn't very useful, but it shows how it works.  Note that
+		an empty string is returned to avoid a zero being inserted.
+
+complete_add({expr})				*complete_add()*
+		Add {expr} to the list of matches.  Only to be used by the
+		function specified with the 'completefunc' option.
+		Returns 0 for failure (empty string or out of memory),
+		1 when the match was added, 2 when the match was already in
+		the list.
+		See |complete-functions| for an explanation of {expr}.  It is
+		the same as one item in the list that 'omnifunc' would return.
+
+complete_check()				*complete_check()*
+		Check for a key typed while looking for completion matches.
+		This is to be used when looking for matches takes some time.
+		Returns |TRUE| when searching for matches is to be aborted,
+		zero otherwise.
+		Only to be used by the function specified with the
+		'completefunc' option.
+
+						*confirm()*
+confirm({msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]])
+		Confirm() offers the user a dialog, from which a choice can be
+		made.  It returns the number of the choice.  For the first
+		choice this is 1.
+		Note: confirm() is only supported when compiled with dialog
+		support, see |+dialog_con| and |+dialog_gui|.
+
+		{msg} is displayed in a |dialog| with {choices} as the
+		alternatives.  When {choices} is missing or empty, "&OK" is
+		used (and translated).
+		{msg} is a String, use '\n' to include a newline.  Only on
+		some systems the string is wrapped when it doesn't fit.
+
+		{choices} is a String, with the individual choices separated
+		by '\n', e.g. >
+			confirm("Save changes?", "&Yes\n&No\n&Cancel")
+<		The letter after the '&' is the shortcut key for that choice.
+		Thus you can type 'c' to select "Cancel".  The shortcut does
+		not need to be the first letter: >
+			confirm("file has been modified", "&Save\nSave &All")
+<		For the console, the first letter of each choice is used as
+		the default shortcut key.
+
+		The optional {default} argument is the number of the choice
+		that is made if the user hits <CR>.  Use 1 to make the first
+		choice the default one.  Use 0 to not set a default.  If
+		{default} is omitted, 1 is used.
+
+		The optional {type} argument gives the type of dialog.  This
+		is only used for the icon of the GTK, Mac, Motif and Win32
+		GUI.  It can be one of these values: "Error", "Question",
+		"Info", "Warning" or "Generic".  Only the first character is
+		relevant.  When {type} is omitted, "Generic" is used.
+
+		If the user aborts the dialog by pressing <Esc>, CTRL-C,
+		or another valid interrupt key, confirm() returns 0.
+
+		An example: >
+   :let choice = confirm("What do you want?", "&Apples\n&Oranges\n&Bananas", 2)
+   :if choice == 0
+   :	echo "make up your mind!"
+   :elseif choice == 3
+   :	echo "tasteful"
+   :else
+   :	echo "I prefer bananas myself."
+   :endif
+<		In a GUI dialog, buttons are used.  The layout of the buttons
+		depends on the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'.  If it is included,
+		the buttons are always put vertically.  Otherwise,  confirm()
+		tries to put the buttons in one horizontal line.  If they
+		don't fit, a vertical layout is used anyway.  For some systems
+		the horizontal layout is always used.
+
+							*copy()*
+copy({expr})	Make a copy of {expr}.  For Numbers and Strings this isn't
+		different from using {expr} directly.
+		When {expr} is a |List| a shallow copy is created.  This means
+		that the original |List| can be changed without changing the
+		copy, and vice versa.  But the items are identical, thus
+		changing an item changes the contents of both |Lists|.
+		A |Dictionary| is copied in a similar way as a |List|.
+		Also see |deepcopy()|.
+
+cos({expr})						*cos()*
+		Return the cosine of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float|.
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo cos(100)
+<			0.862319 >
+			:echo cos(-4.01)
+<			-0.646043
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+cosh({expr})						*cosh()*
+		Return the hyperbolic cosine of {expr} as a |Float| in the range
+		[1, inf].
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo cosh(0.5)
+<			1.127626 >
+			:echo cosh(-0.5)
+<			-1.127626
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+count({comp}, {expr} [, {ic} [, {start}]])			*count()*
+		Return the number of times an item with value {expr} appears
+		in |String|, |List| or |Dictionary| {comp}.
+
+		If {start} is given then start with the item with this index.
+		{start} can only be used with a |List|.
+
+		When {ic} is given and it's |TRUE| then case is ignored.
+
+		When {comp} is a string then the number of not overlapping
+		occurrences of {expr} is returned. Zero is returned when
+		{expr} is an empty string.
+
+							*cscope_connection()*
+cscope_connection([{num} , {dbpath} [, {prepend}]])
+		Checks for the existence of a |cscope| connection.  If no
+		parameters are specified, then the function returns:
+			0, if cscope was not available (not compiled in), or
+			   if there are no cscope connections;
+			1, if there is at least one cscope connection.
+
+		If parameters are specified, then the value of {num}
+		determines how existence of a cscope connection is checked:
+
+		{num}	Description of existence check
+		-----	------------------------------
+		0	Same as no parameters (e.g., "cscope_connection()").
+		1	Ignore {prepend}, and use partial string matches for
+			{dbpath}.
+		2	Ignore {prepend}, and use exact string matches for
+			{dbpath}.
+		3	Use {prepend}, use partial string matches for both
+			{dbpath} and {prepend}.
+		4	Use {prepend}, use exact string matches for both
+			{dbpath} and {prepend}.
+
+		Note: All string comparisons are case sensitive!
+
+		Examples.  Suppose we had the following (from ":cs show"): >
+
+  # pid    database name			prepend path
+  0 27664  cscope.out				/usr/local
+<
+		Invocation					Return Val ~
+		----------					---------- >
+		cscope_connection()					1
+		cscope_connection(1, "out")				1
+		cscope_connection(2, "out")				0
+		cscope_connection(3, "out")				0
+		cscope_connection(3, "out", "local")			1
+		cscope_connection(4, "out")				0
+		cscope_connection(4, "out", "local")			0
+		cscope_connection(4, "cscope.out", "/usr/local")	1
+<
+cursor({lnum}, {col} [, {off}])				*cursor()*
+cursor({list})
+		Positions the cursor at the column (byte count) {col} in the
+		line {lnum}.  The first column is one.
+
+		When there is one argument {list} this is used as a |List|
+		with two, three or four item:
+			[{lnum}, {col}]
+			[{lnum}, {col}, {off}]
+			[{lnum}, {col}, {off}, {curswant}]
+		This is like the return value of |getpos()| or |getcurpos()|,
+		but without the first item.
+
+		Does not change the jumplist.
+		If {lnum} is greater than the number of lines in the buffer,
+		the cursor will be positioned at the last line in the buffer.
+		If {lnum} is zero, the cursor will stay in the current line.
+		If {col} is greater than the number of bytes in the line,
+		the cursor will be positioned at the last character in the
+		line.
+		If {col} is zero, the cursor will stay in the current column.
+		If {curswant} is given it is used to set the preferred column
+		for vertical movement.  Otherwise {col} is used.
+
+		When 'virtualedit' is used {off} specifies the offset in
+		screen columns from the start of the character.  E.g., a
+		position within a <Tab> or after the last character.
+		Returns 0 when the position could be set, -1 otherwise.
+
+debugbreak({pid})					*debugbreak()*
+		Specifically used to interrupt a program being debugged.  It
+		will cause process {pid} to get a SIGTRAP.  Behavior for other
+		processes is undefined. See |terminal-debugger|.
+		{only available on MS-Windows}
+
+deepcopy({expr} [, {noref}])				*deepcopy()* *E698*
+		Make a copy of {expr}.  For Numbers and Strings this isn't
+		different from using {expr} directly.
+		When {expr} is a |List| a full copy is created.  This means
+		that the original |List| can be changed without changing the
+		copy, and vice versa.  When an item is a |List| or
+		|Dictionary|, a copy for it is made, recursively.  Thus
+		changing an item in the copy does not change the contents of
+		the original |List|.
+		A |Dictionary| is copied in a similar way as a |List|.
+		When {noref} is omitted or zero a contained |List| or
+		|Dictionary| is only copied once.  All references point to
+		this single copy.  With {noref} set to 1 every occurrence of a
+		|List| or |Dictionary| results in a new copy.  This also means
+		that a cyclic reference causes deepcopy() to fail.
+								*E724*
+		Nesting is possible up to 100 levels.  When there is an item
+		that refers back to a higher level making a deep copy with
+		{noref} set to 1 will fail.
+		Also see |copy()|.
+
+delete({fname} [, {flags}])					*delete()*
+		Without {flags} or with {flags} empty: Deletes the file by the
+		name {fname}.  This also works when {fname} is a symbolic link.
+
+		When {flags} is "d": Deletes the directory by the name
+		{fname}.  This fails when directory {fname} is not empty.
+
+		When {flags} is "rf": Deletes the directory by the name
+		{fname} and everything in it, recursively.  BE CAREFUL!
+		Note: on MS-Windows it is not possible to delete a directory
+		that is being used.
+
+		A symbolic link itself is deleted, not what it points to.
+
+		The result is a Number, which is 0 if the delete operation was
+		successful and -1 when the deletion failed or partly failed.
+
+		Use |remove()| to delete an item from a |List|.
+		To delete a line from the buffer use |:delete| or
+		|deletebufline()|.
+
+deletebufline({expr}, {first} [, {last}])		*deletebufline()*
+		Delete lines {first} to {last} (inclusive) from buffer {expr}.
+		If {last} is omitted then delete line {first} only.
+		On success 0 is returned, on failure 1 is returned.
+
+		For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()| above.
+
+		{first} and {last} are used like with |getline()|. Note that
+		when using |line()| this refers to the current buffer. Use "$"
+		to refer to the last line in buffer {expr}.
+
+							*did_filetype()*
+did_filetype()	Returns |TRUE| when autocommands are being executed and the
+		FileType event has been triggered at least once.  Can be used
+		to avoid triggering the FileType event again in the scripts
+		that detect the file type. |FileType|
+		Returns |FALSE| when `:setf FALLBACK` was used.
+		When editing another file, the counter is reset, thus this
+		really checks if the FileType event has been triggered for the
+		current buffer.  This allows an autocommand that starts
+		editing another buffer to set 'filetype' and load a syntax
+		file.
+
+diff_filler({lnum})					*diff_filler()*
+		Returns the number of filler lines above line {lnum}.
+		These are the lines that were inserted at this point in
+		another diff'ed window.  These filler lines are shown in the
+		display but don't exist in the buffer.
+		{lnum} is used like with |getline()|.  Thus "." is the current
+		line, "'m" mark m, etc.
+		Returns 0 if the current window is not in diff mode.
+
+diff_hlID({lnum}, {col})				*diff_hlID()*
+		Returns the highlight ID for diff mode at line {lnum} column
+		{col} (byte index).  When the current line does not have a
+		diff change zero is returned.
+		{lnum} is used like with |getline()|.  Thus "." is the current
+		line, "'m" mark m, etc.
+		{col} is 1 for the leftmost column, {lnum} is 1 for the first
+		line.
+		The highlight ID can be used with |synIDattr()| to obtain
+		syntax information about the highlighting.
+
+empty({expr})						*empty()*
+		Return the Number 1 if {expr} is empty, zero otherwise.
+		- A |List| or |Dictionary| is empty when it does not have any
+		  items.
+		- A |String| is empty when its length is zero.
+		- A |Number| and |Float| are empty when their value is zero.
+		- |v:false|, |v:none| and |v:null| are empty, |v:true| is not.
+		- A |Job| is empty when it failed to start.
+		- A |Channel| is empty when it is closed.
+		- A |Blob| is empty when its length is zero.
+
+		For a long |List| this is much faster than comparing the
+		length with zero.
+
+escape({string}, {chars})				*escape()*
+		Escape the characters in {chars} that occur in {string} with a
+		backslash.  Example: >
+			:echo escape('c:\program files\vim', ' \')
+<		results in: >
+			c:\\program\ files\\vim
+<		Also see |shellescape()| and |fnameescape()|.
+
+							*eval()*
+eval({string})	Evaluate {string} and return the result.  Especially useful to
+		turn the result of |string()| back into the original value.
+		This works for Numbers, Floats, Strings, Blobs and composites
+		of them.  Also works for |Funcref|s that refer to existing
+		functions.
+
+eventhandler()						*eventhandler()*
+		Returns 1 when inside an event handler.  That is that Vim got
+		interrupted while waiting for the user to type a character,
+		e.g., when dropping a file on Vim.  This means interactive
+		commands cannot be used.  Otherwise zero is returned.
+
+executable({expr})					*executable()*
+		This function checks if an executable with the name {expr}
+		exists.  {expr} must be the name of the program without any
+		arguments.
+		executable() uses the value of $PATH and/or the normal
+		searchpath for programs.		*PATHEXT*
+		On MS-DOS and MS-Windows the ".exe", ".bat", etc. can
+		optionally be included.  Then the extensions in $PATHEXT are
+		tried.  Thus if "foo.exe" does not exist, "foo.exe.bat" can be
+		found.  If $PATHEXT is not set then ".exe;.com;.bat;.cmd" is
+		used.  A dot by itself can be used in $PATHEXT to try using
+		the name without an extension.  When 'shell' looks like a
+		Unix shell, then the name is also tried without adding an
+		extension.
+		On MS-DOS and MS-Windows it only checks if the file exists and
+		is not a directory, not if it's really executable.
+		On MS-Windows an executable in the same directory as Vim is
+		always found.  Since this directory is added to $PATH it
+		should also work to execute it |win32-PATH|.
+		The result is a Number:
+			1	exists
+			0	does not exist
+			-1	not implemented on this system
+		|exepath()| can be used to get the full path of an executable.
+
+execute({command} [, {silent}])					*execute()*
+		Execute an Ex command or commands and return the output as a
+		string.
+		{command} can be a string or a List.  In case of a List the
+		lines are executed one by one.
+		This is equivalent to: >
+			redir => var
+			{command}
+			redir END
+<
+		The optional {silent} argument can have these values:
+			""		no `:silent` used
+			"silent"	`:silent` used
+			"silent!"	`:silent!` used
+		The default is "silent".  Note that with "silent!", unlike
+		`:redir`, error messages are dropped.  When using an external
+		command the screen may be messed up, use `system()` instead.
+							*E930*
+		It is not possible to use `:redir` anywhere in {command}.
+
+		To get a list of lines use |split()| on the result: >
+			split(execute('args'), "\n")
+
+<		When used recursively the output of the recursive call is not
+		included in the output of the higher level call.
+
+exepath({expr})						*exepath()*
+		If {expr} is an executable and is either an absolute path, a
+		relative path or found in $PATH, return the full path.
+		Note that the current directory is used when {expr} starts
+		with "./", which may be a problem for Vim: >
+			echo exepath(v:progpath)
+<		If {expr} cannot be found in $PATH or is not executable then
+		an empty string is returned.
+
+							*exists()*
+exists({expr})	The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| if {expr} is defined,
+		zero otherwise.
+
+		For checking for a supported feature use |has()|.
+		For checking if a file exists use |filereadable()|.
+
+		The {expr} argument is a string, which contains one of these:
+			&option-name	Vim option (only checks if it exists,
+					not if it really works)
+			+option-name	Vim option that works.
+			$ENVNAME	environment variable (could also be
+					done by comparing with an empty
+					string)
+			*funcname	built-in function (see |functions|)
+					or user defined function (see
+					|user-functions|). Also works for a
+					variable that is a Funcref.
+			varname		internal variable (see
+					|internal-variables|).  Also works
+					for |curly-braces-names|, |Dictionary|
+					entries, |List| items, etc.  Beware
+					that evaluating an index may cause an
+					error message for an invalid
+					expression.  E.g.: >
+					   :let l = [1, 2, 3]
+					   :echo exists("l[5]")
+<					   0 >
+					   :echo exists("l[xx]")
+<					   E121: Undefined variable: xx
+					   0
+			:cmdname	Ex command: built-in command, user
+					command or command modifier |:command|.
+					Returns:
+					1  for match with start of a command
+					2  full match with a command
+					3  matches several user commands
+					To check for a supported command
+					always check the return value to be 2.
+			:2match		The |:2match| command.
+			:3match		The |:3match| command.
+			#event		autocommand defined for this event
+			#event#pattern	autocommand defined for this event and
+					pattern (the pattern is taken
+					literally and compared to the
+					autocommand patterns character by
+					character)
+			#group		autocommand group exists
+			#group#event	autocommand defined for this group and
+					event.
+			#group#event#pattern
+					autocommand defined for this group,
+					event and pattern.
+			##event		autocommand for this event is
+					supported.
+
+		Examples: >
+			exists("&shortname")
+			exists("$HOSTNAME")
+			exists("*strftime")
+			exists("*s:MyFunc")
+			exists("bufcount")
+			exists(":Make")
+			exists("#CursorHold")
+			exists("#BufReadPre#*.gz")
+			exists("#filetypeindent")
+			exists("#filetypeindent#FileType")
+			exists("#filetypeindent#FileType#*")
+			exists("##ColorScheme")
+<		There must be no space between the symbol (&/$/*/#) and the
+		name.
+		There must be no extra characters after the name, although in
+		a few cases this is ignored.  That may become more strict in
+		the future, thus don't count on it!
+		Working example: >
+			exists(":make")
+<		NOT working example: >
+			exists(":make install")
+
+<		Note that the argument must be a string, not the name of the
+		variable itself.  For example: >
+			exists(bufcount)
+<		This doesn't check for existence of the "bufcount" variable,
+		but gets the value of "bufcount", and checks if that exists.
+
+exp({expr})						*exp()*
+		Return the exponential of {expr} as a |Float| in the range
+		[0, inf].
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo exp(2)
+<			7.389056 >
+			:echo exp(-1)
+<			0.367879
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+expand({expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]])				*expand()*
+		Expand wildcards and the following special keywords in {expr}.
+		'wildignorecase' applies.
+
+		If {list} is given and it is |TRUE|, a List will be returned.
+		Otherwise the result is a String and when there are several
+		matches, they are separated by <NL> characters.  [Note: in
+		version 5.0 a space was used, which caused problems when a
+		file name contains a space]
+
+		If the expansion fails, the result is an empty string.  A name
+		for a non-existing file is not included, unless {expr} does
+		not start with '%', '#' or '<', see below.
+
+		When {expr} starts with '%', '#' or '<', the expansion is done
+		like for the |cmdline-special| variables with their associated
+		modifiers.  Here is a short overview:
+
+			%		current file name
+			#		alternate file name
+			#n		alternate file name n
+			<cfile>		file name under the cursor
+			<afile>		autocmd file name
+			<abuf>		autocmd buffer number (as a String!)
+			<amatch>	autocmd matched name
+			<sfile>		sourced script file or function name
+			<slnum>		sourced script line number or function
+					line number
+			<sflnum>	script file line number, also when in
+					a function
+			<cword>		word under the cursor
+			<cWORD>		WORD under the cursor
+			<client>	the {clientid} of the last received
+					message |server2client()|
+		Modifiers:
+			:p		expand to full path
+			:h		head (last path component removed)
+			:t		tail (last path component only)
+			:r		root (one extension removed)
+			:e		extension only
+
+		Example: >
+			:let &tags = expand("%:p:h") . "/tags"
+<		Note that when expanding a string that starts with '%', '#' or
+		'<', any following text is ignored.  This does NOT work: >
+			:let doesntwork = expand("%:h.bak")
+<		Use this: >
+			:let doeswork = expand("%:h") . ".bak"
+<		Also note that expanding "<cfile>" and others only returns the
+		referenced file name without further expansion.  If "<cfile>"
+		is "~/.cshrc", you need to do another expand() to have the
+		"~/" expanded into the path of the home directory: >
+			:echo expand(expand("<cfile>"))
+<
+		There cannot be white space between the variables and the
+		following modifier.  The |fnamemodify()| function can be used
+		to modify normal file names.
+
+		When using '%' or '#', and the current or alternate file name
+		is not defined, an empty string is used.  Using "%:p" in a
+		buffer with no name, results in the current directory, with a
+		'/' added.
+
+		When {expr} does not start with '%', '#' or '<', it is
+		expanded like a file name is expanded on the command line.
+		'suffixes' and 'wildignore' are used, unless the optional
+		{nosuf} argument is given and it is |TRUE|.
+		Names for non-existing files are included.  The "**" item can
+		be used to search in a directory tree.  For example, to find
+		all "README" files in the current directory and below: >
+			:echo expand("**/README")
+<
+		Expand() can also be used to expand variables and environment
+		variables that are only known in a shell.  But this can be
+		slow, because a shell may be used to do the expansion.  See
+		|expr-env-expand|.
+		The expanded variable is still handled like a list of file
+		names.  When an environment variable cannot be expanded, it is
+		left unchanged.  Thus ":echo expand('$FOOBAR')" results in
+		"$FOOBAR".
+
+		See |glob()| for finding existing files.  See |system()| for
+		getting the raw output of an external command.
+
+extend({expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}])			*extend()*
+		{expr1} and {expr2} must be both |Lists| or both
+		|Dictionaries|.
+
+		If they are |Lists|: Append {expr2} to {expr1}.
+		If {expr3} is given insert the items of {expr2} before item
+		{expr3} in {expr1}.  When {expr3} is zero insert before the
+		first item.  When {expr3} is equal to len({expr1}) then
+		{expr2} is appended.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo sort(extend(mylist, [7, 5]))
+			:call extend(mylist, [2, 3], 1)
+<		When {expr1} is the same List as {expr2} then the number of
+		items copied is equal to the original length of the List.
+		E.g., when {expr3} is 1 you get N new copies of the first item
+		(where N is the original length of the List).
+		Use |add()| to concatenate one item to a list.  To concatenate
+		two lists into a new list use the + operator: >
+			:let newlist = [1, 2, 3] + [4, 5]
+<
+		If they are |Dictionaries|:
+		Add all entries from {expr2} to {expr1}.
+		If a key exists in both {expr1} and {expr2} then {expr3} is
+		used to decide what to do:
+		{expr3} = "keep": keep the value of {expr1}
+		{expr3} = "force": use the value of {expr2}
+		{expr3} = "error": give an error message		*E737*
+		When {expr3} is omitted then "force" is assumed.
+
+		{expr1} is changed when {expr2} is not empty.  If necessary
+		make a copy of {expr1} first.
+		{expr2} remains unchanged.
+		When {expr1} is locked and {expr2} is not empty the operation
+		fails.
+		Returns {expr1}.
+
+
+feedkeys({string} [, {mode}])				*feedkeys()*
+		Characters in {string} are queued for processing as if they
+		come from a mapping or were typed by the user.
+
+		By default the string is added to the end of the typeahead
+		buffer, thus if a mapping is still being executed the
+		characters come after them.  Use the 'i' flag to insert before
+		other characters, they will be executed next, before any
+		characters from a mapping.
+
+		The function does not wait for processing of keys contained in
+		{string}.
+
+		To include special keys into {string}, use double-quotes
+		and "\..." notation |expr-quote|. For example,
+		feedkeys("\<CR>") simulates pressing of the <Enter> key. But
+		feedkeys('\<CR>') pushes 5 characters.
+
+		{mode} is a String, which can contain these character flags:
+		'm'	Remap keys. This is default.  If {mode} is absent,
+			keys are remapped.
+		'n'	Do not remap keys.
+		't'	Handle keys as if typed; otherwise they are handled as
+			if coming from a mapping.  This matters for undo,
+			opening folds, etc.
+		'L'	Lowlevel input.  Only works for Unix or when using the
+			GUI. Keys are used as if they were coming from the
+			terminal.  Other flags are not used.  *E980*
+		'i'	Insert the string instead of appending (see above).
+		'x'	Execute commands until typeahead is empty.  This is
+			similar to using ":normal!".  You can call feedkeys()
+			several times without 'x' and then one time with 'x'
+			(possibly with an empty {string}) to execute all the
+			typeahead.  Note that when Vim ends in Insert mode it
+			will behave as if <Esc> is typed, to avoid getting
+			stuck, waiting for a character to be typed before the
+			script continues.
+			Note that if you manage to call feedkeys() while
+			executing commands, thus calling it recursively, then
+			all typehead will be consumed by the last call.
+		'!'	When used with 'x' will not end Insert mode. Can be
+			used in a test when a timer is set to exit Insert mode
+			a little later.  Useful for testing CursorHoldI.
+
+		Return value is always 0.
+
+filereadable({file})					*filereadable()*
+		The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| when a file with the
+		name {file} exists, and can be read.  If {file} doesn't exist,
+		or is a directory, the result is |FALSE|.  {file} is any
+		expression, which is used as a String.
+		If you don't care about the file being readable you can use
+		|glob()|.
+							*file_readable()*
+		Obsolete name: file_readable().
+
+
+filewritable({file})					*filewritable()*
+		The result is a Number, which is 1 when a file with the
+		name {file} exists, and can be written.  If {file} doesn't
+		exist, or is not writable, the result is 0.  If {file} is a
+		directory, and we can write to it, the result is 2.
+
+
+filter({expr1}, {expr2})				*filter()*
+		{expr1} must be a |List| or a |Dictionary|.
+		For each item in {expr1} evaluate {expr2} and when the result
+		is zero remove the item from the |List| or |Dictionary|.
+		{expr2} must be a |string| or |Funcref|.
+
+		If {expr2} is a |string|, inside {expr2} |v:val| has the value
+		of the current item.  For a |Dictionary| |v:key| has the key
+		of the current item and for a |List| |v:key| has the index of
+		the current item.
+		Examples: >
+			call filter(mylist, 'v:val !~ "OLD"')
+<		Removes the items where "OLD" appears. >
+			call filter(mydict, 'v:key >= 8')
+<		Removes the items with a key below 8. >
+			call filter(var, 0)
+<		Removes all the items, thus clears the |List| or |Dictionary|.
+
+		Note that {expr2} is the result of expression and is then
+		used as an expression again.  Often it is good to use a
+		|literal-string| to avoid having to double backslashes.
+
+		If {expr2} is a |Funcref| it must take two arguments:
+			1. the key or the index of the current item.
+			2. the value of the current item.
+		The function must return |TRUE| if the item should be kept.
+		Example that keeps the odd items of a list: >
+			func Odd(idx, val)
+			  return a:idx % 2 == 1
+			endfunc
+			call filter(mylist, function('Odd'))
+<		It is shorter when using a |lambda|: >
+			call filter(myList, {idx, val -> idx * val <= 42})
+<		If you do not use "val" you can leave it out: >
+			call filter(myList, {idx -> idx % 2 == 1})
+<
+		The operation is done in-place.  If you want a |List| or
+		|Dictionary| to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
+			:let l = filter(copy(mylist), 'v:val =~ "KEEP"')
+
+<		Returns {expr1}, the |List| or |Dictionary| that was filtered.
+		When an error is encountered while evaluating {expr2} no
+		further items in {expr1} are processed.  When {expr2} is a
+		Funcref errors inside a function are ignored, unless it was
+		defined with the "abort" flag.
+
+
+finddir({name} [, {path} [, {count}]])				*finddir()*
+		Find directory {name} in {path}.  Supports both downwards and
+		upwards recursive directory searches.  See |file-searching|
+		for the syntax of {path}.
+		Returns the path of the first found match.  When the found
+		directory is below the current directory a relative path is
+		returned.  Otherwise a full path is returned.
+		If {path} is omitted or empty then 'path' is used.
+		If the optional {count} is given, find {count}'s occurrence of
+		{name} in {path} instead of the first one.
+		When {count} is negative return all the matches in a |List|.
+		This is quite similar to the ex-command |:find|.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+file_in_path|
+		feature}
+
+findfile({name} [, {path} [, {count}]])				*findfile()*
+		Just like |finddir()|, but find a file instead of a directory.
+		Uses 'suffixesadd'.
+		Example: >
+			:echo findfile("tags.vim", ".;")
+<		Searches from the directory of the current file upwards until
+		it finds the file "tags.vim".
+
+float2nr({expr})					*float2nr()*
+		Convert {expr} to a Number by omitting the part after the
+		decimal point.
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a Number.
+		When the value of {expr} is out of range for a |Number| the
+		result is truncated to 0x7fffffff or -0x7fffffff (or when
+		64-bit Number support is enabled, 0x7fffffffffffffff or
+		-0x7fffffffffffffff).  NaN results in -0x80000000 (or when
+		64-bit Number support is enabled, -0x8000000000000000).
+		Examples: >
+			echo float2nr(3.95)
+<			3  >
+			echo float2nr(-23.45)
+<			-23  >
+			echo float2nr(1.0e100)
+<			2147483647  (or 9223372036854775807) >
+			echo float2nr(-1.0e150)
+<			-2147483647 (or -9223372036854775807) >
+			echo float2nr(1.0e-100)
+<			0
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+floor({expr})							*floor()*
+		Return the largest integral value less than or equal to
+		{expr} as a |Float| (round down).
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			echo floor(1.856)
+<			1.0  >
+			echo floor(-5.456)
+<			-6.0  >
+			echo floor(4.0)
+<			4.0
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+fmod({expr1}, {expr2})					*fmod()*
+		Return the remainder of {expr1} / {expr2}, even if the
+		division is not representable.  Returns {expr1} - i * {expr2}
+		for some integer i such that if {expr2} is non-zero, the
+		result has the same sign as {expr1} and magnitude less than
+		the magnitude of {expr2}.  If {expr2} is zero, the value
+		returned is zero.  The value returned is a |Float|.
+		{expr1} and {expr2} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo fmod(12.33, 1.22)
+<			0.13 >
+			:echo fmod(-12.33, 1.22)
+<			-0.13
+		{only available when compiled with |+float| feature}
+
+
+fnameescape({string})					*fnameescape()*
+		Escape {string} for use as file name command argument.  All
+		characters that have a special meaning, such as '%' and '|'
+		are escaped with a backslash.
+		For most systems the characters escaped are
+		" \t\n*?[{`$\\%#'\"|!<".  For systems where a backslash
+		appears in a filename, it depends on the value of 'isfname'.
+		A leading '+' and '>' is also escaped (special after |:edit|
+		and |:write|).  And a "-" by itself (special after |:cd|).
+		Example: >
+			:let fname = '+some str%nge|name'
+			:exe "edit " . fnameescape(fname)
+<		results in executing: >
+			edit \+some\ str\%nge\|name
+
+fnamemodify({fname}, {mods})				*fnamemodify()*
+		Modify file name {fname} according to {mods}.  {mods} is a
+		string of characters like it is used for file names on the
+		command line.  See |filename-modifiers|.
+		Example: >
+			:echo fnamemodify("main.c", ":p:h")
+<		results in: >
+			/home/mool/vim/vim/src
+<		Note: Environment variables don't work in {fname}, use
+		|expand()| first then.
+
+foldclosed({lnum})					*foldclosed()*
+		The result is a Number.  If the line {lnum} is in a closed
+		fold, the result is the number of the first line in that fold.
+		If the line {lnum} is not in a closed fold, -1 is returned.
+
+foldclosedend({lnum})					*foldclosedend()*
+		The result is a Number.  If the line {lnum} is in a closed
+		fold, the result is the number of the last line in that fold.
+		If the line {lnum} is not in a closed fold, -1 is returned.
+
+foldlevel({lnum})					*foldlevel()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the foldlevel of line {lnum}
+		in the current buffer.  For nested folds the deepest level is
+		returned.  If there is no fold at line {lnum}, zero is
+		returned.  It doesn't matter if the folds are open or closed.
+		When used while updating folds (from 'foldexpr') -1 is
+		returned for lines where folds are still to be updated and the
+		foldlevel is unknown.  As a special case the level of the
+		previous line is usually available.
+
+							*foldtext()*
+foldtext()	Returns a String, to be displayed for a closed fold.  This is
+		the default function used for the 'foldtext' option and should
+		only be called from evaluating 'foldtext'.  It uses the
+		|v:foldstart|, |v:foldend| and |v:folddashes| variables.
+		The returned string looks like this: >
+			+-- 45 lines: abcdef
+<		The number of leading dashes depends on the foldlevel.  The
+		"45" is the number of lines in the fold.  "abcdef" is the text
+		in the first non-blank line of the fold.  Leading white space,
+		"//" or "/*" and the text from the 'foldmarker' and
+		'commentstring' options is removed.
+		When used to draw the actual foldtext, the rest of the line
+		will be filled with the fold char from the 'fillchars'
+		setting.
+		{not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature}
+
+foldtextresult({lnum})					*foldtextresult()*
+		Returns the text that is displayed for the closed fold at line
+		{lnum}.  Evaluates 'foldtext' in the appropriate context.
+		When there is no closed fold at {lnum} an empty string is
+		returned.
+		{lnum} is used like with |getline()|.  Thus "." is the current
+		line, "'m" mark m, etc.
+		Useful when exporting folded text, e.g., to HTML.
+		{not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature}
+
+							*foreground()*
+foreground()	Move the Vim window to the foreground.  Useful when sent from
+		a client to a Vim server. |remote_send()|
+		On Win32 systems this might not work, the OS does not always
+		allow a window to bring itself to the foreground.  Use
+		|remote_foreground()| instead.
+		{only in the Win32, Athena, Motif and GTK GUI versions and the
+		Win32 console version}
+
+						*funcref()*
+funcref({name} [, {arglist}] [, {dict}])
+		Just like |function()|, but the returned Funcref will lookup
+		the function by reference, not by name.  This matters when the
+		function {name} is redefined later.
+
+		Unlike |function()|, {name} must be an existing user function.
+		Also for autoloaded functions. {name} cannot be a builtin
+		function.
+
+					*function()* *E700* *E922* *E923*
+function({name} [, {arglist}] [, {dict}])
+		Return a |Funcref| variable that refers to function {name}.
+		{name} can be the name of a user defined function or an
+		internal function.
+
+		{name} can also be a Funcref or a partial.  When it is a
+		partial the dict stored in it will be used and the {dict}
+		argument is not allowed. E.g.: >
+			let FuncWithArg = function(dict.Func, [arg])
+			let Broken = function(dict.Func, [arg], dict)
+<
+		When using the Funcref the function will be found by {name},
+		also when it was redefined later.  Use |funcref()| to keep the
+		same function.
+
+		When {arglist} or {dict} is present this creates a partial.
+		That means the argument list and/or the dictionary is stored in
+		the Funcref and will be used when the Funcref is called.
+
+		The arguments are passed to the function in front of other
+		arguments.  Example: >
+			func Callback(arg1, arg2, name)
+			...
+			let Func = function('Callback', ['one', 'two'])
+			...
+			call Func('name')
+<		Invokes the function as with: >
+			call Callback('one', 'two', 'name')
+
+<		The function() call can be nested to add more arguments to the
+		Funcref.  The extra arguments are appended to the list of
+		arguments.  Example: >
+			func Callback(arg1, arg2, name)
+			...
+			let Func = function('Callback', ['one'])
+			let Func2 = function(Func, ['two'])
+			...
+			call Func2('name')
+<		Invokes the function as with: >
+			call Callback('one', 'two', 'name')
+
+<		The Dictionary is only useful when calling a "dict" function.
+		In that case the {dict} is passed in as "self". Example: >
+			function Callback() dict
+			   echo "called for " . self.name
+			endfunction
+			...
+			let context = {"name": "example"}
+			let Func = function('Callback', context)
+			...
+			call Func()	" will echo: called for example
+<		The use of function() is not needed when there are no extra
+		arguments, these two are equivalent: >
+			let Func = function('Callback', context)
+			let Func = context.Callback
+
+<		The argument list and the Dictionary can be combined: >
+			function Callback(arg1, count) dict
+			...
+			let context = {"name": "example"}
+			let Func = function('Callback', ['one'], context)
+			...
+			call Func(500)
+<		Invokes the function as with: >
+			call context.Callback('one', 500)
+
+
+garbagecollect([{atexit}])				*garbagecollect()*
+		Cleanup unused |Lists|, |Dictionaries|, |Channels| and |Jobs|
+		that have circular references.
+
+		There is hardly ever a need to invoke this function, as it is
+		automatically done when Vim runs out of memory or is waiting
+		for the user to press a key after 'updatetime'.  Items without
+		circular references are always freed when they become unused.
+		This is useful if you have deleted a very big |List| and/or
+		|Dictionary| with circular references in a script that runs
+		for a long time.
+
+		When the optional {atexit} argument is one, garbage
+		collection will also be done when exiting Vim, if it wasn't
+		done before.  This is useful when checking for memory leaks.
+
+		The garbage collection is not done immediately but only when
+		it's safe to perform.  This is when waiting for the user to
+		type a character.  To force garbage collection immediately use
+		|test_garbagecollect_now()|.
+
+get({list}, {idx} [, {default}])			*get()*
+		Get item {idx} from |List| {list}.  When this item is not
+		available return {default}.  Return zero when {default} is
+		omitted.
+get({blob}, {idx} [, {default}])
+		Get byte {idx} from |Blob| {blob}.  When this byte is not
+		available return {default}.  Return -1 when {default} is
+		omitted.
+get({dict}, {key} [, {default}])
+		Get item with key {key} from |Dictionary| {dict}.  When this
+		item is not available return {default}.  Return zero when
+		{default} is omitted.
+get({func}, {what})
+		Get an item with from Funcref {func}.  Possible values for
+		{what} are:
+			"name"	The function name
+			"func"	The function
+			"dict"	The dictionary
+			"args"	The list with arguments
+
+							*getbufinfo()*
+getbufinfo([{expr}])
+getbufinfo([{dict}])
+		Get information about buffers as a List of Dictionaries.
+
+		Without an argument information about all the buffers is
+		returned.
+
+		When the argument is a Dictionary only the buffers matching
+		the specified criteria are returned.  The following keys can
+		be specified in {dict}:
+			buflisted	include only listed buffers.
+			bufloaded	include only loaded buffers.
+			bufmodified	include only modified buffers.
+
+		Otherwise, {expr} specifies a particular buffer to return
+		information for.  For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()|
+		above.  If the buffer is found the returned List has one item.
+		Otherwise the result is an empty list.
+
+		Each returned List item is a dictionary with the following
+		entries:
+			bufnr		buffer number.
+			changed		TRUE if the buffer is modified.
+			changedtick	number of changes made to the buffer.
+			hidden		TRUE if the buffer is hidden.
+			listed		TRUE if the buffer is listed.
+			lnum		current line number in buffer.
+			loaded		TRUE if the buffer is loaded.
+			name		full path to the file in the buffer.
+			signs		list of signs placed in the buffer.
+					Each list item is a dictionary with
+					the following fields:
+					    id	  sign identifier
+					    lnum  line number
+					    name  sign name
+			variables	a reference to the dictionary with
+					buffer-local variables.
+			windows		list of |window-ID|s that display this
+					buffer
+
+		Examples: >
+			for buf in getbufinfo()
+			    echo buf.name
+			endfor
+			for buf in getbufinfo({'buflisted':1})
+			    if buf.changed
+				....
+			    endif
+			endfor
+<
+		To get buffer-local options use: >
+			getbufvar({bufnr}, '&option_name')
+
+<
+							*getbufline()*
+getbufline({expr}, {lnum} [, {end}])
+		Return a |List| with the lines starting from {lnum} to {end}
+		(inclusive) in the buffer {expr}.  If {end} is omitted, a
+		|List| with only the line {lnum} is returned.
+
+		For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()| above.
+
+		For {lnum} and {end} "$" can be used for the last line of the
+		buffer.  Otherwise a number must be used.
+
+		When {lnum} is smaller than 1 or bigger than the number of
+		lines in the buffer, an empty |List| is returned.
+
+		When {end} is greater than the number of lines in the buffer,
+		it is treated as {end} is set to the number of lines in the
+		buffer.  When {end} is before {lnum} an empty |List| is
+		returned.
+
+		This function works only for loaded buffers.  For unloaded and
+		non-existing buffers, an empty |List| is returned.
+
+		Example: >
+			:let lines = getbufline(bufnr("myfile"), 1, "$")
+
+getbufvar({expr}, {varname} [, {def}])				*getbufvar()*
+		The result is the value of option or local buffer variable
+		{varname} in buffer {expr}.  Note that the name without "b:"
+		must be used.
+		When {varname} is empty returns a dictionary with all the
+		buffer-local variables.
+		When {varname} is equal to "&" returns a dictionary with all
+		the buffer-local options.
+		Otherwise, when {varname} starts with "&" returns the value of
+		a buffer-local option.
+		This also works for a global or buffer-local option, but it
+		doesn't work for a global variable, window-local variable or
+		window-local option.
+		For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()| above.
+		When the buffer or variable doesn't exist {def} or an empty
+		string is returned, there is no error message.
+		Examples: >
+			:let bufmodified = getbufvar(1, "&mod")
+			:echo "todo myvar = " . getbufvar("todo", "myvar")
+<
+getchangelist({expr})					*getchangelist()*
+		Returns the |changelist| for the buffer {expr}. For the use
+		of {expr}, see |bufname()| above. If buffer {expr} doesn't
+		exist, an empty list is returned.
+
+		The returned list contains two entries: a list with the change
+		locations and the current position in the list.  Each
+		entry in the change list is a dictionary with the following
+		entries:
+			col		column number
+			coladd		column offset for 'virtualedit'
+			lnum		line number
+		If buffer {expr} is the current buffer, then the current
+		position refers to the position in the list. For other
+		buffers, it is set to the length of the list.
+
+getchar([expr])						*getchar()*
+		Get a single character from the user or input stream.
+		If [expr] is omitted, wait until a character is available.
+		If [expr] is 0, only get a character when one is available.
+			Return zero otherwise.
+		If [expr] is 1, only check if a character is available, it is
+			not consumed.  Return zero if no character available.
+
+		Without [expr] and when [expr] is 0 a whole character or
+		special key is returned.  If it is a single character, the
+		result is a number.  Use nr2char() to convert it to a String.
+		Otherwise a String is returned with the encoded character.
+		For a special key it's a String with a sequence of bytes
+		starting with 0x80 (decimal: 128).  This is the same value as
+		the String "\<Key>", e.g., "\<Left>".  The returned value is
+		also a String when a modifier (shift, control, alt) was used
+		that is not included in the character.
+
+		When [expr] is 0 and Esc is typed, there will be a short delay
+		while Vim waits to see if this is the start of an escape
+		sequence.
+
+		When [expr] is 1 only the first byte is returned.  For a
+		one-byte character it is the character itself as a number.
+		Use nr2char() to convert it to a String.
+
+		Use getcharmod() to obtain any additional modifiers.
+
+		When the user clicks a mouse button, the mouse event will be
+		returned.  The position can then be found in |v:mouse_col|,
+		|v:mouse_lnum|, |v:mouse_winid| and |v:mouse_win|.  This
+		example positions the mouse as it would normally happen: >
+			let c = getchar()
+			if c == "\<LeftMouse>" && v:mouse_win > 0
+			  exe v:mouse_win . "wincmd w"
+			  exe v:mouse_lnum
+			  exe "normal " . v:mouse_col . "|"
+			endif
+<
+		When using bracketed paste only the first character is
+		returned, the rest of the pasted text is dropped.
+		|xterm-bracketed-paste|.
+
+		There is no prompt, you will somehow have to make clear to the
+		user that a character has to be typed.
+		There is no mapping for the character.
+		Key codes are replaced, thus when the user presses the <Del>
+		key you get the code for the <Del> key, not the raw character
+		sequence.  Examples: >
+			getchar() == "\<Del>"
+			getchar() == "\<S-Left>"
+<		This example redefines "f" to ignore case: >
+			:nmap f :call FindChar()<CR>
+			:function FindChar()
+			:  let c = nr2char(getchar())
+			:  while col('.') < col('$') - 1
+			:    normal l
+			:    if getline('.')[col('.') - 1] ==? c
+			:      break
+			:    endif
+			:  endwhile
+			:endfunction
+<
+		You may also receive synthetic characters, such as
+		|<CursorHold>|. Often you will want to ignore this and get
+		another character: >
+			:function GetKey()
+			:  let c = getchar()
+			:  while c == "\<CursorHold>"
+			:    let c = getchar()
+			:  endwhile
+			:  return c
+			:endfunction
+
+getcharmod()						*getcharmod()*
+		The result is a Number which is the state of the modifiers for
+		the last obtained character with getchar() or in another way.
+		These values are added together:
+			2	shift
+			4	control
+			8	alt (meta)
+			16	meta (when it's different from ALT)
+			32	mouse double click
+			64	mouse triple click
+			96	mouse quadruple click (== 32 + 64)
+			128	command (Macintosh only)
+		Only the modifiers that have not been included in the
+		character itself are obtained.  Thus Shift-a results in "A"
+		without a modifier.
+
+getcharsearch()						*getcharsearch()*
+		Return the current character search information as a {dict}
+		with the following entries:
+
+		    char	character previously used for a character
+				search (|t|, |f|, |T|, or |F|); empty string
+				if no character search has been performed
+		    forward	direction of character search; 1 for forward,
+				0 for backward
+		    until	type of character search; 1 for a |t| or |T|
+				character search, 0 for an |f| or |F|
+				character search
+
+		This can be useful to always have |;| and |,| search
+		forward/backward regardless of the direction of the previous
+		character search: >
+			:nnoremap <expr> ; getcharsearch().forward ? ';' : ','
+			:nnoremap <expr> , getcharsearch().forward ? ',' : ';'
+<		Also see |setcharsearch()|.
+
+getcmdline()						*getcmdline()*
+		Return the current command-line.  Only works when the command
+		line is being edited, thus requires use of |c_CTRL-\_e| or
+		|c_CTRL-R_=|.
+		Example: >
+			:cmap <F7> <C-\>eescape(getcmdline(), ' \')<CR>
+<		Also see |getcmdtype()|, |getcmdpos()| and |setcmdpos()|.
+		Returns an empty string when entering a password or using
+		|inputsecret()|.
+
+getcmdpos()						*getcmdpos()*
+		Return the position of the cursor in the command line as a
+		byte count.  The first column is 1.
+		Only works when editing the command line, thus requires use of
+		|c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=| or an expression mapping.
+		Returns 0 otherwise.
+		Also see |getcmdtype()|, |setcmdpos()| and |getcmdline()|.
+
+getcmdtype()						*getcmdtype()*
+		Return the current command-line type. Possible return values
+		are:
+		    :	normal Ex command
+		    >	debug mode command |debug-mode|
+		    /	forward search command
+		    ?	backward search command
+		    @	|input()| command
+		    -	|:insert| or |:append| command
+		    =	|i_CTRL-R_=|
+		Only works when editing the command line, thus requires use of
+		|c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=| or an expression mapping.
+		Returns an empty string otherwise.
+		Also see |getcmdpos()|, |setcmdpos()| and |getcmdline()|.
+
+getcmdwintype()						*getcmdwintype()*
+		Return the current |command-line-window| type. Possible return
+		values are the same as |getcmdtype()|. Returns an empty string
+		when not in the command-line window.
+
+getcompletion({pat}, {type} [, {filtered}])		*getcompletion()*
+		Return a list of command-line completion matches. {type}
+		specifies what for.  The following completion types are
+		supported:
+
+		arglist		file names in argument list
+		augroup		autocmd groups
+		buffer		buffer names
+		behave		:behave suboptions
+		color		color schemes
+		command		Ex command (and arguments)
+		compiler	compilers
+		cscope		|:cscope| suboptions
+		dir		directory names
+		environment	environment variable names
+		event		autocommand events
+		expression	Vim expression
+		file		file and directory names
+		file_in_path	file and directory names in |'path'|
+		filetype	filetype names |'filetype'|
+		function	function name
+		help		help subjects
+		highlight	highlight groups
+		history		:history suboptions
+		locale		locale names (as output of locale -a)
+		mapclear        buffer argument
+		mapping		mapping name
+		menu		menus
+		messages	|:messages| suboptions
+		option		options
+		packadd		optional package |pack-add| names
+		shellcmd	Shell command
+		sign		|:sign| suboptions
+		syntax		syntax file names |'syntax'|
+		syntime		|:syntime| suboptions
+		tag		tags
+		tag_listfiles	tags, file names
+		user		user names
+		var		user variables
+
+		If {pat} is an empty string, then all the matches are returned.
+		Otherwise only items matching {pat} are returned. See
+		|wildcards| for the use of special characters in {pat}.
+
+		If the optional {filtered} flag is set to 1, then 'wildignore'
+		is applied to filter the results.  Otherwise all the matches
+		are returned. The 'wildignorecase' option always applies.
+
+		If there are no matches, an empty list is returned.  An
+		invalid value for {type} produces an error.
+
+							*getcurpos()*
+getcurpos()	Get the position of the cursor.  This is like getpos('.'), but
+		includes an extra item in the list:
+		    [bufnum, lnum, col, off, curswant] ~
+		The "curswant" number is the preferred column when moving the
+		cursor vertically.  Also see |getpos()|.
+
+		This can be used to save and restore the cursor position: >
+			let save_cursor = getcurpos()
+			MoveTheCursorAround
+			call setpos('.', save_cursor)
+<		Note that this only works within the window.  See
+		|winrestview()| for restoring more state.
+							*getcwd()*
+getcwd([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]])
+		The result is a String, which is the name of the current
+		working directory.
+
+		With {winnr} return the local current directory of this window
+		in the current tab page.  {winnr} can be the window number or
+		the |window-ID|.
+		If {winnr} is -1 return the name of the global working
+		directory.  See also |haslocaldir()|.
+
+		With {winnr} and {tabnr} return the local current directory of
+		the window in the specified tab page.
+		Return an empty string if the arguments are invalid.
+
+getfsize({fname})					*getfsize()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the size in bytes of the
+		given file {fname}.
+		If {fname} is a directory, 0 is returned.
+		If the file {fname} can't be found, -1 is returned.
+		If the size of {fname} is too big to fit in a Number then -2
+		is returned.
+
+getfontname([{name}])					*getfontname()*
+		Without an argument returns the name of the normal font being
+		used.  Like what is used for the Normal highlight group
+		|hl-Normal|.
+		With an argument a check is done whether {name} is a valid
+		font name.  If not then an empty string is returned.
+		Otherwise the actual font name is returned, or {name} if the
+		GUI does not support obtaining the real name.
+		Only works when the GUI is running, thus not in your vimrc or
+		gvimrc file.  Use the |GUIEnter| autocommand to use this
+		function just after the GUI has started.
+		Note that the GTK GUI accepts any font name, thus checking for
+		a valid name does not work.
+
+getfperm({fname})					*getfperm()*
+		The result is a String, which is the read, write, and execute
+		permissions of the given file {fname}.
+		If {fname} does not exist or its directory cannot be read, an
+		empty string is returned.
+		The result is of the form "rwxrwxrwx", where each group of
+		"rwx" flags represent, in turn, the permissions of the owner
+		of the file, the group the file belongs to, and other users.
+		If a user does not have a given permission the flag for this
+		is replaced with the string "-".  Examples: >
+			:echo getfperm("/etc/passwd")
+			:echo getfperm(expand("~/.vimrc"))
+<		This will hopefully (from a security point of view) display
+		the string "rw-r--r--" or even "rw-------".
+
+		For setting permissions use |setfperm()|.
+
+getftime({fname})					*getftime()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the last modification time of
+		the given file {fname}.  The value is measured as seconds
+		since 1st Jan 1970, and may be passed to strftime().  See also
+		|localtime()| and |strftime()|.
+		If the file {fname} can't be found -1 is returned.
+
+getftype({fname})					*getftype()*
+		The result is a String, which is a description of the kind of
+		file of the given file {fname}.
+		If {fname} does not exist an empty string is returned.
+		Here is a table over different kinds of files and their
+		results:
+			Normal file		"file"
+			Directory		"dir"
+			Symbolic link		"link"
+			Block device		"bdev"
+			Character device	"cdev"
+			Socket			"socket"
+			FIFO			"fifo"
+			All other		"other"
+		Example: >
+			getftype("/home")
+<		Note that a type such as "link" will only be returned on
+		systems that support it.  On some systems only "dir" and
+		"file" are returned.  On MS-Windows a symbolic link to a
+		directory returns "dir" instead of "link".
+
+getjumplist([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]])			*getjumplist()*
+		Returns the |jumplist| for the specified window.
+
+		Without arguments use the current window.
+		With {winnr} only use this window in the current tab page.
+		{winnr} can also be a |window-ID|.
+		With {winnr} and {tabnr} use the window in the specified tab
+		page.
+
+		The returned list contains two entries: a list with the jump
+		locations and the last used jump position number in the list.
+		Each entry in the jump location list is a dictionary with
+		the following entries:
+			bufnr		buffer number
+			col		column number
+			coladd		column offset for 'virtualedit'
+			filename	filename if available
+			lnum		line number
+
+							*getline()*
+getline({lnum} [, {end}])
+		Without {end} the result is a String, which is line {lnum}
+		from the current buffer.  Example: >
+			getline(1)
+<		When {lnum} is a String that doesn't start with a
+		digit, |line()| is called to translate the String into a Number.
+		To get the line under the cursor: >
+			getline(".")
+<		When {lnum} is smaller than 1 or bigger than the number of
+		lines in the buffer, an empty string is returned.
+
+		When {end} is given the result is a |List| where each item is
+		a line from the current buffer in the range {lnum} to {end},
+		including line {end}.
+		{end} is used in the same way as {lnum}.
+		Non-existing lines are silently omitted.
+		When {end} is before {lnum} an empty |List| is returned.
+		Example: >
+			:let start = line('.')
+			:let end = search("^$") - 1
+			:let lines = getline(start, end)
+
+<		To get lines from another buffer see |getbufline()|
+
+getloclist({nr} [, {what}])				*getloclist()*
+		Returns a list with all the entries in the location list for
+		window {nr}.  {nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
+		When {nr} is zero the current window is used.
+
+		For a location list window, the displayed location list is
+		returned.  For an invalid window number {nr}, an empty list is
+		returned. Otherwise, same as |getqflist()|.
+
+		If the optional {what} dictionary argument is supplied, then
+		returns the items listed in {what} as a dictionary. Refer to
+		|getqflist()| for the supported items in {what}.
+		If {what} contains 'filewinid', then returns the id of the
+		window used to display files from the location list. This
+		field is applicable only when called from a location list
+		window. See |location-list-file-window| for more details.
+
+getmatches()						*getmatches()*
+		Returns a |List| with all matches previously defined by
+		|matchadd()| and the |:match| commands.  |getmatches()| is
+		useful in combination with |setmatches()|, as |setmatches()|
+		can restore a list of matches saved by |getmatches()|.
+		Example: >
+			:echo getmatches()
+<			[{'group': 'MyGroup1', 'pattern': 'TODO',
+			'priority': 10, 'id': 1}, {'group': 'MyGroup2',
+			'pattern': 'FIXME', 'priority': 10, 'id': 2}] >
+			:let m = getmatches()
+			:call clearmatches()
+			:echo getmatches()
+<			[] >
+			:call setmatches(m)
+			:echo getmatches()
+<			[{'group': 'MyGroup1', 'pattern': 'TODO',
+			'priority': 10, 'id': 1}, {'group': 'MyGroup2',
+			'pattern': 'FIXME', 'priority': 10, 'id': 2}] >
+			:unlet m
+<
+							*getpid()*
+getpid()	Return a Number which is the process ID of the Vim process.
+		On Unix and MS-Windows this is a unique number, until Vim
+		exits.  On MS-DOS it's always zero.
+
+							*getpos()*
+getpos({expr})	Get the position for {expr}.  For possible values of {expr}
+		see |line()|.  For getting the cursor position see
+		|getcurpos()|.
+		The result is a |List| with four numbers:
+		    [bufnum, lnum, col, off]
+		"bufnum" is zero, unless a mark like '0 or 'A is used, then it
+		is the buffer number of the mark.
+		"lnum" and "col" are the position in the buffer.  The first
+		column is 1.
+		The "off" number is zero, unless 'virtualedit' is used.  Then
+		it is the offset in screen columns from the start of the
+		character.  E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last
+		character.
+		Note that for '< and '> Visual mode matters: when it is "V"
+		(visual line mode) the column of '< is zero and the column of
+		'> is a large number.
+		This can be used to save and restore the position of a mark: >
+			let save_a_mark = getpos("'a")
+			...
+			call setpos("'a", save_a_mark)
+<		Also see |getcurpos()| and |setpos()|.
+
+
+getqflist([{what}])					*getqflist()*
+		Returns a list with all the current quickfix errors.  Each
+		list item is a dictionary with these entries:
+			bufnr	number of buffer that has the file name, use
+				bufname() to get the name
+			module	module name
+			lnum	line number in the buffer (first line is 1)
+			col	column number (first column is 1)
+			vcol	|TRUE|: "col" is visual column
+				|FALSE|: "col" is byte index
+			nr	error number
+			pattern	search pattern used to locate the error
+			text	description of the error
+			type	type of the error, 'E', '1', etc.
+			valid	|TRUE|: recognized error message
+
+		When there is no error list or it's empty, an empty list is
+		returned. Quickfix list entries with non-existing buffer
+		number are returned with "bufnr" set to zero.
+
+		Useful application: Find pattern matches in multiple files and
+		do something with them: >
+			:vimgrep /theword/jg *.c
+			:for d in getqflist()
+			:   echo bufname(d.bufnr) ':' d.lnum '=' d.text
+			:endfor
+<
+		If the optional {what} dictionary argument is supplied, then
+		returns only the items listed in {what} as a dictionary. The
+		following string items are supported in {what}:
+			changedtick	get the total number of changes made
+					to the list |quickfix-changedtick|
+			context	get the |quickfix-context|
+			efm	errorformat to use when parsing "lines". If
+				not present, then the 'errorformat' option
+				value is used.
+			id	get information for the quickfix list with
+				|quickfix-ID|; zero means the id for the
+				current list or the list specified by "nr"
+			idx	index of the current entry in the quickfix
+				list specified by 'id' or 'nr'.
+				See |quickfix-index|
+			items	quickfix list entries
+			lines	parse a list of lines using 'efm' and return
+				the resulting entries.  Only a |List| type is
+				accepted.  The current quickfix list is not
+				modified. See |quickfix-parse|.
+			nr	get information for this quickfix list; zero
+				means the current quickfix list and "$" means
+				the last quickfix list
+			size	number of entries in the quickfix list
+			title	get the list title |quickfix-title|
+			winid	get the quickfix |window-ID|
+			all	all of the above quickfix properties
+		Non-string items in {what} are ignored. To get the value of a
+		particular item, set it to zero.
+		If "nr" is not present then the current quickfix list is used.
+		If both "nr" and a non-zero "id" are specified, then the list
+		specified by "id" is used.
+		To get the number of lists in the quickfix stack, set "nr" to
+		"$" in {what}. The "nr" value in the returned dictionary
+		contains the quickfix stack size.
+		When "lines" is specified, all the other items except "efm"
+		are ignored.  The returned dictionary contains the entry
+		"items" with the list of entries.
+
+		The returned dictionary contains the following entries:
+			changedtick	total number of changes made to the
+					list |quickfix-changedtick|
+			context	quickfix list context. See |quickfix-context|
+				If not present, set to "".
+			id	quickfix list ID |quickfix-ID|. If not
+				present, set to 0.
+			idx	index of the current entry in the list. If not
+				present, set to 0.
+			items	quickfix list entries. If not present, set to
+				an empty list.
+			nr	quickfix list number. If not present, set to 0
+			size	number of entries in the quickfix list. If not
+				present, set to 0.
+			title	quickfix list title text. If not present, set
+				to "".
+			winid	quickfix |window-ID|. If not present, set to 0
+
+		Examples (See also |getqflist-examples|): >
+			:echo getqflist({'all': 1})
+			:echo getqflist({'nr': 2, 'title': 1})
+			:echo getqflist({'lines' : ["F1:10:L10"]})
+<
+getreg([{regname} [, 1 [, {list}]]])			*getreg()*
+		The result is a String, which is the contents of register
+		{regname}.  Example: >
+			:let cliptext = getreg('*')
+<		When {regname} was not set the result is an empty string.
+
+		getreg('=') returns the last evaluated value of the expression
+		register.  (For use in maps.)
+		getreg('=', 1) returns the expression itself, so that it can
+		be restored with |setreg()|.  For other registers the extra
+		argument is ignored, thus you can always give it.
+
+		If {list} is present and |TRUE|, the result type is changed
+		to |List|. Each list item is one text line. Use it if you care
+		about zero bytes possibly present inside register: without
+		third argument both NLs and zero bytes are represented as NLs
+		(see |NL-used-for-Nul|).
+		When the register was not set an empty list is returned.
+
+		If {regname} is not specified, |v:register| is used.
+
+
+getregtype([{regname}])					*getregtype()*
+		The result is a String, which is type of register {regname}.
+		The value will be one of:
+		    "v"			for |characterwise| text
+		    "V"			for |linewise| text
+		    "<CTRL-V>{width}"	for |blockwise-visual| text
+		    ""			for an empty or unknown register
+		<CTRL-V> is one character with value 0x16.
+		If {regname} is not specified, |v:register| is used.
+
+gettabinfo([{arg}])					*gettabinfo()*
+		If {arg} is not specified, then information about all the tab
+		pages is returned as a List. Each List item is a Dictionary.
+		Otherwise, {arg} specifies the tab page number and information
+		about that one is returned.  If the tab page does not exist an
+		empty List is returned.
+
+		Each List item is a Dictionary with the following entries:
+			tabnr		tab page number.
+			variables	a reference to the dictionary with
+					tabpage-local variables
+			windows		List of |window-ID|s in the tag page.
+
+gettabvar({tabnr}, {varname} [, {def}])				*gettabvar()*
+		Get the value of a tab-local variable {varname} in tab page
+		{tabnr}. |t:var|
+		Tabs are numbered starting with one.
+		When {varname} is empty a dictionary with all tab-local
+		variables is returned.
+		Note that the name without "t:" must be used.
+		When the tab or variable doesn't exist {def} or an empty
+		string is returned, there is no error message.
+
+gettabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname} [, {def}])		*gettabwinvar()*
+		Get the value of window-local variable {varname} in window
+		{winnr} in tab page {tabnr}.
+		When {varname} is empty a dictionary with all window-local
+		variables is returned.
+		When {varname} is equal to "&" get the values of all
+		window-local options in a Dictionary.
+		Otherwise, when {varname} starts with "&" get the value of a
+		window-local option.
+		Note that {varname} must be the name without "w:".
+		Tabs are numbered starting with one.  For the current tabpage
+		use |getwinvar()|.
+		{winnr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
+		When {winnr} is zero the current window is used.
+		This also works for a global option, buffer-local option and
+		window-local option, but it doesn't work for a global variable
+		or buffer-local variable.
+		When the tab, window or variable doesn't exist {def} or an
+		empty string is returned, there is no error message.
+		Examples: >
+			:let list_is_on = gettabwinvar(1, 2, '&list')
+			:echo "myvar = " . gettabwinvar(3, 1, 'myvar')
+<
+		To obtain all window-local variables use: >
+			gettabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, '&')
+
+gettagstack([{nr}])					*gettagstack()*
+		The result is a Dict, which is the tag stack of window {nr}.
+		{nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
+		When {nr} is not specified, the current window is used.
+		When window {nr} doesn't exist, an empty Dict is returned.
+
+		The returned dictionary contains the following entries:
+			curidx		Current index in the stack. When at
+					top of the stack, set to (length + 1).
+					Index of bottom of the stack is 1.
+			items		List of items in the stack. Each item
+					is a dictionary containing the
+					entries described below.
+			length		Number of entries in the stack.
+
+		Each item in the stack is a dictionary with the following
+		entries:
+			bufnr		buffer number of the current jump
+			from		cursor position before the tag jump.
+					See |getpos()| for the format of the
+					returned list.
+			matchnr		current matching tag number. Used when
+					multiple matching tags are found for a
+					name.
+			tagname		name of the tag
+
+		See |tagstack| for more information about the tag stack.
+
+getwininfo([{winid}])					*getwininfo()*
+		Returns information about windows as a List with Dictionaries.
+
+		If {winid} is given Information about the window with that ID
+		is returned.  If the window does not exist the result is an
+		empty list.
+
+		Without {winid} information about all the windows in all the
+		tab pages is returned.
+
+		Each List item is a Dictionary with the following entries:
+			bufnr		number of buffer in the window
+			height		window height (excluding winbar)
+			loclist		1 if showing a location list
+					{only with the +quickfix feature}
+			quickfix	1 if quickfix or location list window
+					{only with the +quickfix feature}
+			terminal	1 if a terminal window
+					{only with the +terminal feature}
+			tabnr		tab page number
+			variables	a reference to the dictionary with
+					window-local variables
+			width		window width
+			winbar		1 if the window has a toolbar, 0
+					otherwise
+			wincol		leftmost screen column of the window,
+					col from |win_screenpos()|
+			winid		|window-ID|
+			winnr		window number
+			winrow		topmost screen column of the window,
+					row from |win_screenpos()|
+
+getwinpos([{timeout}])					*getwinpos()*
+		The result is a list with two numbers, the result of
+		getwinposx() and getwinposy() combined:
+			[x-pos, y-pos]
+		{timeout} can be used to specify how long to wait in msec for
+		a response from the terminal.  When omitted 100 msec is used.
+		Use a longer time for a remote terminal.
+		When using a value less than 10 and no response is received
+		within that time, a previously reported position is returned,
+		if available.  This can be used to poll for the position and
+		do some work in the meantime: >
+			while 1
+			  let res = getwinpos(1)
+			  if res[0] >= 0
+			    break
+			  endif
+			  " Do some work here
+			endwhile
+<
+							*getwinposx()*
+getwinposx()	The result is a Number, which is the X coordinate in pixels of
+		the left hand side of the GUI Vim window. Also works for an
+		xterm (uses a timeout of 100 msec).
+		The result will be -1 if the information is not available.
+		The value can be used with `:winpos`.
+
+							*getwinposy()*
+getwinposy()	The result is a Number, which is the Y coordinate in pixels of
+		the top of the GUI Vim window.  Also works for an xterm (uses
+		a timeout of 100 msec).
+		The result will be -1 if the information is not available.
+		The value can be used with `:winpos`.
+
+getwinvar({winnr}, {varname} [, {def}])				*getwinvar()*
+		Like |gettabwinvar()| for the current tabpage.
+		Examples: >
+			:let list_is_on = getwinvar(2, '&list')
+			:echo "myvar = " . getwinvar(1, 'myvar')
+<
+glob({expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list} [, {alllinks}]]])		*glob()*
+		Expand the file wildcards in {expr}.  See |wildcards| for the
+		use of special characters.
+
+		Unless the optional {nosuf} argument is given and is |TRUE|,
+		the 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' options apply: Names matching
+		one of the patterns in 'wildignore' will be skipped and
+		'suffixes' affect the ordering of matches.
+		'wildignorecase' always applies.
+
+		When {list} is present and it is |TRUE| the result is a List
+		with all matching files. The advantage of using a List is,
+		you also get filenames containing newlines correctly.
+		Otherwise the result is a String and when there are several
+		matches, they are separated by <NL> characters.
+
+		If the expansion fails, the result is an empty String or List.
+
+		A name for a non-existing file is not included.  A symbolic
+		link is only included if it points to an existing file.
+		However, when the {alllinks} argument is present and it is
+		|TRUE| then all symbolic links are included.
+
+		For most systems backticks can be used to get files names from
+		any external command.  Example: >
+			:let tagfiles = glob("`find . -name tags -print`")
+			:let &tags = substitute(tagfiles, "\n", ",", "g")
+<		The result of the program inside the backticks should be one
+		item per line.  Spaces inside an item are allowed.
+
+		See |expand()| for expanding special Vim variables.  See
+		|system()| for getting the raw output of an external command.
+
+glob2regpat({expr})					 *glob2regpat()*
+		Convert a file pattern, as used by glob(), into a search
+		pattern.  The result can be used to match with a string that
+		is a file name.  E.g. >
+			if filename =~ glob2regpat('Make*.mak')
+<		This is equivalent to: >
+			if filename =~ '^Make.*\.mak$'
+<		When {expr} is an empty string the result is "^$", match an
+		empty string.
+		Note that the result depends on the system.  On MS-Windows
+		a backslash usually means a path separator.
+
+								*globpath()*
+globpath({path}, {expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list} [, {alllinks}]]])
+		Perform glob() on all directories in {path} and concatenate
+		the results.  Example: >
+			:echo globpath(&rtp, "syntax/c.vim")
+<
+		{path} is a comma-separated list of directory names.  Each
+		directory name is prepended to {expr} and expanded like with
+		|glob()|.  A path separator is inserted when needed.
+		To add a comma inside a directory name escape it with a
+		backslash.  Note that on MS-Windows a directory may have a
+		trailing backslash, remove it if you put a comma after it.
+		If the expansion fails for one of the directories, there is no
+		error message.
+
+		Unless the optional {nosuf} argument is given and is |TRUE|,
+		the 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' options apply: Names matching
+		one of the patterns in 'wildignore' will be skipped and
+		'suffixes' affect the ordering of matches.
+
+		When {list} is present and it is |TRUE| the result is a List
+		with all matching files. The advantage of using a List is, you
+		also get filenames containing newlines correctly. Otherwise
+		the result is a String and when there are several matches,
+		they are separated by <NL> characters.  Example: >
+			:echo globpath(&rtp, "syntax/c.vim", 0, 1)
+<
+		{alllinks} is used as with |glob()|.
+
+		The "**" item can be used to search in a directory tree.
+		For example, to find all "README.txt" files in the directories
+		in 'runtimepath' and below: >
+			:echo globpath(&rtp, "**/README.txt")
+<		Upwards search and limiting the depth of "**" is not
+		supported, thus using 'path' will not always work properly.
+
+							*has()*
+has({feature})	The result is a Number, which is 1 if the feature {feature} is
+		supported, zero otherwise.  The {feature} argument is a
+		string.  See |feature-list| below.
+		Also see |exists()|.
+
+
+has_key({dict}, {key})					*has_key()*
+		The result is a Number, which is 1 if |Dictionary| {dict} has
+		an entry with key {key}.  Zero otherwise.
+
+haslocaldir([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]])			*haslocaldir()*
+		The result is a Number, which is 1 when the window has set a
+		local path via |:lcd|, and 0 otherwise.
+
+		Without arguments use the current window.
+		With {winnr} use this window in the current tab page.
+		With {winnr} and {tabnr} use the window in the specified tab
+		page.
+		{winnr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
+		Return 0 if the arguments are invalid.
+
+hasmapto({what} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]])			*hasmapto()*
+		The result is a Number, which is 1 if there is a mapping that
+		contains {what} in somewhere in the rhs (what it is mapped to)
+		and this mapping exists in one of the modes indicated by
+		{mode}.
+		When {abbr} is there and it is |TRUE| use abbreviations
+		instead of mappings.  Don't forget to specify Insert and/or
+		Command-line mode.
+		Both the global mappings and the mappings local to the current
+		buffer are checked for a match.
+		If no matching mapping is found 0 is returned.
+		The following characters are recognized in {mode}:
+			n	Normal mode
+			v	Visual mode
+			o	Operator-pending mode
+			i	Insert mode
+			l	Language-Argument ("r", "f", "t", etc.)
+			c	Command-line mode
+		When {mode} is omitted, "nvo" is used.
+
+		This function is useful to check if a mapping already exists
+		to a function in a Vim script.  Example: >
+			:if !hasmapto('\ABCdoit')
+			:   map <Leader>d \ABCdoit
+			:endif
+<		This installs the mapping to "\ABCdoit" only if there isn't
+		already a mapping to "\ABCdoit".
+
+histadd({history}, {item})				*histadd()*
+		Add the String {item} to the history {history} which can be
+		one of:					*hist-names*
+			"cmd"	 or ":"	  command line history
+			"search" or "/"   search pattern history
+			"expr"	 or "="   typed expression history
+			"input"  or "@"	  input line history
+			"debug"  or ">"   debug command history
+			empty		  the current or last used history
+		The {history} string does not need to be the whole name, one
+		character is sufficient.
+		If {item} does already exist in the history, it will be
+		shifted to become the newest entry.
+		The result is a Number: 1 if the operation was successful,
+		otherwise 0 is returned.
+
+		Example: >
+			:call histadd("input", strftime("%Y %b %d"))
+			:let date=input("Enter date: ")
+<		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+
+histdel({history} [, {item}])				*histdel()*
+		Clear {history}, i.e. delete all its entries.  See |hist-names|
+		for the possible values of {history}.
+
+		If the parameter {item} evaluates to a String, it is used as a
+		regular expression.  All entries matching that expression will
+		be removed from the history (if there are any).
+		Upper/lowercase must match, unless "\c" is used |/\c|.
+		If {item} evaluates to a Number, it will be interpreted as
+		an index, see |:history-indexing|.  The respective entry will
+		be removed if it exists.
+
+		The result is a Number: 1 for a successful operation,
+		otherwise 0 is returned.
+
+		Examples:
+		Clear expression register history: >
+			:call histdel("expr")
+<
+		Remove all entries starting with "*" from the search history: >
+			:call histdel("/", '^\*')
+<
+		The following three are equivalent: >
+			:call histdel("search", histnr("search"))
+			:call histdel("search", -1)
+			:call histdel("search", '^'.histget("search", -1).'$')
+<
+		To delete the last search pattern and use the last-but-one for
+		the "n" command and 'hlsearch': >
+			:call histdel("search", -1)
+			:let @/ = histget("search", -1)
+
+histget({history} [, {index}])				*histget()*
+		The result is a String, the entry with Number {index} from
+		{history}.  See |hist-names| for the possible values of
+		{history}, and |:history-indexing| for {index}.  If there is
+		no such entry, an empty String is returned.  When {index} is
+		omitted, the most recent item from the history is used.
+
+		Examples:
+		Redo the second last search from history. >
+			:execute '/' . histget("search", -2)
+
+<		Define an Ex command ":H {num}" that supports re-execution of
+		the {num}th entry from the output of |:history|. >
+			:command -nargs=1 H execute histget("cmd", 0+<args>)
+<
+histnr({history})					*histnr()*
+		The result is the Number of the current entry in {history}.
+		See |hist-names| for the possible values of {history}.
+		If an error occurred, -1 is returned.
+
+		Example: >
+			:let inp_index = histnr("expr")
+<
+hlexists({name})					*hlexists()*
+		The result is a Number, which is non-zero if a highlight group
+		called {name} exists.  This is when the group has been
+		defined in some way.  Not necessarily when highlighting has
+		been defined for it, it may also have been used for a syntax
+		item.
+							*highlight_exists()*
+		Obsolete name: highlight_exists().
+
+							*hlID()*
+hlID({name})	The result is a Number, which is the ID of the highlight group
+		with name {name}.  When the highlight group doesn't exist,
+		zero is returned.
+		This can be used to retrieve information about the highlight
+		group.  For example, to get the background color of the
+		"Comment" group: >
+	:echo synIDattr(synIDtrans(hlID("Comment")), "bg")
+<							*highlightID()*
+		Obsolete name: highlightID().
+
+hostname()						*hostname()*
+		The result is a String, which is the name of the machine on
+		which Vim is currently running.  Machine names greater than
+		256 characters long are truncated.
+
+iconv({expr}, {from}, {to})				*iconv()*
+		The result is a String, which is the text {expr} converted
+		from encoding {from} to encoding {to}.
+		When the conversion completely fails an empty string is
+		returned.  When some characters could not be converted they
+		are replaced with "?".
+		The encoding names are whatever the iconv() library function
+		can accept, see ":!man 3 iconv".
+		Most conversions require Vim to be compiled with the |+iconv|
+		feature.  Otherwise only UTF-8 to latin1 conversion and back
+		can be done.
+		This can be used to display messages with special characters,
+		no matter what 'encoding' is set to.  Write the message in
+		UTF-8 and use: >
+			echo iconv(utf8_str, "utf-8", &enc)
+<		Note that Vim uses UTF-8 for all Unicode encodings, conversion
+		from/to UCS-2 is automatically changed to use UTF-8.  You
+		cannot use UCS-2 in a string anyway, because of the NUL bytes.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| feature}
+
+							*indent()*
+indent({lnum})	The result is a Number, which is indent of line {lnum} in the
+		current buffer.  The indent is counted in spaces, the value
+		of 'tabstop' is relevant.  {lnum} is used just like in
+		|getline()|.
+		When {lnum} is invalid -1 is returned.
+
+
+index({object}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]])			*index()*
+		If {object} is a |List| return the lowest index where the item
+		has a value equal to {expr}.  There is no automatic
+		conversion, so the String "4" is different from the Number 4.
+		And the number 4 is different from the Float 4.0.  The value
+		of 'ignorecase' is not used here, case always matters.
+
+		If {object} is |Blob| return the lowest index where the byte
+		value is equal to {expr}.
+
+		If {start} is given then start looking at the item with index
+		{start} (may be negative for an item relative to the end).
+		When {ic} is given and it is |TRUE|, ignore case.  Otherwise
+		case must match.
+		-1 is returned when {expr} is not found in {object}.
+		Example: >
+			:let idx = index(words, "the")
+			:if index(numbers, 123) >= 0
+
+
+input({prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]])		*input()*
+		The result is a String, which is whatever the user typed on
+		the command-line.  The {prompt} argument is either a prompt
+		string, or a blank string (for no prompt).  A '\n' can be used
+		in the prompt to start a new line.
+		The highlighting set with |:echohl| is used for the prompt.
+		The input is entered just like a command-line, with the same
+		editing commands and mappings.  There is a separate history
+		for lines typed for input().
+		Example: >
+			:if input("Coffee or beer? ") == "beer"
+			:  echo "Cheers!"
+			:endif
+<
+		If the optional {text} argument is present and not empty, this
+		is used for the default reply, as if the user typed this.
+		Example: >
+			:let color = input("Color? ", "white")
+
+<		The optional {completion} argument specifies the type of
+		completion supported for the input.  Without it completion is
+		not performed.  The supported completion types are the same as
+		that can be supplied to a user-defined command using the
+		"-complete=" argument.  Refer to |:command-completion| for
+		more information.  Example: >
+			let fname = input("File: ", "", "file")
+<
+		NOTE: This function must not be used in a startup file, for
+		the versions that only run in GUI mode (e.g., the Win32 GUI).
+		Note: When input() is called from within a mapping it will
+		consume remaining characters from that mapping, because a
+		mapping is handled like the characters were typed.
+		Use |inputsave()| before input() and |inputrestore()|
+		after input() to avoid that.  Another solution is to avoid
+		that further characters follow in the mapping, e.g., by using
+		|:execute| or |:normal|.
+
+		Example with a mapping: >
+			:nmap \x :call GetFoo()<CR>:exe "/" . Foo<CR>
+			:function GetFoo()
+			:  call inputsave()
+			:  let g:Foo = input("enter search pattern: ")
+			:  call inputrestore()
+			:endfunction
+
+inputdialog({prompt} [, {text} [, {cancelreturn}]])		*inputdialog()*
+		Like |input()|, but when the GUI is running and text dialogs
+		are supported, a dialog window pops up to input the text.
+		Example: >
+		   :let n = inputdialog("value for shiftwidth", shiftwidth())
+		   :if n != ""
+		   :  let &sw = n
+		   :endif
+<		When the dialog is cancelled {cancelreturn} is returned.  When
+		omitted an empty string is returned.
+		Hitting <Enter> works like pressing the OK button.  Hitting
+		<Esc> works like pressing the Cancel button.
+		NOTE: Command-line completion is not supported.
+
+inputlist({textlist})					*inputlist()*
+		{textlist} must be a |List| of strings.  This |List| is
+		displayed, one string per line.  The user will be prompted to
+		enter a number, which is returned.
+		The user can also select an item by clicking on it with the
+		mouse.  For the first string 0 is returned.  When clicking
+		above the first item a negative number is returned.  When
+		clicking on the prompt one more than the length of {textlist}
+		is returned.
+		Make sure {textlist} has less than 'lines' entries, otherwise
+		it won't work.  It's a good idea to put the entry number at
+		the start of the string.  And put a prompt in the first item.
+		Example: >
+			let color = inputlist(['Select color:', '1. red',
+				\ '2. green', '3. blue'])
+
+inputrestore()						*inputrestore()*
+		Restore typeahead that was saved with a previous |inputsave()|.
+		Should be called the same number of times inputsave() is
+		called.  Calling it more often is harmless though.
+		Returns 1 when there is nothing to restore, 0 otherwise.
+
+inputsave()						*inputsave()*
+		Preserve typeahead (also from mappings) and clear it, so that
+		a following prompt gets input from the user.  Should be
+		followed by a matching inputrestore() after the prompt.  Can
+		be used several times, in which case there must be just as
+		many inputrestore() calls.
+		Returns 1 when out of memory, 0 otherwise.
+
+inputsecret({prompt} [, {text}])			*inputsecret()*
+		This function acts much like the |input()| function with but
+		two exceptions:
+		a) the user's response will be displayed as a sequence of
+		asterisks ("*") thereby keeping the entry secret, and
+		b) the user's response will not be recorded on the input
+		|history| stack.
+		The result is a String, which is whatever the user actually
+		typed on the command-line in response to the issued prompt.
+		NOTE: Command-line completion is not supported.
+
+insert({object}, {item} [, {idx}])			*insert()*
+		When {object} is a |List| or a |Blob| insert {item} at the start
+		of it.
+
+		If {idx} is specified insert {item} before the item with index
+		{idx}.  If {idx} is zero it goes before the first item, just
+		like omitting {idx}.  A negative {idx} is also possible, see
+		|list-index|.  -1 inserts just before the last item.
+
+		Returns the resulting |List| or |Blob|.  Examples: >
+			:let mylist = insert([2, 3, 5], 1)
+			:call insert(mylist, 4, -1)
+			:call insert(mylist, 6, len(mylist))
+<		The last example can be done simpler with |add()|.
+		Note that when {item} is a |List| it is inserted as a single
+		item.  Use |extend()| to concatenate |Lists|.
+
+invert({expr})						*invert()*
+		Bitwise invert.  The argument is converted to a number.  A
+		List, Dict or Float argument causes an error.  Example: >
+			:let bits = invert(bits)
+
+isdirectory({directory})				*isdirectory()*
+		The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| when a directory
+		with the name {directory} exists.  If {directory} doesn't
+		exist, or isn't a directory, the result is |FALSE|.  {directory}
+		is any expression, which is used as a String.
+
+islocked({expr})					*islocked()* *E786*
+		The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| when {expr} is the
+		name of a locked variable.
+		{expr} must be the name of a variable, |List| item or
+		|Dictionary| entry, not the variable itself!  Example: >
+			:let alist = [0, ['a', 'b'], 2, 3]
+			:lockvar 1 alist
+			:echo islocked('alist')		" 1
+			:echo islocked('alist[1]')	" 0
+
+<		When {expr} is a variable that does not exist you get an error
+		message.  Use |exists()| to check for existence.
+
+isnan({expr})						*isnan()*
+		Return |TRUE| if {expr} is a float with value NaN. >
+			echo isnan(0.0 / 0.0)
+<			1 ~
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+items({dict})						*items()*
+		Return a |List| with all the key-value pairs of {dict}.  Each
+		|List| item is a list with two items: the key of a {dict}
+		entry and the value of this entry.  The |List| is in arbitrary
+		order.  Also see |keys()| and |values()|.
+		Example: >
+			for [key, value] in items(mydict)
+			   echo key . ': ' . value
+			endfor
+
+job_getchannel({job})					 *job_getchannel()*
+		Get the channel handle that {job} is using.
+		To check if the job has no channel: >
+			if string(job_getchannel()) == 'channel fail'
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+job| feature}
+
+job_info([{job}])					*job_info()*
+		Returns a Dictionary with information about {job}:
+		   "status"	what |job_status()| returns
+		   "channel"	what |job_getchannel()| returns
+		   "cmd"	List of command arguments used to start the job
+		   "process"	process ID
+		   "tty_in"	terminal input name, empty when none
+		   "tty_out"	terminal output name, empty when none
+		   "exitval"	only valid when "status" is "dead"
+		   "exit_cb"	function to be called on exit
+		   "stoponexit"	|job-stoponexit|
+
+		   Only in Unix:
+		   "termsig"	the signal which terminated the process
+				(See |job_stop()| for the values)
+				only valid when "status" is "dead"
+
+		Without any arguments, returns a List with all Job objects.
+
+job_setoptions({job}, {options})			*job_setoptions()*
+		Change options for {job}.  Supported are:
+		   "stoponexit"	|job-stoponexit|
+		   "exit_cb"	|job-exit_cb|
+
+job_start({command} [, {options}])			*job_start()*
+		Start a job and return a Job object.  Unlike |system()| and
+		|:!cmd| this does not wait for the job to finish.
+		To start a job in a terminal window see |term_start()|.
+
+		If the job fails to start then |job_status()| on the returned
+		Job object results in "fail" and none of the callbacks will be
+		invoked.
+
+		{command} can be a String.  This works best on MS-Windows.  On
+		Unix it is split up in white-separated parts to be passed to
+		execvp().  Arguments in double quotes can contain white space.
+
+		{command} can be a List, where the first item is the executable
+		and further items are the arguments.  All items are converted
+		to String.  This works best on Unix.
+
+		On MS-Windows, job_start() makes a GUI application hidden. If
+		want to show it, Use |:!start| instead.
+
+		The command is executed directly, not through a shell, the
+		'shell' option is not used.  To use the shell: >
+	let job = job_start(["/bin/sh", "-c", "echo hello"])
+<		Or: >
+	let job = job_start('/bin/sh -c "echo hello"')
+<		Note that this will start two processes, the shell and the
+		command it executes.  If you don't want this use the "exec"
+		shell command.
+
+		On Unix $PATH is used to search for the executable only when
+		the command does not contain a slash.
+
+		The job will use the same terminal as Vim.  If it reads from
+		stdin the job and Vim will be fighting over input, that
+		doesn't work.  Redirect stdin and stdout to avoid problems: >
+	let job = job_start(['sh', '-c', "myserver </dev/null >/dev/null"])
+<
+		The returned Job object can be used to get the status with
+		|job_status()| and stop the job with |job_stop()|.
+
+		Note that the job object will be deleted if there are no
+		references to it.  This closes the stdin and stderr, which may
+		cause the job to fail with an error.  To avoid this keep a
+		reference to the job.  Thus instead of: >
+	call job_start('my-command')
+<		use: >
+	let myjob = job_start('my-command')
+<		and unlet "myjob" once the job is not needed or is past the
+		point where it would fail (e.g. when it prints a message on
+		startup).  Keep in mind that variables local to a function
+		will cease to exist if the function returns.  Use a
+		script-local variable if needed: >
+	let s:myjob = job_start('my-command')
+<
+		{options} must be a Dictionary.  It can contain many optional
+		items, see |job-options|.
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+job| feature}
+
+job_status({job})					*job_status()* *E916*
+		Returns a String with the status of {job}:
+			"run"	job is running
+			"fail"	job failed to start
+			"dead"	job died or was stopped after running
+
+		On Unix a non-existing command results in "dead" instead of
+		"fail", because a fork happens before the failure can be
+		detected.
+
+		If an exit callback was set with the "exit_cb" option and the
+		job is now detected to be "dead" the callback will be invoked.
+
+		For more information see |job_info()|.
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+job| feature}
+
+job_stop({job} [, {how}])					*job_stop()*
+		Stop the {job}.  This can also be used to signal the job.
+
+		When {how} is omitted or is "term" the job will be terminated.
+		For Unix SIGTERM is sent.  On MS-Windows the job will be
+		terminated forcedly (there is no "gentle" way).
+		This goes to the process group, thus children may also be
+		affected.
+
+		Effect for Unix:
+			"term"	 SIGTERM (default)
+			"hup"	 SIGHUP
+			"quit"	 SIGQUIT
+			"int"	 SIGINT
+			"kill"	 SIGKILL (strongest way to stop)
+			number	 signal with that number
+
+		Effect for MS-Windows:
+			"term"	 terminate process forcedly (default)
+			"hup"	 CTRL_BREAK
+			"quit"	 CTRL_BREAK
+			"int"	 CTRL_C
+			"kill"	 terminate process forcedly
+			Others	 CTRL_BREAK
+
+		On Unix the signal is sent to the process group.  This means
+		that when the job is "sh -c command" it affects both the shell
+		and the command.
+
+		The result is a Number: 1 if the operation could be executed,
+		0 if "how" is not supported on the system.
+		Note that even when the operation was executed, whether the
+		job was actually stopped needs to be checked with
+		|job_status()|.
+
+		If the status of the job is "dead", the signal will not be
+		sent.  This is to avoid to stop the wrong job (esp. on Unix,
+		where process numbers are recycled).
+
+		When using "kill" Vim will assume the job will die and close
+		the channel.
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+job| feature}
+
+join({list} [, {sep}])					*join()*
+		Join the items in {list} together into one String.
+		When {sep} is specified it is put in between the items.  If
+		{sep} is omitted a single space is used.
+		Note that {sep} is not added at the end.  You might want to
+		add it there too: >
+			let lines = join(mylist, "\n") . "\n"
+<		String items are used as-is.  |Lists| and |Dictionaries| are
+		converted into a string like with |string()|.
+		The opposite function is |split()|.
+
+js_decode({string})					*js_decode()*
+		This is similar to |json_decode()| with these differences:
+		- Object key names do not have to be in quotes.
+		- Strings can be in single quotes.
+		- Empty items in an array (between two commas) are allowed and
+		  result in v:none items.
+
+js_encode({expr})					*js_encode()*
+		This is similar to |json_encode()| with these differences:
+		- Object key names are not in quotes.
+		- v:none items in an array result in an empty item between
+		  commas.
+		For example, the Vim object:
+			[1,v:none,{"one":1},v:none] ~
+		Will be encoded as:
+			[1,,{one:1},,] ~
+		While json_encode() would produce:
+			[1,null,{"one":1},null] ~
+		This encoding is valid for JavaScript. It is more efficient
+		than JSON, especially when using an array with optional items.
+
+
+json_decode({string})					*json_decode()*
+		This parses a JSON formatted string and returns the equivalent
+		in Vim values.  See |json_encode()| for the relation between
+		JSON and Vim values.
+		The decoding is permissive:
+		- A trailing comma in an array and object is ignored, e.g.
+		  "[1, 2, ]" is the same as "[1, 2]".
+		- Integer keys are accepted in objects, e.g. {1:2} is the
+		  same as {"1":2}.
+		- More floating point numbers are recognized, e.g. "1." for
+		  "1.0", or "001.2" for "1.2". Special floating point values
+		  "Infinity", "-Infinity" and "NaN" (capitalization ignored)
+		  are accepted.
+		- Leading zeroes in integer numbers are ignored, e.g. "012"
+		  for "12" or "-012" for "-12".
+		- Capitalization is ignored in literal names null, true or
+		  false, e.g. "NULL" for "null", "True" for "true".
+		- Control characters U+0000 through U+001F which are not
+		  escaped in strings are accepted, e.g. "	" (tab
+		  character in string) for "\t".
+		- An empty JSON expression or made of only spaces is accepted
+		  and results in v:none.
+		- Backslash in an invalid 2-character sequence escape is
+		  ignored, e.g. "\a" is decoded as "a".
+		- A correct surrogate pair in JSON strings should normally be
+		  a 12 character sequence such as "\uD834\uDD1E", but
+		  json_decode() silently accepts truncated surrogate pairs
+		  such as "\uD834" or "\uD834\u"
+								*E938*
+		A duplicate key in an object, valid in rfc7159, is not
+		accepted by json_decode() as the result must be a valid Vim
+		type, e.g. this fails: {"a":"b", "a":"c"}
+
+
+json_encode({expr})					*json_encode()*
+		Encode {expr} as JSON and return this as a string.
+		The encoding is specified in:
+		https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7159.html
+		Vim values are converted as follows:
+		   |Number|		decimal number
+		   |Float|		floating point number
+		   Float nan		"NaN"
+		   Float inf		"Infinity"
+		   Float -inf		"-Infinity"
+		   |String|		in double quotes (possibly null)
+		   |Funcref|		not possible, error
+		   |List|		as an array (possibly null); when
+					used recursively: []
+		   |Dict|		as an object (possibly null); when
+					used recursively: {}
+		   |Blob|		as an array of the individual bytes
+		   v:false		"false"
+		   v:true		"true"
+		   v:none		"null"
+		   v:null		"null"
+		Note that NaN and Infinity are passed on as values.  This is
+		missing in the JSON standard, but several implementations do
+		allow it.  If not then you will get an error.
+
+keys({dict})						*keys()*
+		Return a |List| with all the keys of {dict}.  The |List| is in
+		arbitrary order.  Also see |items()| and |values()|.
+
+							*len()* *E701*
+len({expr})	The result is a Number, which is the length of the argument.
+		When {expr} is a String or a Number the length in bytes is
+		used, as with |strlen()|.
+		When {expr} is a |List| the number of items in the |List| is
+		returned.
+		When {expr} is a |Blob| the number of bytes is returned.
+		When {expr} is a |Dictionary| the number of entries in the
+		|Dictionary| is returned.
+		Otherwise an error is given.
+
+						*libcall()* *E364* *E368*
+libcall({libname}, {funcname}, {argument})
+		Call function {funcname} in the run-time library {libname}
+		with single argument {argument}.
+		This is useful to call functions in a library that you
+		especially made to be used with Vim.  Since only one argument
+		is possible, calling standard library functions is rather
+		limited.
+		The result is the String returned by the function.  If the
+		function returns NULL, this will appear as an empty string ""
+		to Vim.
+		If the function returns a number, use libcallnr()!
+		If {argument} is a number, it is passed to the function as an
+		int; if {argument} is a string, it is passed as a
+		null-terminated string.
+		This function will fail in |restricted-mode|.
+
+		libcall() allows you to write your own 'plug-in' extensions to
+		Vim without having to recompile the program.  It is NOT a
+		means to call system functions!  If you try to do so Vim will
+		very probably crash.
+
+		For Win32, the functions you write must be placed in a DLL
+		and use the normal C calling convention (NOT Pascal which is
+		used in Windows System DLLs).  The function must take exactly
+		one parameter, either a character pointer or a long integer,
+		and must return a character pointer or NULL.  The character
+		pointer returned must point to memory that will remain valid
+		after the function has returned (e.g. in static data in the
+		DLL).  If it points to allocated memory, that memory will
+		leak away.  Using a static buffer in the function should work,
+		it's then freed when the DLL is unloaded.
+
+		WARNING: If the function returns a non-valid pointer, Vim may
+		crash!	This also happens if the function returns a number,
+		because Vim thinks it's a pointer.
+		For Win32 systems, {libname} should be the filename of the DLL
+		without the ".DLL" suffix.  A full path is only required if
+		the DLL is not in the usual places.
+		For Unix: When compiling your own plugins, remember that the
+		object code must be compiled as position-independent ('PIC').
+		{only in Win32 and some Unix versions, when the |+libcall|
+		feature is present}
+		Examples: >
+			:echo libcall("libc.so", "getenv", "HOME")
+<
+							*libcallnr()*
+libcallnr({libname}, {funcname}, {argument})
+		Just like |libcall()|, but used for a function that returns an
+		int instead of a string.
+		{only in Win32 on some Unix versions, when the |+libcall|
+		feature is present}
+		Examples: >
+			:echo libcallnr("/usr/lib/libc.so", "getpid", "")
+			:call libcallnr("libc.so", "printf", "Hello World!\n")
+			:call libcallnr("libc.so", "sleep", 10)
+<
+							*line()*
+line({expr})	The result is a Number, which is the line number of the file
+		position given with {expr}.  The accepted positions are:
+		    .	    the cursor position
+		    $	    the last line in the current buffer
+		    'x	    position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is
+			    returned)
+		    w0	    first line visible in current window (one if the
+			    display isn't updated, e.g. in silent Ex mode)
+		    w$	    last line visible in current window (this is one
+			    less than "w0" if no lines are visible)
+		    v	    In Visual mode: the start of the Visual area (the
+			    cursor is the end).  When not in Visual mode
+			    returns the cursor position.  Differs from |'<| in
+			    that it's updated right away.
+		Note that a mark in another file can be used.  The line number
+		then applies to another buffer.
+		To get the column number use |col()|.  To get both use
+		|getpos()|.
+		Examples: >
+			line(".")		line number of the cursor
+			line("'t")		line number of mark t
+			line("'" . marker)	line number of mark marker
+<
+		To jump to the last known position when opening a file see
+		|last-position-jump|.
+
+line2byte({lnum})					*line2byte()*
+		Return the byte count from the start of the buffer for line
+		{lnum}.  This includes the end-of-line character, depending on
+		the 'fileformat' option for the current buffer.  The first
+		line returns 1. 'encoding' matters, 'fileencoding' is ignored.
+		This can also be used to get the byte count for the line just
+		below the last line: >
+			line2byte(line("$") + 1)
+<		This is the buffer size plus one.  If 'fileencoding' is empty
+		it is the file size plus one.
+		When {lnum} is invalid, or the |+byte_offset| feature has been
+		disabled at compile time, -1 is returned.
+		Also see |byte2line()|, |go| and |:goto|.
+
+lispindent({lnum})					*lispindent()*
+		Get the amount of indent for line {lnum} according the lisp
+		indenting rules, as with 'lisp'.
+		The indent is counted in spaces, the value of 'tabstop' is
+		relevant.  {lnum} is used just like in |getline()|.
+		When {lnum} is invalid or Vim was not compiled the
+		|+lispindent| feature, -1 is returned.
+
+localtime()						*localtime()*
+		Return the current time, measured as seconds since 1st Jan
+		1970.  See also |strftime()| and |getftime()|.
+
+
+log({expr})						*log()*
+		Return the natural logarithm (base e) of {expr} as a |Float|.
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range
+		(0, inf].
+		Examples: >
+			:echo log(10)
+<			2.302585 >
+			:echo log(exp(5))
+<			5.0
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+log10({expr})						*log10()*
+		Return the logarithm of Float {expr} to base 10 as a |Float|.
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo log10(1000)
+<			3.0 >
+			:echo log10(0.01)
+<			-2.0
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+luaeval({expr} [, {expr}])					*luaeval()*
+		Evaluate Lua expression {expr} and return its result converted
+		to Vim data structures. Second {expr} may hold additional
+		argument accessible as _A inside first {expr}.
+		Strings are returned as they are.
+		Boolean objects are converted to numbers.
+		Numbers are converted to |Float| values if vim was compiled
+		with |+float| and to numbers otherwise.
+		Dictionaries and lists obtained by vim.eval() are returned
+		as-is.
+		Other objects are returned as zero without any errors.
+		See |lua-luaeval| for more details.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+lua| feature}
+
+map({expr1}, {expr2})					*map()*
+		{expr1} must be a |List| or a |Dictionary|.
+		Replace each item in {expr1} with the result of evaluating
+		{expr2}.  {expr2} must be a |string| or |Funcref|.
+
+		If {expr2} is a |string|, inside {expr2} |v:val| has the value
+		of the current item.  For a |Dictionary| |v:key| has the key
+		of the current item and for a |List| |v:key| has the index of
+		the current item.
+		Example: >
+			:call map(mylist, '"> " . v:val . " <"')
+<		This puts "> " before and " <" after each item in "mylist".
+
+		Note that {expr2} is the result of an expression and is then
+		used as an expression again.  Often it is good to use a
+		|literal-string| to avoid having to double backslashes.  You
+		still have to double ' quotes
+
+		If {expr2} is a |Funcref| it is called with two arguments:
+			1. The key or the index of the current item.
+			2. the value of the current item.
+		The function must return the new value of the item. Example
+		that changes each value by "key-value": >
+			func KeyValue(key, val)
+			  return a:key . '-' . a:val
+			endfunc
+			call map(myDict, function('KeyValue'))
+<		It is shorter when using a |lambda|: >
+			call map(myDict, {key, val -> key . '-' . val})
+<		If you do not use "val" you can leave it out: >
+			call map(myDict, {key -> 'item: ' . key})
+<
+		The operation is done in-place.  If you want a |List| or
+		|Dictionary| to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
+			:let tlist = map(copy(mylist), ' v:val . "\t"')
+
+<		Returns {expr1}, the |List| or |Dictionary| that was filtered.
+		When an error is encountered while evaluating {expr2} no
+		further items in {expr1} are processed.  When {expr2} is a
+		Funcref errors inside a function are ignored, unless it was
+		defined with the "abort" flag.
+
+
+maparg({name} [, {mode} [, {abbr} [, {dict}]]])			*maparg()*
+		When {dict} is omitted or zero: Return the rhs of mapping
+		{name} in mode {mode}.  The returned String has special
+		characters translated like in the output of the ":map" command
+		listing.
+
+		When there is no mapping for {name}, an empty String is
+		returned.  When the mapping for {name} is empty, then "<Nop>"
+		is returned.
+
+		The {name} can have special key names, like in the ":map"
+		command.
+
+		{mode} can be one of these strings:
+			"n"	Normal
+			"v"	Visual (including Select)
+			"o"	Operator-pending
+			"i"	Insert
+			"c"	Cmd-line
+			"s"	Select
+			"x"	Visual
+			"l"	langmap |language-mapping|
+			"t"	Terminal-Job
+			""	Normal, Visual and Operator-pending
+		When {mode} is omitted, the modes for "" are used.
+
+		When {abbr} is there and it is |TRUE| use abbreviations
+		instead of mappings.
+
+		When {dict} is there and it is |TRUE| return a dictionary
+		containing all the information of the mapping with the
+		following items:
+		  "lhs"	     The {lhs} of the mapping.
+		  "rhs"	     The {rhs} of the mapping as typed.
+		  "silent"   1 for a |:map-silent| mapping, else 0.
+		  "noremap"  1 if the {rhs} of the mapping is not remappable.
+		  "expr"     1 for an expression mapping (|:map-<expr>|).
+		  "buffer"   1 for a buffer local mapping (|:map-local|).
+		  "mode"     Modes for which the mapping is defined. In
+			     addition to the modes mentioned above, these
+			     characters will be used:
+			     " "     Normal, Visual and Operator-pending
+			     "!"     Insert and Commandline mode
+				     (|mapmode-ic|)
+		  "sid"	     The script local ID, used for <sid> mappings
+			     (|<SID>|).
+		  "lnum"     The line number in "sid", zero if unknown.
+		  "nowait"   Do not wait for other, longer mappings.
+			     (|:map-<nowait>|).
+
+		The mappings local to the current buffer are checked first,
+		then the global mappings.
+		This function can be used to map a key even when it's already
+		mapped, and have it do the original mapping too.  Sketch: >
+			exe 'nnoremap <Tab> ==' . maparg('<Tab>', 'n')
+
+
+mapcheck({name} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]])			*mapcheck()*
+		Check if there is a mapping that matches with {name} in mode
+		{mode}.  See |maparg()| for {mode} and special names in
+		{name}.
+		When {abbr} is there and it is |TRUE| use abbreviations
+		instead of mappings.
+		A match happens with a mapping that starts with {name} and
+		with a mapping which is equal to the start of {name}.
+
+			matches mapping "a"	"ab"	"abc" ~
+		   mapcheck("a")	yes	yes	 yes
+		   mapcheck("abc")	yes	yes	 yes
+		   mapcheck("ax")	yes	no	 no
+		   mapcheck("b")	no	no	 no
+
+		The difference with maparg() is that mapcheck() finds a
+		mapping that matches with {name}, while maparg() only finds a
+		mapping for {name} exactly.
+		When there is no mapping that starts with {name}, an empty
+		String is returned.  If there is one, the RHS of that mapping
+		is returned.  If there are several mappings that start with
+		{name}, the RHS of one of them is returned.  This will be
+		"<Nop>" if the RHS is empty.
+		The mappings local to the current buffer are checked first,
+		then the global mappings.
+		This function can be used to check if a mapping can be added
+		without being ambiguous.  Example: >
+	:if mapcheck("_vv") == ""
+	:   map _vv :set guifont=7x13<CR>
+	:endif
+<		This avoids adding the "_vv" mapping when there already is a
+		mapping for "_v" or for "_vvv".
+
+match({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]])			*match()*
+		When {expr} is a |List| then this returns the index of the
+		first item where {pat} matches.  Each item is used as a
+		String, |Lists| and |Dictionaries| are used as echoed.
+
+		Otherwise, {expr} is used as a String.  The result is a
+		Number, which gives the index (byte offset) in {expr} where
+		{pat} matches.
+
+		A match at the first character or |List| item returns zero.
+		If there is no match -1 is returned.
+
+		For getting submatches see |matchlist()|.
+		Example: >
+			:echo match("testing", "ing")	" results in 4
+			:echo match([1, 'x'], '\a')	" results in 1
+<		See |string-match| for how {pat} is used.
+								*strpbrk()*
+		Vim doesn't have a strpbrk() function.  But you can do: >
+			:let sepidx = match(line, '[.,;: \t]')
+<								*strcasestr()*
+		Vim doesn't have a strcasestr() function.  But you can add
+		"\c" to the pattern to ignore case: >
+			:let idx = match(haystack, '\cneedle')
+<
+		If {start} is given, the search starts from byte index
+		{start} in a String or item {start} in a |List|.
+		The result, however, is still the index counted from the
+		first character/item.  Example: >
+			:echo match("testing", "ing", 2)
+<		result is again "4". >
+			:echo match("testing", "ing", 4)
+<		result is again "4". >
+			:echo match("testing", "t", 2)
+<		result is "3".
+		For a String, if {start} > 0 then it is like the string starts
+		{start} bytes later, thus "^" will match at {start}.  Except
+		when {count} is given, then it's like matches before the
+		{start} byte are ignored (this is a bit complicated to keep it
+		backwards compatible).
+		For a String, if {start} < 0, it will be set to 0.  For a list
+		the index is counted from the end.
+		If {start} is out of range ({start} > strlen({expr}) for a
+		String or {start} > len({expr}) for a |List|) -1 is returned.
+
+		When {count} is given use the {count}'th match.  When a match
+		is found in a String the search for the next one starts one
+		character further.  Thus this example results in 1: >
+			echo match("testing", "..", 0, 2)
+<		In a |List| the search continues in the next item.
+		Note that when {count} is added the way {start} works changes,
+		see above.
+
+		See |pattern| for the patterns that are accepted.
+		The 'ignorecase' option is used to set the ignore-caseness of
+		the pattern.  'smartcase' is NOT used.  The matching is always
+		done like 'magic' is set and 'cpoptions' is empty.
+
+				*matchadd()* *E798* *E799* *E801* *E957*
+matchadd({group}, {pattern} [, {priority} [, {id} [, {dict}]]])
+		Defines a pattern to be highlighted in the current window (a
+		"match").  It will be highlighted with {group}.  Returns an
+		identification number (ID), which can be used to delete the
+		match using |matchdelete()|.
+		Matching is case sensitive and magic, unless case sensitivity
+		or magicness are explicitly overridden in {pattern}.  The
+		'magic', 'smartcase' and 'ignorecase' options are not used.
+		The "Conceal" value is special, it causes the match to be
+		concealed.
+
+		The optional {priority} argument assigns a priority to the
+		match.  A match with a high priority will have its
+		highlighting overrule that of a match with a lower priority.
+		A priority is specified as an integer (negative numbers are no
+		exception).  If the {priority} argument is not specified, the
+		default priority is 10.  The priority of 'hlsearch' is zero,
+		hence all matches with a priority greater than zero will
+		overrule it.  Syntax highlighting (see 'syntax') is a separate
+		mechanism, and regardless of the chosen priority a match will
+		always overrule syntax highlighting.
+
+		The optional {id} argument allows the request for a specific
+		match ID.  If a specified ID is already taken, an error
+		message will appear and the match will not be added.  An ID
+		is specified as a positive integer (zero excluded).  IDs 1, 2
+		and 3 are reserved for |:match|, |:2match| and |:3match|,
+		respectively.  If the {id} argument is not specified or -1,
+		|matchadd()| automatically chooses a free ID.
+
+		The optional {dict} argument allows for further custom
+		values. Currently this is used to specify a match specific
+		conceal character that will be shown for |hl-Conceal|
+		highlighted matches. The dict can have the following members:
+
+			conceal	    Special character to show instead of the
+				    match (only for |hl-Conceal| highlighted
+				    matches, see |:syn-cchar|)
+			window	    Instead of the current window use the
+				    window with this number or window ID.
+
+		The number of matches is not limited, as it is the case with
+		the |:match| commands.
+
+		Example: >
+			:highlight MyGroup ctermbg=green guibg=green
+			:let m = matchadd("MyGroup", "TODO")
+<		Deletion of the pattern: >
+			:call matchdelete(m)
+
+<		A list of matches defined by |matchadd()| and |:match| are
+		available from |getmatches()|.  All matches can be deleted in
+		one operation by |clearmatches()|.
+
+							*matchaddpos()*
+matchaddpos({group}, {pos} [, {priority} [, {id} [, {dict}]]])
+		Same as |matchadd()|, but requires a list of positions {pos}
+		instead of a pattern. This command is faster than |matchadd()|
+		because it does not require to handle regular expressions and
+		sets buffer line boundaries to redraw screen. It is supposed
+		to be used when fast match additions and deletions are
+		required, for example to highlight matching parentheses.
+
+		The list {pos} can contain one of these items:
+		- A number.  This whole line will be highlighted.  The first
+		  line has number 1.
+		- A list with one number, e.g., [23]. The whole line with this
+		  number will be highlighted.
+		- A list with two numbers, e.g., [23, 11]. The first number is
+		  the line number, the second one is the column number (first
+		  column is 1, the value must correspond to the byte index as
+		  |col()| would return).  The character at this position will
+		  be highlighted.
+		- A list with three numbers, e.g., [23, 11, 3]. As above, but
+		  the third number gives the length of the highlight in bytes.
+
+		The maximum number of positions is 8.
+
+		Example: >
+			:highlight MyGroup ctermbg=green guibg=green
+			:let m = matchaddpos("MyGroup", [[23, 24], 34])
+<		Deletion of the pattern: >
+			:call matchdelete(m)
+
+<		Matches added by |matchaddpos()| are returned by
+		|getmatches()| with an entry "pos1", "pos2", etc., with the
+		value a list like the {pos} item.
+
+matcharg({nr})							*matcharg()*
+		Selects the {nr} match item, as set with a |:match|,
+		|:2match| or |:3match| command.
+		Return a |List| with two elements:
+			The name of the highlight group used
+			The pattern used.
+		When {nr} is not 1, 2 or 3 returns an empty |List|.
+		When there is no match item set returns ['', ''].
+		This is useful to save and restore a |:match|.
+		Highlighting matches using the |:match| commands are limited
+		to three matches. |matchadd()| does not have this limitation.
+
+matchdelete({id})			       *matchdelete()* *E802* *E803*
+		Deletes a match with ID {id} previously defined by |matchadd()|
+		or one of the |:match| commands.  Returns 0 if successful,
+		otherwise -1.  See example for |matchadd()|.  All matches can
+		be deleted in one operation by |clearmatches()|.
+
+matchend({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]])			*matchend()*
+		Same as |match()|, but return the index of first character
+		after the match.  Example: >
+			:echo matchend("testing", "ing")
+<		results in "7".
+							*strspn()* *strcspn()*
+		Vim doesn't have a strspn() or strcspn() function, but you can
+		do it with matchend(): >
+			:let span = matchend(line, '[a-zA-Z]')
+			:let span = matchend(line, '[^a-zA-Z]')
+<		Except that -1 is returned when there are no matches.
+
+		The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. >
+			:echo matchend("testing", "ing", 2)
+<		results in "7". >
+			:echo matchend("testing", "ing", 5)
+<		result is "-1".
+		When {expr} is a |List| the result is equal to |match()|.
+
+matchlist({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]])		*matchlist()*
+		Same as |match()|, but return a |List|.  The first item in the
+		list is the matched string, same as what matchstr() would
+		return.  Following items are submatches, like "\1", "\2", etc.
+		in |:substitute|.  When an optional submatch didn't match an
+		empty string is used.  Example: >
+			echo matchlist('acd', '\(a\)\?\(b\)\?\(c\)\?\(.*\)')
+<		Results in: ['acd', 'a', '', 'c', 'd', '', '', '', '', '']
+		When there is no match an empty list is returned.
+
+matchstr({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]])			*matchstr()*
+		Same as |match()|, but return the matched string.  Example: >
+			:echo matchstr("testing", "ing")
+<		results in "ing".
+		When there is no match "" is returned.
+		The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. >
+			:echo matchstr("testing", "ing", 2)
+<		results in "ing". >
+			:echo matchstr("testing", "ing", 5)
+<		result is "".
+		When {expr} is a |List| then the matching item is returned.
+		The type isn't changed, it's not necessarily a String.
+
+matchstrpos({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]])		*matchstrpos()*
+		Same as |matchstr()|, but return the matched string, the start
+		position and the end position of the match.  Example: >
+			:echo matchstrpos("testing", "ing")
+<		results in ["ing", 4, 7].
+		When there is no match ["", -1, -1] is returned.
+		The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. >
+			:echo matchstrpos("testing", "ing", 2)
+<		results in ["ing", 4, 7]. >
+			:echo matchstrpos("testing", "ing", 5)
+<		result is ["", -1, -1].
+		When {expr} is a |List| then the matching item, the index
+		of first item where {pat} matches, the start position and the
+		end position of the match are returned. >
+			:echo matchstrpos([1, '__x'], '\a')
+<		result is ["x", 1, 2, 3].
+		The type isn't changed, it's not necessarily a String.
+
+							*max()*
+max({expr})	Return the maximum value of all items in {expr}.
+		{expr} can be a list or a dictionary.  For a dictionary,
+		it returns the maximum of all values in the dictionary.
+		If {expr} is neither a list nor a dictionary, or one of the
+		items in {expr} cannot be used as a Number this results in
+		an error.  An empty |List| or |Dictionary| results in zero.
+
+							*min()*
+min({expr})	Return the minimum value of all items in {expr}.
+		{expr} can be a list or a dictionary.  For a dictionary,
+		it returns the minimum of all values in the dictionary.
+		If {expr} is neither a list nor a dictionary, or one of the
+		items in {expr} cannot be used as a Number this results in
+		an error.  An empty |List| or |Dictionary| results in zero.
+
+							*mkdir()* *E739*
+mkdir({name} [, {path} [, {prot}]])
+		Create directory {name}.
+
+		If {path} is "p" then intermediate directories are created as
+		necessary.  Otherwise it must be "".
+
+		If {prot} is given it is used to set the protection bits of
+		the new directory.  The default is 0755 (rwxr-xr-x: r/w for
+		the user readable for others).  Use 0700 to make it unreadable
+		for others.  This is only used for the last part of {name}.
+		Thus if you create /tmp/foo/bar then /tmp/foo will be created
+		with 0755.
+		Example: >
+			:call mkdir($HOME . "/tmp/foo/bar", "p", 0700)
+
+<		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+
+		There is no error if the directory already exists and the "p"
+		flag is passed (since patch 8.0.1708).  However, without the
+		"p" option the call will fail.  
+
+		The function result is a Number, which is 1 if the call was 
+		successful or 0 if the directory creation failed or partly
+		failed.
+
+		Not available on all systems.  To check use: >
+			:if exists("*mkdir")
+<
+							*mode()*
+mode([expr])	Return a string that indicates the current mode.
+		If [expr] is supplied and it evaluates to a non-zero Number or
+		a non-empty String (|non-zero-arg|), then the full mode is
+		returned, otherwise only the first letter is returned.
+
+		   n	    Normal, Terminal-Normal
+		   no	    Operator-pending
+		   nov	    Operator-pending (forced characterwise |o_v|)
+		   noV	    Operator-pending (forced linewise |o_V|)
+		   noCTRL-V Operator-pending (forced blockwise |o_CTRL-V|);
+				CTRL-V is one character
+		   niI	    Normal using |i_CTRL-O| in |Insert-mode|
+		   niR	    Normal using |i_CTRL-O| in |Replace-mode|
+		   niV	    Normal using |i_CTRL-O| in |Virtual-Replace-mode|
+		   v	    Visual by character
+		   V	    Visual by line
+		   CTRL-V   Visual blockwise
+		   s	    Select by character
+		   S	    Select by line
+		   CTRL-S   Select blockwise
+		   i	    Insert
+		   ic	    Insert mode completion |compl-generic|
+		   ix	    Insert mode |i_CTRL-X| completion
+		   R	    Replace |R|
+		   Rc	    Replace mode completion |compl-generic|
+		   Rv	    Virtual Replace |gR|
+		   Rx	    Replace mode |i_CTRL-X| completion
+		   c	    Command-line editing
+		   cv	    Vim Ex mode |gQ|
+		   ce	    Normal Ex mode |Q|
+		   r	    Hit-enter prompt
+		   rm	    The -- more -- prompt
+		   r?	    A |:confirm| query of some sort
+		   !	    Shell or external command is executing
+		   t	    Terminal-Job mode: keys go to the job
+		This is useful in the 'statusline' option or when used
+		with |remote_expr()| In most other places it always returns
+		"c" or "n".
+		Note that in the future more modes and more specific modes may
+		be added. It's better not to compare the whole string but only
+		the leading character(s).
+		Also see |visualmode()|.
+
+mzeval({expr})							*mzeval()*
+		Evaluate MzScheme expression {expr} and return its result
+		converted to Vim data structures.
+		Numbers and strings are returned as they are.
+		Pairs (including lists and improper lists) and vectors are
+		returned as Vim |Lists|.
+		Hash tables are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type with keys
+		converted to strings.
+		All other types are converted to string with display function.
+		Examples: >
+		    :mz (define l (list 1 2 3))
+		    :mz (define h (make-hash)) (hash-set! h "list" l)
+		    :echo mzeval("l")
+		    :echo mzeval("h")
+<
+		{only available when compiled with the |+mzscheme| feature}
+
+nextnonblank({lnum})					*nextnonblank()*
+		Return the line number of the first line at or below {lnum}
+		that is not blank.  Example: >
+			if getline(nextnonblank(1)) =~ "Java"
+<		When {lnum} is invalid or there is no non-blank line at or
+		below it, zero is returned.
+		See also |prevnonblank()|.
+
+nr2char({expr} [, {utf8}])				*nr2char()*
+		Return a string with a single character, which has the number
+		value {expr}.  Examples: >
+			nr2char(64)		returns "@"
+			nr2char(32)		returns " "
+<		When {utf8} is omitted or zero, the current 'encoding' is used.
+		Example for "utf-8": >
+			nr2char(300)		returns I with bow character
+<		With {utf8} set to 1, always return utf-8 characters.
+		Note that a NUL character in the file is specified with
+		nr2char(10), because NULs are represented with newline
+		characters.  nr2char(0) is a real NUL and terminates the
+		string, thus results in an empty string.
+
+or({expr}, {expr})					*or()*
+		Bitwise OR on the two arguments.  The arguments are converted
+		to a number.  A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error.
+		Example: >
+			:let bits = or(bits, 0x80)
+
+
+pathshorten({expr})					*pathshorten()*
+		Shorten directory names in the path {expr} and return the
+		result.  The tail, the file name, is kept as-is.  The other
+		components in the path are reduced to single letters.  Leading
+		'~' and '.' characters are kept.  Example: >
+			:echo pathshorten('~/.vim/autoload/myfile.vim')
+<			~/.v/a/myfile.vim ~
+		It doesn't matter if the path exists or not.
+
+perleval({expr})					*perleval()*
+		Evaluate Perl expression {expr} in scalar context and return
+		its result converted to Vim data structures. If value can't be
+		converted, it is returned as a string Perl representation.
+		Note: If you want an array or hash, {expr} must return a
+		reference to it.
+		Example: >
+			:echo perleval('[1 .. 4]')
+<			[1, 2, 3, 4]
+		{only available when compiled with the |+perl| feature}
+
+pow({x}, {y})						*pow()*
+		Return the power of {x} to the exponent {y} as a |Float|.
+		{x} and {y} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo pow(3, 3)
+<			27.0 >
+			:echo pow(2, 16)
+<			65536.0 >
+			:echo pow(32, 0.20)
+<			2.0
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+prevnonblank({lnum})					*prevnonblank()*
+		Return the line number of the first line at or above {lnum}
+		that is not blank.  Example: >
+			let ind = indent(prevnonblank(v:lnum - 1))
+<		When {lnum} is invalid or there is no non-blank line at or
+		above it, zero is returned.
+		Also see |nextnonblank()|.
+
+
+printf({fmt}, {expr1} ...)				*printf()*
+		Return a String with {fmt}, where "%" items are replaced by
+		the formatted form of their respective arguments.  Example: >
+			printf("%4d: E%d %.30s", lnum, errno, msg)
+<		May result in:
+			"  99: E42 asdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfas" ~
+
+		Often used items are:
+		  %s	string
+		  %6S	string right-aligned in 6 display cells
+		  %6s	string right-aligned in 6 bytes
+		  %.9s	string truncated to 9 bytes
+		  %c	single byte
+		  %d	decimal number
+		  %5d	decimal number padded with spaces to 5 characters
+		  %x	hex number
+		  %04x	hex number padded with zeros to at least 4 characters
+		  %X	hex number using upper case letters
+		  %o	octal number
+		  %08b	binary number padded with zeros to at least 8 chars
+		  %f	floating point number as 12.23, inf, -inf or nan
+		  %F	floating point number as 12.23, INF, -INF or NAN
+		  %e	floating point number as 1.23e3, inf, -inf or nan
+		  %E	floating point number as 1.23E3, INF, -INF or NAN
+		  %g	floating point number, as %f or %e depending on value
+		  %G	floating point number, as %F or %E depending on value
+		  %%	the % character itself
+
+		Conversion specifications start with '%' and end with the
+		conversion type.  All other characters are copied unchanged to
+		the result.
+
+		The "%" starts a conversion specification.  The following
+		arguments appear in sequence:
+
+			%  [flags]  [field-width]  [.precision]  type
+
+		flags
+			Zero or more of the following flags:
+
+		    #	      The value should be converted to an "alternate
+			      form".  For c, d, and s conversions, this option
+			      has no effect.  For o conversions, the precision
+			      of the number is increased to force the first
+			      character of the output string to a zero (except
+			      if a zero value is printed with an explicit
+			      precision of zero).
+			      For b and B conversions, a non-zero result has
+			      the string "0b" (or "0B" for B conversions)
+			      prepended to it.
+			      For x and X conversions, a non-zero result has
+			      the string "0x" (or "0X" for X conversions)
+			      prepended to it.
+
+		    0 (zero)  Zero padding.  For all conversions the converted
+			      value is padded on the left with zeros rather
+			      than blanks.  If a precision is given with a
+			      numeric conversion (d, b, B, o, x, and X), the 0
+			      flag is ignored.
+
+		    -	      A negative field width flag; the converted value
+			      is to be left adjusted on the field boundary.
+			      The converted value is padded on the right with
+			      blanks, rather than on the left with blanks or
+			      zeros.  A - overrides a 0 if both are given.
+
+		    ' ' (space)  A blank should be left before a positive
+			      number produced by a signed conversion (d).
+
+		    +	      A sign must always be placed before a number
+			      produced by a signed conversion.  A + overrides
+			      a space if both are used.
+
+		field-width
+			An optional decimal digit string specifying a minimum
+			field width.  If the converted value has fewer bytes
+			than the field width, it will be padded with spaces on
+			the left (or right, if the left-adjustment flag has
+			been given) to fill out the field width.
+
+		.precision
+			An optional precision, in the form of a period '.'
+			followed by an optional digit string.  If the digit
+			string is omitted, the precision is taken as zero.
+			This gives the minimum number of digits to appear for
+			d, o, x, and X conversions, or the maximum number of
+			bytes to be printed from a string for s conversions.
+			For floating point it is the number of digits after
+			the decimal point.
+
+		type
+			A character that specifies the type of conversion to
+			be applied, see below.
+
+		A field width or precision, or both, may be indicated by an
+		asterisk '*' instead of a digit string.  In this case, a
+		Number argument supplies the field width or precision.  A
+		negative field width is treated as a left adjustment flag
+		followed by a positive field width; a negative precision is
+		treated as though it were missing.  Example: >
+			:echo printf("%d: %.*s", nr, width, line)
+<		This limits the length of the text used from "line" to
+		"width" bytes.
+
+		The conversion specifiers and their meanings are:
+
+				*printf-d* *printf-b* *printf-B* *printf-o*
+				*printf-x* *printf-X*
+		dbBoxX	The Number argument is converted to signed decimal
+			(d), unsigned binary (b and B), unsigned octal (o), or
+			unsigned hexadecimal (x and X) notation.  The letters
+			"abcdef" are used for x conversions; the letters
+			"ABCDEF" are used for X conversions.
+			The precision, if any, gives the minimum number of
+			digits that must appear; if the converted value
+			requires fewer digits, it is padded on the left with
+			zeros.
+			In no case does a non-existent or small field width
+			cause truncation of a numeric field; if the result of
+			a conversion is wider than the field width, the field
+			is expanded to contain the conversion result.
+			The 'h' modifier indicates the argument is 16 bits.
+			The 'l' modifier indicates the argument is 32 bits.
+			The 'L' modifier indicates the argument is 64 bits.
+			Generally, these modifiers are not useful. They are
+			ignored when type is known from the argument.
+
+		i	alias for d
+		D	alias for ld
+		U	alias for lu
+		O	alias for lo
+
+							*printf-c*
+		c	The Number argument is converted to a byte, and the
+			resulting character is written.
+
+							*printf-s*
+		s	The text of the String argument is used.  If a
+			precision is specified, no more bytes than the number
+			specified are used.
+			If the argument is not a String type, it is
+			automatically converted to text with the same format
+			as ":echo".
+							*printf-S*
+		S	The text of the String argument is used.  If a
+			precision is specified, no more display cells than the
+			number specified are used.  Without the |+multi_byte|
+			feature works just like 's'.
+
+							*printf-f* *E807*
+		f F	The Float argument is converted into a string of the
+			form 123.456.  The precision specifies the number of
+			digits after the decimal point.  When the precision is
+			zero the decimal point is omitted.  When the precision
+			is not specified 6 is used.  A really big number
+			(out of range or dividing by zero) results in "inf"
+			or "-inf" with %f (INF or -INF with %F).
+			"0.0 / 0.0" results in "nan" with %f (NAN with %F).
+			Example: >
+				echo printf("%.2f", 12.115)
+<				12.12
+			Note that roundoff depends on the system libraries.
+			Use |round()| when in doubt.
+
+							*printf-e* *printf-E*
+		e E	The Float argument is converted into a string of the
+			form 1.234e+03 or 1.234E+03 when using 'E'.  The
+			precision specifies the number of digits after the
+			decimal point, like with 'f'.
+
+							*printf-g* *printf-G*
+		g G	The Float argument is converted like with 'f' if the
+			value is between 0.001 (inclusive) and 10000000.0
+			(exclusive).  Otherwise 'e' is used for 'g' and 'E'
+			for 'G'.  When no precision is specified superfluous
+			zeroes and '+' signs are removed, except for the zero
+			immediately after the decimal point.  Thus 10000000.0
+			results in 1.0e7.
+
+							*printf-%*
+		%	A '%' is written.  No argument is converted.  The
+			complete conversion specification is "%%".
+
+		When a Number argument is expected a String argument is also
+		accepted and automatically converted.
+		When a Float or String argument is expected a Number argument
+		is also accepted and automatically converted.
+		Any other argument type results in an error message.
+
+							*E766* *E767*
+		The number of {exprN} arguments must exactly match the number
+		of "%" items.  If there are not sufficient or too many
+		arguments an error is given.  Up to 18 arguments can be used.
+
+
+prompt_setcallback({buf}, {expr})			*prompt_setcallback()*
+		Set prompt callback for buffer {buf} to {expr}.  When {expr}
+		is an empty string the callback is removed.  This has only
+		effect if {buf} has 'buftype' set to "prompt".
+
+		The callback is invoked when pressing Enter.  The current
+		buffer will always be the prompt buffer.  A new line for a
+		prompt is added before invoking the callback, thus the prompt
+		for which the callback was invoked will be in the last but one
+		line.
+		If the callback wants to add text to the buffer, it must
+		insert it above the last line, since that is where the current
+		prompt is.  This can also be done asynchronously.
+		The callback is invoked with one argument, which is the text
+		that was entered at the prompt.  This can be an empty string
+		if the user only typed Enter.
+		Example: >
+		   call prompt_setcallback(bufnr(''), function('s:TextEntered'))
+		   func s:TextEntered(text)
+		     if a:text == 'exit' || a:text == 'quit'
+		       stopinsert
+		       close
+		     else
+		       call append(line('$') - 1, 'Entered: "' . a:text . '"')
+		       " Reset 'modified' to allow the buffer to be closed.
+		       set nomodified
+		     endif
+		   endfunc
+
+prompt_setinterrupt({buf}, {expr})			*prompt_setinterrupt()*
+		Set a callback for buffer {buf} to {expr}.  When {expr} is an
+		empty string the callback is removed.  This has only effect if
+		{buf} has 'buftype' set to "prompt".
+
+		This callback will be invoked when pressing CTRL-C in Insert
+		mode.  Without setting a callback Vim will exit Insert mode,
+		as in any buffer.
+
+prompt_setprompt({buf}, {text})				*prompt_setprompt()*
+		Set prompt for buffer {buf} to {text}.  You most likely want
+		{text} to end in a space.
+		The result is only visible if {buf} has 'buftype' set to
+		"prompt".  Example: >
+			call prompt_setprompt(bufnr(''), 'command: ')
+<
+						*prop_add()* *E965*
+prop_add({lnum}, {col}, {props})
+		Attach a text property at position {lnum}, {col}.  {col} is
+		counted in bytes, use one for the first column.
+		If {lnum} is invalid an error is given. *E966*
+		If {col} is invalid an error is given. *E964*
+
+		{props} is a dictionary with these fields:
+		   length	length of text in bytes, can only be used
+				for a property that does not continue in
+				another line; can be zero
+		   end_lnum	line number for the end of text
+		   end_col	column just after the text; not used when
+				"length" is present; when {col} and "end_col"
+				are equal, and "end_lnum" is omitted or equal
+				to {lnum}, this is a zero-width text property
+		   bufnr	buffer to add the property to; when omitted
+				the current buffer is used
+		   id		user defined ID for the property; when omitted
+				zero is used
+		   type		name of the text property type
+		All fields except "type" are optional.
+
+		It is an error when both "length" and "end_lnum" or "end_col"
+		are given.  Either use "length" or "end_col" for a property
+		within one line, or use "end_lnum" and "end_col" for a
+		property that spans more than one line.
+		When neither "length" nor "end_col" are given the property
+		will be zero-width.  That means it will not be highlighted but
+		will move with the text, as a kind of mark.
+		The property can end exactly at the last character of the
+		text, or just after it.  In the last case, if text is appended
+		to the line, the text property size will increase, also when
+		the property type does not have "end_incl" set.
+
+		"type" will first be looked up in the buffer the property is
+		added to. When not found, the global property types are used.
+		If not found an error is given.
+
+		See |text-properties| for information about text properties.
+
+
+prop_clear({lnum} [, {lnum-end} [, {props}]])		*prop_clear()*
+		Remove all text properties from line {lnum}.
+		When {lnum-end} is given, remove all text properties from line
+		{lnum} to {lnum-end} (inclusive).
+
+		When {props} contains a "bufnr" item use this buffer,
+		otherwise use the current buffer.
+
+		See |text-properties| for information about text properties.
+
+							*prop_find()*
+prop_find({props} [, {direction}])
+		NOT IMPLEMENTED YET
+		Search for a text property as specified with {props}:
+		   id		property with this ID
+		   type		property with this type name
+		   bufnr	buffer to search in; when present a
+				start position with "lnum" and "col"
+				must be given; when omitted the
+				current buffer is used
+		   lnum		start in this line (when omitted start
+				at the cursor)
+		   col		start at this column (when omitted
+				and "lnum" is given: use column 1,
+				otherwise start at the cursor)
+		   skipstart	do not look for a match at the start
+				position
+
+		{direction} can be "f" for forward and "b" for backward.  When
+		omitted forward search is performed.
+
+		If a match is found then a Dict is returned with the entries
+		as with prop_list(), and additionally an "lnum" entry.
+		If no match is found then an empty Dict is returned.
+
+		See |text-properties| for information about text properties.
+
+
+prop_list({lnum} [, {props}])				*prop_list()*
+		Return a List with all text properties in line {lnum}.
+
+		When {props} contains a "bufnr" item, use this buffer instead
+		of the current buffer.
+
+		The properties are ordered by starting column and priority.
+		Each property is a Dict with these entries:
+		   col		starting column
+		   length	length in bytes, one more if line break is
+				included
+		   id		property ID
+		   type		name of the property type, omitted if
+				the type was deleted
+		   start	when TRUE property starts in this line
+		   end		when TRUE property ends in this line
+
+		When "start" is zero the property started in a previous line,
+		the current one is a continuation.
+		When "end" is zero the property continues in the next line.
+		The line break after this line is included.
+
+		See |text-properties| for information about text properties.
+
+
+						*prop_remove()* *E968*
+prop_remove({props} [, {lnum} [, {lnum-end}]])
+		Remove a matching text property from line {lnum}.  When
+		{lnum-end} is given, remove matching text properties from line
+		{lnum} to {lnum-end} (inclusive).
+		When {lnum} is omitted remove matching text properties from
+		all lines.
+
+		{props} is a dictionary with these fields:
+		   id		remove text properties with this ID
+		   type		remove text properties with this type name
+		   bufnr	use this buffer instead of the current one
+		   all		when TRUE remove all matching text properties,
+				not just the first one
+		A property matches when either "id" or "type" matches.
+
+		Returns the number of properties that were removed.
+
+		See |text-properties| for information about text properties.
+
+
+prop_type_add({name}, {props})		*prop_type_add()* *E969* *E970*
+		Add a text property type {name}.  If a property type with this
+		name already exists an error is given.
+		{props} is a dictionary with these optional fields:
+		   bufnr	define the property only for this buffer; this
+				avoids name collisions and automatically
+				clears the property types when the buffer is
+				deleted.
+		   highlight	name of highlight group to use
+		   priority	when a character has multiple text
+				properties the one with the highest priority
+				will be used; negative values can be used, the
+				default priority is zero
+		   start_incl	when TRUE inserts at the start position will
+				be included in the text property
+		   end_incl	when TRUE inserts at the end position will be
+				included in the text property
+
+		See |text-properties| for information about text properties.
+
+
+prop_type_change({name}, {props})			*prop_type_change()*
+		Change properties of an existing text property type.  If a
+		property with this name does not exist an error is given.
+		The {props} argument is just like |prop_type_add()|.
+
+		See |text-properties| for information about text properties.
+
+
+prop_type_delete({name} [, {props}])			*prop_type_delete()*
+		Remove the text property type {name}.  When text properties
+		using the type {name} are still in place, they will not have
+		an effect and can no longer be removed by name.
+
+		{props} can contain a "bufnr" item.  When it is given, delete
+		a property type from this buffer instead of from the global
+		property types.
+
+		When text property type {name} is not found there is no error.
+
+		See |text-properties| for information about text properties.
+
+
+prop_type_get([{name} [, {props}])			*prop_type_get()*
+		Returns the properties of property type {name}.  This is a
+		dictionary with the same fields as was given to
+		prop_type_add().
+		When the property type {name} does not exist, an empty
+		dictionary is returned.
+
+		{props} can contain a "bufnr" item.  When it is given, use
+		this buffer instead of the global property types.
+
+		See |text-properties| for information about text properties.
+
+
+prop_type_list([{props}])				*prop_type_list()*
+		Returns a list with all property type names.
+
+		{props} can contain a "bufnr" item.  When it is given, use
+		this buffer instead of the global property types.
+
+		See |text-properties| for information about text properties.
+
+
+pumvisible()						*pumvisible()*
+		Returns non-zero when the popup menu is visible, zero
+		otherwise.  See |ins-completion-menu|.
+		This can be used to avoid some things that would remove the
+		popup menu.
+
+py3eval({expr})						*py3eval()*
+		Evaluate Python expression {expr} and return its result
+		converted to Vim data structures.
+		Numbers and strings are returned as they are (strings are
+		copied though, Unicode strings are additionally converted to
+		'encoding').
+		Lists are represented as Vim |List| type.
+		Dictionaries are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type with
+		keys converted to strings.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+python3| feature}
+
+							*E858* *E859*
+pyeval({expr})						*pyeval()*
+		Evaluate Python expression {expr} and return its result
+		converted to Vim data structures.
+		Numbers and strings are returned as they are (strings are
+		copied though).
+		Lists are represented as Vim |List| type.
+		Dictionaries are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type,
+		non-string keys result in error.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+python| feature}
+
+pyxeval({expr})						*pyxeval()*
+		Evaluate Python expression {expr} and return its result
+		converted to Vim data structures.
+		Uses Python 2 or 3, see |python_x| and 'pyxversion'.
+		See also: |pyeval()|, |py3eval()|
+		{only available when compiled with the |+python| or the
+		|+python3| feature}
+
+							*E726* *E727*
+range({expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]])				*range()*
+		Returns a |List| with Numbers:
+		- If only {expr} is specified: [0, 1, ..., {expr} - 1]
+		- If {max} is specified: [{expr}, {expr} + 1, ..., {max}]
+		- If {stride} is specified: [{expr}, {expr} + {stride}, ...,
+		  {max}] (increasing {expr} with {stride} each time, not
+		  producing a value past {max}).
+		When the maximum is one before the start the result is an
+		empty list.  When the maximum is more than one before the
+		start this is an error.
+		Examples: >
+			range(4)		" [0, 1, 2, 3]
+			range(2, 4)		" [2, 3, 4]
+			range(2, 9, 3)		" [2, 5, 8]
+			range(2, -2, -1)	" [2, 1, 0, -1, -2]
+			range(0)		" []
+			range(2, 0)		" error!
+<
+							*readfile()*
+readfile({fname} [, {type} [, {max}]])
+		Read file {fname} and return a |List|, each line of the file
+		as an item.  Lines are broken at NL characters.  Macintosh
+		files separated with CR will result in a single long line
+		(unless a NL appears somewhere).
+		All NUL characters are replaced with a NL character.
+		When {type} contains "b" binary mode is used:
+		- When the last line ends in a NL an extra empty list item is
+		  added.
+		- No CR characters are removed.
+		When {type} contains "B" a |Blob| is returned with the binary
+		data of the file unmodified.
+		Otherwise:
+		- CR characters that appear before a NL are removed.
+		- Whether the last line ends in a NL or not does not matter.
+		- When 'encoding' is Unicode any UTF-8 byte order mark is
+		  removed from the text.
+		When {max} is given this specifies the maximum number of lines
+		to be read.  Useful if you only want to check the first ten
+		lines of a file: >
+			:for line in readfile(fname, '', 10)
+			:  if line =~ 'Date' | echo line | endif
+			:endfor
+<		When {max} is negative -{max} lines from the end of the file
+		are returned, or as many as there are.
+		When {max} is zero the result is an empty list.
+		Note that without {max} the whole file is read into memory.
+		Also note that there is no recognition of encoding.  Read a
+		file into a buffer if you need to.
+		When the file can't be opened an error message is given and
+		the result is an empty list.
+		Also see |writefile()|.
+
+reg_executing()						*reg_executing()*
+		Returns the single letter name of the register being executed.
+		Returns an empty string when no register is being executed.
+		See |@|.
+
+reg_recording()						*reg_recording()*
+		Returns the single letter name of the register being recorded.
+		Returns an empty string string when not recording.  See |q|.
+
+reltime([{start} [, {end}]])				*reltime()*
+		Return an item that represents a time value.  The format of
+		the item depends on the system.  It can be passed to
+		|reltimestr()| to convert it to a string  or |reltimefloat()|
+		to convert to a Float.
+		Without an argument it returns the current time.
+		With one argument is returns the time passed since the time
+		specified in the argument.
+		With two arguments it returns the time passed between {start}
+		and {end}.
+		The {start} and {end} arguments must be values returned by
+		reltime().
+		{only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature}
+
+reltimefloat({time})				*reltimefloat()*
+		Return a Float that represents the time value of {time}.
+		Example: >
+			let start = reltime()
+			call MyFunction()
+			let seconds = reltimefloat(reltime(start))
+<		See the note of reltimestr() about overhead.
+		Also see |profiling|.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature}
+
+reltimestr({time})				*reltimestr()*
+		Return a String that represents the time value of {time}.
+		This is the number of seconds, a dot and the number of
+		microseconds.  Example: >
+			let start = reltime()
+			call MyFunction()
+			echo reltimestr(reltime(start))
+<		Note that overhead for the commands will be added to the time.
+		The accuracy depends on the system.
+		Leading spaces are used to make the string align nicely.  You
+		can use split() to remove it. >
+			echo split(reltimestr(reltime(start)))[0]
+<		Also see |profiling|.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature}
+
+							*remote_expr()* *E449*
+remote_expr({server}, {string} [, {idvar} [, {timeout}]])
+		Send the {string} to {server}.  The string is sent as an
+		expression and the result is returned after evaluation.
+		The result must be a String or a |List|.  A |List| is turned
+		into a String by joining the items with a line break in
+		between (not at the end), like with join(expr, "\n").
+		If {idvar} is present and not empty, it is taken as the name
+		of a variable and a {serverid} for later use with
+		|remote_read()| is stored there.
+		If {timeout} is given the read times out after this many
+		seconds.  Otherwise a timeout of 600 seconds is used.
+		See also |clientserver| |RemoteReply|.
+		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
+		Note: Any errors will cause a local error message to be issued
+		and the result will be the empty string.
+
+		Variables will be evaluated in the global namespace,
+		independent of a function currently being active.  Except
+		when in debug mode, then local function variables and
+		arguments can be evaluated.
+
+		Examples: >
+			:echo remote_expr("gvim", "2+2")
+			:echo remote_expr("gvim1", "b:current_syntax")
+<
+
+remote_foreground({server})				*remote_foreground()*
+		Move the Vim server with the name {server} to the foreground.
+		This works like: >
+			remote_expr({server}, "foreground()")
+<		Except that on Win32 systems the client does the work, to work
+		around the problem that the OS doesn't always allow the server
+		to bring itself to the foreground.
+		Note: This does not restore the window if it was minimized,
+		like foreground() does.
+		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+		{only in the Win32, Athena, Motif and GTK GUI versions and the
+		Win32 console version}
+
+
+remote_peek({serverid} [, {retvar}])		*remote_peek()*
+		Returns a positive number if there are available strings
+		from {serverid}.  Copies any reply string into the variable
+		{retvar} if specified.  {retvar} must be a string with the
+		name of a variable.
+		Returns zero if none are available.
+		Returns -1 if something is wrong.
+		See also |clientserver|.
+		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
+		Examples: >
+			:let repl = ""
+			:echo "PEEK: ".remote_peek(id, "repl").": ".repl
+
+remote_read({serverid}, [{timeout}])			*remote_read()*
+		Return the oldest available reply from {serverid} and consume
+		it.  Unless a {timeout} in seconds is given, it blocks until a
+		reply is available.
+		See also |clientserver|.
+		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
+		Example: >
+			:echo remote_read(id)
+<
+							*remote_send()* *E241*
+remote_send({server}, {string} [, {idvar}])
+		Send the {string} to {server}.  The string is sent as input
+		keys and the function returns immediately.  At the Vim server
+		the keys are not mapped |:map|.
+		If {idvar} is present, it is taken as the name of a variable
+		and a {serverid} for later use with remote_read() is stored
+		there.
+		See also |clientserver| |RemoteReply|.
+		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
+
+		Note: Any errors will be reported in the server and may mess
+		up the display.
+		Examples: >
+		:echo remote_send("gvim", ":DropAndReply ".file, "serverid").
+		 \ remote_read(serverid)
+
+		:autocmd NONE RemoteReply *
+		 \ echo remote_read(expand("<amatch>"))
+		:echo remote_send("gvim", ":sleep 10 | echo ".
+		 \ 'server2client(expand("<client>"), "HELLO")<CR>')
+<
+					*remote_startserver()* *E941* *E942*
+remote_startserver({name})
+		Become the server {name}.  This fails if already running as a
+		server, when |v:servername| is not empty.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
+
+remove({list}, {idx} [, {end}])				*remove()*
+		Without {end}: Remove the item at {idx} from |List| {list} and
+		return the item.
+		With {end}: Remove items from {idx} to {end} (inclusive) and
+		return a List with these items.  When {idx} points to the same
+		item as {end} a list with one item is returned.  When {end}
+		points to an item before {idx} this is an error.
+		See |list-index| for possible values of {idx} and {end}.
+		Example: >
+			:echo "last item: " . remove(mylist, -1)
+			:call remove(mylist, 0, 9)
+<
+		Use |delete()| to remove a file.
+
+remove({blob}, {idx} [, {end}])
+		Without {end}: Remove the byte at {idx} from |Blob| {blob} and
+		return the byte.
+		With {end}: Remove bytes from {idx} to {end} (inclusive) and
+		return a |Blob| with these bytes.  When {idx} points to the same
+		byte as {end} a |Blob| with one byte is returned.  When {end}
+		points to a byte before {idx} this is an error.
+		Example: >
+			:echo "last byte: " . remove(myblob, -1)
+			:call remove(mylist, 0, 9)
+
+remove({dict}, {key})
+		Remove the entry from {dict} with key {key}.  Example: >
+			:echo "removed " . remove(dict, "one")
+<		If there is no {key} in {dict} this is an error.
+
+rename({from}, {to})					*rename()*
+		Rename the file by the name {from} to the name {to}.  This
+		should also work to move files across file systems.  The
+		result is a Number, which is 0 if the file was renamed
+		successfully, and non-zero when the renaming failed.
+		NOTE: If {to} exists it is overwritten without warning.
+		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+
+repeat({expr}, {count})					*repeat()*
+		Repeat {expr} {count} times and return the concatenated
+		result.  Example: >
+			:let separator = repeat('-', 80)
+<		When {count} is zero or negative the result is empty.
+		When {expr} is a |List| the result is {expr} concatenated
+		{count} times.  Example: >
+			:let longlist = repeat(['a', 'b'], 3)
+<		Results in ['a', 'b', 'a', 'b', 'a', 'b'].
+
+
+resolve({filename})					*resolve()* *E655*
+		On MS-Windows, when {filename} is a shortcut (a .lnk file),
+		returns the path the shortcut points to in a simplified form.
+		On Unix, repeat resolving symbolic links in all path
+		components of {filename} and return the simplified result.
+		To cope with link cycles, resolving of symbolic links is
+		stopped after 100 iterations.
+		On other systems, return the simplified {filename}.
+		The simplification step is done as by |simplify()|.
+		resolve() keeps a leading path component specifying the
+		current directory (provided the result is still a relative
+		path name) and also keeps a trailing path separator.
+
+							*reverse()*
+reverse({object})
+		Reverse the order of items in {object} in-place.
+		{object} can be a |List| or a |Blob|.
+		Returns {object}.
+		If you want an object to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
+			:let revlist = reverse(copy(mylist))
+
+round({expr})							*round()*
+		Round off {expr} to the nearest integral value and return it
+		as a |Float|.  If {expr} lies halfway between two integral
+		values, then use the larger one (away from zero).
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			echo round(0.456)
+<			0.0  >
+			echo round(4.5)
+<			5.0 >
+			echo round(-4.5)
+<			-5.0
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+screenattr({row}, {col})					*screenattr()*
+		Like |screenchar()|, but return the attribute.  This is a rather
+		arbitrary number that can only be used to compare to the
+		attribute at other positions.
+
+screenchar({row}, {col})					*screenchar()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the character at position
+		[row, col] on the screen.  This works for every possible
+		screen position, also status lines, window separators and the
+		command line.  The top left position is row one, column one
+		The character excludes composing characters.  For double-byte
+		encodings it may only be the first byte.
+		This is mainly to be used for testing.
+		Returns -1 when row or col is out of range.
+
+screencol()							*screencol()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the current screen column of
+		the cursor. The leftmost column has number 1.
+		This function is mainly used for testing.
+
+		Note: Always returns the current screen column, thus if used
+		in a command (e.g. ":echo screencol()") it will return the
+		column inside the command line, which is 1 when the command is
+		executed. To get the cursor position in the file use one of
+		the following mappings: >
+			nnoremap <expr> GG ":echom ".screencol()."\n"
+			nnoremap <silent> GG :echom screencol()<CR>
+<
+screenrow()							*screenrow()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the current screen row of the
+		cursor.  The top line has number one.
+		This function is mainly used for testing.
+		Alternatively you can use |winline()|.
+
+		Note: Same restrictions as with |screencol()|.
+
+search({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]])	*search()*
+		Search for regexp pattern {pattern}.  The search starts at the
+		cursor position (you can use |cursor()| to set it).
+
+		When a match has been found its line number is returned.
+		If there is no match a 0 is returned and the cursor doesn't
+		move.  No error message is given.
+
+		{flags} is a String, which can contain these character flags:
+		'b'	search Backward instead of forward
+		'c'	accept a match at the Cursor position
+		'e'	move to the End of the match
+		'n'	do Not move the cursor
+		'p'	return number of matching sub-Pattern (see below)
+		's'	Set the ' mark at the previous location of the cursor
+		'w'	Wrap around the end of the file
+		'W'	don't Wrap around the end of the file
+		'z'	start searching at the cursor column instead of zero
+		If neither 'w' or 'W' is given, the 'wrapscan' option applies.
+
+		If the 's' flag is supplied, the ' mark is set, only if the
+		cursor is moved. The 's' flag cannot be combined with the 'n'
+		flag.
+
+		'ignorecase', 'smartcase' and 'magic' are used.
+
+		When the 'z' flag is not given, searching always starts in
+		column zero and then matches before the cursor are skipped.
+		When the 'c' flag is present in 'cpo' the next search starts
+		after the match.  Without the 'c' flag the next search starts
+		one column further.
+
+		When the {stopline} argument is given then the search stops
+		after searching this line.  This is useful to restrict the
+		search to a range of lines.  Examples: >
+			let match = search('(', 'b', line("w0"))
+			let end = search('END', '', line("w$"))
+<		When {stopline} is used and it is not zero this also implies
+		that the search does not wrap around the end of the file.
+		A zero value is equal to not giving the argument.
+
+		When the {timeout} argument is given the search stops when
+		more than this many milliseconds have passed.  Thus when
+		{timeout} is 500 the search stops after half a second.
+		The value must not be negative.  A zero value is like not
+		giving the argument.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature}
+
+							*search()-sub-match*
+		With the 'p' flag the returned value is one more than the
+		first sub-match in \(\).  One if none of them matched but the
+		whole pattern did match.
+		To get the column number too use |searchpos()|.
+
+		The cursor will be positioned at the match, unless the 'n'
+		flag is used.
+
+		Example (goes over all files in the argument list): >
+		    :let n = 1
+		    :while n <= argc()	    " loop over all files in arglist
+		    :  exe "argument " . n
+		    :  " start at the last char in the file and wrap for the
+		    :  " first search to find match at start of file
+		    :  normal G$
+		    :  let flags = "w"
+		    :  while search("foo", flags) > 0
+		    :	 s/foo/bar/g
+		    :	 let flags = "W"
+		    :  endwhile
+		    :  update		    " write the file if modified
+		    :  let n = n + 1
+		    :endwhile
+<
+		Example for using some flags: >
+		    :echo search('\<if\|\(else\)\|\(endif\)', 'ncpe')
+<		This will search for the keywords "if", "else", and "endif"
+		under or after the cursor.  Because of the 'p' flag, it
+		returns 1, 2, or 3 depending on which keyword is found, or 0
+		if the search fails.  With the cursor on the first word of the
+		line:
+		    if (foo == 0) | let foo = foo + 1 | endif ~
+		the function returns 1.  Without the 'c' flag, the function
+		finds the "endif" and returns 3.  The same thing happens
+		without the 'e' flag if the cursor is on the "f" of "if".
+		The 'n' flag tells the function not to move the cursor.
+
+
+searchdecl({name} [, {global} [, {thisblock}]])			*searchdecl()*
+		Search for the declaration of {name}.
+
+		With a non-zero {global} argument it works like |gD|, find
+		first match in the file.  Otherwise it works like |gd|, find
+		first match in the function.
+
+		With a non-zero {thisblock} argument matches in a {} block
+		that ends before the cursor position are ignored.  Avoids
+		finding variable declarations only valid in another scope.
+
+		Moves the cursor to the found match.
+		Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure.
+		Example: >
+			if searchdecl('myvar') == 0
+			   echo getline('.')
+			endif
+<
+							*searchpair()*
+searchpair({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip}
+				[, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]])
+		Search for the match of a nested start-end pair.  This can be
+		used to find the "endif" that matches an "if", while other
+		if/endif pairs in between are ignored.
+		The search starts at the cursor.  The default is to search
+		forward, include 'b' in {flags} to search backward.
+		If a match is found, the cursor is positioned at it and the
+		line number is returned.  If no match is found 0 or -1 is
+		returned and the cursor doesn't move.  No error message is
+		given.
+
+		{start}, {middle} and {end} are patterns, see |pattern|.  They
+		must not contain \( \) pairs.  Use of \%( \) is allowed.  When
+		{middle} is not empty, it is found when searching from either
+		direction, but only when not in a nested start-end pair.  A
+		typical use is: >
+			searchpair('\<if\>', '\<else\>', '\<endif\>')
+<		By leaving {middle} empty the "else" is skipped.
+
+		{flags} 'b', 'c', 'n', 's', 'w' and 'W' are used like with
+		|search()|.  Additionally:
+		'r'	Repeat until no more matches found; will find the
+			outer pair.  Implies the 'W' flag.
+		'm'	Return number of matches instead of line number with
+			the match; will be > 1 when 'r' is used.
+		Note: it's nearly always a good idea to use the 'W' flag, to
+		avoid wrapping around the end of the file.
+
+		When a match for {start}, {middle} or {end} is found, the
+		{skip} expression is evaluated with the cursor positioned on
+		the start of the match.  It should return non-zero if this
+		match is to be skipped.  E.g., because it is inside a comment
+		or a string.
+		When {skip} is omitted or empty, every match is accepted.
+		When evaluating {skip} causes an error the search is aborted
+		and -1 returned.
+		{skip} can be a string, a lambda, a funcref or a partial.
+		Anything else makes the function fail.
+
+		For {stopline} and {timeout} see |search()|.
+
+		The value of 'ignorecase' is used.  'magic' is ignored, the
+		patterns are used like it's on.
+
+		The search starts exactly at the cursor.  A match with
+		{start}, {middle} or {end} at the next character, in the
+		direction of searching, is the first one found.  Example: >
+			if 1
+			  if 2
+			  endif 2
+			endif 1
+<		When starting at the "if 2", with the cursor on the "i", and
+		searching forwards, the "endif 2" is found.  When starting on
+		the character just before the "if 2", the "endif 1" will be
+		found.  That's because the "if 2" will be found first, and
+		then this is considered to be a nested if/endif from "if 2" to
+		"endif 2".
+		When searching backwards and {end} is more than one character,
+		it may be useful to put "\zs" at the end of the pattern, so
+		that when the cursor is inside a match with the end it finds
+		the matching start.
+
+		Example, to find the "endif" command in a Vim script: >
+
+	:echo searchpair('\<if\>', '\<el\%[seif]\>', '\<en\%[dif]\>', 'W',
+			\ 'getline(".") =~ "^\\s*\""')
+
+<		The cursor must be at or after the "if" for which a match is
+		to be found.  Note that single-quote strings are used to avoid
+		having to double the backslashes.  The skip expression only
+		catches comments at the start of a line, not after a command.
+		Also, a word "en" or "if" halfway a line is considered a
+		match.
+		Another example, to search for the matching "{" of a "}": >
+
+	:echo searchpair('{', '', '}', 'bW')
+
+<		This works when the cursor is at or before the "}" for which a
+		match is to be found.  To reject matches that syntax
+		highlighting recognized as strings: >
+
+	:echo searchpair('{', '', '}', 'bW',
+	     \ 'synIDattr(synID(line("."), col("."), 0), "name") =~? "string"')
+<
+							*searchpairpos()*
+searchpairpos({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip}
+				[, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]])
+		Same as |searchpair()|, but returns a |List| with the line and
+		column position of the match. The first element of the |List|
+		is the line number and the second element is the byte index of
+		the column position of the match.  If no match is found,
+		returns [0, 0]. >
+
+			:let [lnum,col] = searchpairpos('{', '', '}', 'n')
+<
+		See |match-parens| for a bigger and more useful example.
+
+searchpos({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]])	*searchpos()*
+		Same as |search()|, but returns a |List| with the line and
+		column position of the match. The first element of the |List|
+		is the line number and the second element is the byte index of
+		the column position of the match. If no match is found,
+		returns [0, 0].
+		Example: >
+	:let [lnum, col] = searchpos('mypattern', 'n')
+
+<		When the 'p' flag is given then there is an extra item with
+		the sub-pattern match number |search()-sub-match|.  Example: >
+	:let [lnum, col, submatch] = searchpos('\(\l\)\|\(\u\)', 'np')
+<		In this example "submatch" is 2 when a lowercase letter is
+		found |/\l|, 3 when an uppercase letter is found |/\u|.
+
+server2client({clientid}, {string})			*server2client()*
+		Send a reply string to {clientid}.  The most recent {clientid}
+		that sent a string can be retrieved with expand("<client>").
+		{only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
+		Note:
+		This id has to be stored before the next command can be
+		received.  I.e. before returning from the received command and
+		before calling any commands that waits for input.
+		See also |clientserver|.
+		Example: >
+			:echo server2client(expand("<client>"), "HELLO")
+<
+serverlist()					*serverlist()*
+		Return a list of available server names, one per line.
+		When there are no servers or the information is not available
+		an empty string is returned.  See also |clientserver|.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
+		Example: >
+			:echo serverlist()
+<
+setbufline({expr}, {lnum}, {text})			*setbufline()*
+		Set line {lnum} to {text} in buffer {expr}.  To insert
+		lines use |append()|.  Any text properties in {lnum} are
+		cleared.
+
+		For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()| above.
+
+		{lnum} is used like with |setline()|.
+		This works like |setline()| for the specified buffer.
+		On success 0 is returned, on failure 1 is returned.
+
+		If {expr} is not a valid buffer or {lnum} is not valid, an
+		error message is given.
+
+setbufvar({expr}, {varname}, {val})			*setbufvar()*
+		Set option or local variable {varname} in buffer {expr} to
+		{val}.
+		This also works for a global or local window option, but it
+		doesn't work for a global or local window variable.
+		For a local window option the global value is unchanged.
+		For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()| above.
+		Note that the variable name without "b:" must be used.
+		Examples: >
+			:call setbufvar(1, "&mod", 1)
+			:call setbufvar("todo", "myvar", "foobar")
+<		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+
+setcharsearch({dict})					*setcharsearch()*
+		Set the current character search information to {dict},
+		which contains one or more of the following entries:
+
+		    char	character which will be used for a subsequent
+				|,| or |;| command; an empty string clears the
+				character search
+		    forward	direction of character search; 1 for forward,
+				0 for backward
+		    until	type of character search; 1 for a |t| or |T|
+				character search, 0 for an |f| or |F|
+				character search
+
+		This can be useful to save/restore a user's character search
+		from a script: >
+			:let prevsearch = getcharsearch()
+			:" Perform a command which clobbers user's search
+			:call setcharsearch(prevsearch)
+<		Also see |getcharsearch()|.
+
+setcmdpos({pos})					*setcmdpos()*
+		Set the cursor position in the command line to byte position
+		{pos}.  The first position is 1.
+		Use |getcmdpos()| to obtain the current position.
+		Only works while editing the command line, thus you must use
+		|c_CTRL-\_e|, |c_CTRL-R_=| or |c_CTRL-R_CTRL-R| with '='.  For
+		|c_CTRL-\_e| and |c_CTRL-R_CTRL-R| with '=' the position is
+		set after the command line is set to the expression.  For
+		|c_CTRL-R_=| it is set after evaluating the expression but
+		before inserting the resulting text.
+		When the number is too big the cursor is put at the end of the
+		line.  A number smaller than one has undefined results.
+		Returns 0 when successful, 1 when not editing the command
+		line.
+
+setfperm({fname}, {mode})				*setfperm()* *chmod*
+		Set the file permissions for {fname} to {mode}.
+		{mode} must be a string with 9 characters.  It is of the form
+		"rwxrwxrwx", where each group of "rwx" flags represent, in
+		turn, the permissions of the owner of the file, the group the
+		file belongs to, and other users.  A '-' character means the
+		permission is off, any other character means on.  Multi-byte
+		characters are not supported.
+
+		For example "rw-r-----" means read-write for the user,
+		readable by the group, not accessible by others.  "xx-x-----"
+		would do the same thing.
+
+		Returns non-zero for success, zero for failure.
+
+		To read permissions see |getfperm()|.
+
+
+setline({lnum}, {text})					*setline()*
+		Set line {lnum} of the current buffer to {text}.  To insert
+		lines use |append()|. To set lines in another buffer use
+		|setbufline()|.  Any text properties in {lnum} are cleared.
+
+		{lnum} is used like with |getline()|.
+		When {lnum} is just below the last line the {text} will be
+		added as a new line.
+
+		If this succeeds, 0 is returned.  If this fails (most likely
+		because {lnum} is invalid) 1 is returned.
+
+		Example: >
+			:call setline(5, strftime("%c"))
+
+<		When {text} is a |List| then line {lnum} and following lines
+		will be set to the items in the list.  Example: >
+			:call setline(5, ['aaa', 'bbb', 'ccc'])
+<		This is equivalent to: >
+			:for [n, l] in [[5, 'aaa'], [6, 'bbb'], [7, 'ccc']]
+			:  call setline(n, l)
+			:endfor
+
+<		Note: The '[ and '] marks are not set.
+
+setloclist({nr}, {list} [, {action} [, {what}]])		*setloclist()*
+		Create or replace or add to the location list for window {nr}.
+		{nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
+		When {nr} is zero the current window is used.
+
+		For a location list window, the displayed location list is
+		modified.  For an invalid window number {nr}, -1 is returned.
+		Otherwise, same as |setqflist()|.
+		Also see |location-list|.
+
+		If the optional {what} dictionary argument is supplied, then
+		only the items listed in {what} are set. Refer to |setqflist()|
+		for the list of supported keys in {what}.
+
+setmatches({list})					*setmatches()*
+		Restores a list of matches saved by |getmatches()|.  Returns 0
+		if successful, otherwise -1.  All current matches are cleared
+		before the list is restored.  See example for |getmatches()|.
+
+							*setpos()*
+setpos({expr}, {list})
+		Set the position for {expr}.  Possible values:
+			.	the cursor
+			'x	mark x
+
+		{list} must be a |List| with four or five numbers:
+		    [bufnum, lnum, col, off]
+		    [bufnum, lnum, col, off, curswant]
+
+		"bufnum" is the buffer number.  Zero can be used for the
+		current buffer.  When setting an uppercase mark "bufnum" is
+		used for the mark position.  For other marks it specifies the
+		buffer to set the mark in.  You can use the |bufnr()| function
+		to turn a file name into a buffer number.
+		For setting the cursor and the ' mark "bufnum" is ignored,
+		since these are associated with a window, not a buffer.
+		Does not change the jumplist.
+
+		"lnum" and "col" are the position in the buffer.  The first
+		column is 1.  Use a zero "lnum" to delete a mark.  If "col" is
+		smaller than 1 then 1 is used.
+
+		The "off" number is only used when 'virtualedit' is set. Then
+		it is the offset in screen columns from the start of the
+		character.  E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last
+		character.
+
+		The "curswant" number is only used when setting the cursor
+		position.  It sets the preferred column for when moving the
+		cursor vertically.  When the "curswant" number is missing the
+		preferred column is not set.  When it is present and setting a
+		mark position it is not used.
+
+		Note that for '< and '> changing the line number may result in
+		the marks to be effectively be swapped, so that '< is always
+		before '>.
+
+		Returns 0 when the position could be set, -1 otherwise.
+		An error message is given if {expr} is invalid.
+
+		Also see |getpos()| and |getcurpos()|.
+
+		This does not restore the preferred column for moving
+		vertically; if you set the cursor position with this, |j| and
+		|k| motions will jump to previous columns!  Use |cursor()| to
+		also set the preferred column.  Also see the "curswant" key in
+		|winrestview()|.
+
+setqflist({list} [, {action} [, {what}]])		*setqflist()*
+		Create or replace or add to the quickfix list.
+
+		When {what} is not present, use the items in {list}.  Each
+		item must be a dictionary.  Non-dictionary items in {list} are
+		ignored.  Each dictionary item can contain the following
+		entries:
+
+		    bufnr	buffer number; must be the number of a valid
+				buffer
+		    filename	name of a file; only used when "bufnr" is not
+				present or it is invalid.
+		    module	name of a module; if given it will be used in
+				quickfix error window instead of the filename.
+		    lnum	line number in the file
+		    pattern	search pattern used to locate the error
+		    col		column number
+		    vcol	when non-zero: "col" is visual column
+				when zero: "col" is byte index
+		    nr		error number
+		    text	description of the error
+		    type	single-character error type, 'E', 'W', etc.
+		    valid	recognized error message
+
+		The "col", "vcol", "nr", "type" and "text" entries are
+		optional.  Either "lnum" or "pattern" entry can be used to
+		locate a matching error line.
+		If the "filename" and "bufnr" entries are not present or
+		neither the "lnum" or "pattern" entries are present, then the
+		item will not be handled as an error line.
+		If both "pattern" and "lnum" are present then "pattern" will
+		be used.
+		If the "valid" entry is not supplied, then the valid flag is
+		set when "bufnr" is a valid buffer or "filename" exists.
+		If you supply an empty {list}, the quickfix list will be
+		cleared.
+		Note that the list is not exactly the same as what
+		|getqflist()| returns.
+
+		{action} values:				*E927*
+		'a'	The items from {list} are added to the existing
+			quickfix list. If there is no existing list, then a
+			new list is created.
+
+		'r'	The items from the current quickfix list are replaced
+			with the items from {list}.  This can also be used to
+			clear the list: >
+				:call setqflist([], 'r')
+<
+		'f'	All the quickfix lists in the quickfix stack are
+			freed.
+
+		If {action} is not present or is set to ' ', then a new list
+		is created. The new quickfix list is added after the current
+		quickfix list in the stack and all the following lists are
+		freed. To add a new quickfix list at the end of the stack,
+		set "nr" in {what} to "$".
+
+		If the optional {what} dictionary argument is supplied, then
+		only the items listed in {what} are set. The first {list}
+		argument is ignored.  The following items can be specified in
+		{what}:
+		    context	quickfix list context. See |quickfix-context|
+		    efm		errorformat to use when parsing text from
+				"lines". If this is not present, then the
+				'errorformat' option value is used.
+				See |quickfix-parse|
+		    id		quickfix list identifier |quickfix-ID|
+		    idx		index of the current entry in the quickfix
+				list specified by 'id' or 'nr'. If set to '$',
+				then the last entry in the list is set as the
+				current entry.  See |quickfix-index|
+		    items	list of quickfix entries. Same as the {list}
+				argument.
+		    lines	use 'errorformat' to parse a list of lines and
+				add the resulting entries to the quickfix list
+				{nr} or {id}.  Only a |List| value is supported.
+				See |quickfix-parse|
+		    nr		list number in the quickfix stack; zero
+				means the current quickfix list and "$" means
+				the last quickfix list.
+		    title	quickfix list title text. See |quickfix-title|
+		Unsupported keys in {what} are ignored.
+		If the "nr" item is not present, then the current quickfix list
+		is modified. When creating a new quickfix list, "nr" can be
+		set to a value one greater than the quickfix stack size.
+		When modifying a quickfix list, to guarantee that the correct
+		list is modified, "id" should be used instead of "nr" to
+		specify the list.
+
+		Examples (See also |setqflist-examples|): >
+		   :call setqflist([], 'r', {'title': 'My search'})
+		   :call setqflist([], 'r', {'nr': 2, 'title': 'Errors'})
+		   :call setqflist([], 'a', {'id':qfid, 'lines':["F1:10:L10"]})
+<
+		Returns zero for success, -1 for failure.
+
+		This function can be used to create a quickfix list
+		independent of the 'errorformat' setting.  Use a command like
+		`:cc 1` to jump to the first position.
+
+
+							*setreg()*
+setreg({regname}, {value} [, {options}])
+		Set the register {regname} to {value}.
+		{value} may be any value returned by |getreg()|, including
+		a |List|.
+		If {options} contains "a" or {regname} is upper case,
+		then the value is appended.
+		{options} can also contain a register type specification:
+		    "c" or "v"	      |characterwise| mode
+		    "l" or "V"	      |linewise| mode
+		    "b" or "<CTRL-V>" |blockwise-visual| mode
+		If a number immediately follows "b" or "<CTRL-V>" then this is
+		used as the width of the selection - if it is not specified
+		then the width of the block is set to the number of characters
+		in the longest line (counting a <Tab> as 1 character).
+
+		If {options} contains no register settings, then the default
+		is to use character mode unless {value} ends in a <NL> for
+		string {value} and linewise mode for list {value}. Blockwise
+		mode is never selected automatically.
+		Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure.
+
+							*E883*
+		Note: you may not use |List| containing more than one item to
+		      set search and expression registers. Lists containing no
+		      items act like empty strings.
+
+		Examples: >
+			:call setreg(v:register, @*)
+			:call setreg('*', @%, 'ac')
+			:call setreg('a', "1\n2\n3", 'b5')
+
+<		This example shows using the functions to save and restore a
+		register: >
+			:let var_a = getreg('a', 1, 1)
+			:let var_amode = getregtype('a')
+			    ....
+			:call setreg('a', var_a, var_amode)
+<		Note: you may not reliably restore register value
+		without using the third argument to |getreg()| as without it
+		newlines are represented as newlines AND Nul bytes are
+		represented as newlines as well, see |NL-used-for-Nul|.
+
+		You can also change the type of a register by appending
+		nothing: >
+			:call setreg('a', '', 'al')
+
+settabvar({tabnr}, {varname}, {val})			*settabvar()*
+		Set tab-local variable {varname} to {val} in tab page {tabnr}.
+		|t:var|
+		Note that the variable name without "t:" must be used.
+		Tabs are numbered starting with one.
+		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+
+settabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}, {val})	*settabwinvar()*
+		Set option or local variable {varname} in window {winnr} to
+		{val}.
+		Tabs are numbered starting with one.  For the current tabpage
+		use |setwinvar()|.
+		{winnr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
+		When {winnr} is zero the current window is used.
+		This also works for a global or local buffer option, but it
+		doesn't work for a global or local buffer variable.
+		For a local buffer option the global value is unchanged.
+		Note that the variable name without "w:" must be used.
+		Examples: >
+			:call settabwinvar(1, 1, "&list", 0)
+			:call settabwinvar(3, 2, "myvar", "foobar")
+<		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+
+settagstack({nr}, {dict} [, {action}])			*settagstack()*
+		Modify the tag stack of the window {nr} using {dict}.
+		{nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
+
+		For a list of supported items in {dict}, refer to
+		|gettagstack()|
+							*E962*
+		If {action} is not present or is set to 'r', then the tag
+		stack is replaced. If {action} is set to 'a', then new entries
+		from {dict} are pushed onto the tag stack.
+
+		Returns zero for success, -1 for failure.
+
+		Examples:
+		    Set current index of the tag stack to 4: >
+			call settagstack(1005, {'curidx' : 4})
+
+<		    Empty the tag stack of window 3: >
+			call settagstack(3, {'items' : []})
+
+<		    Push a new item onto the tag stack: >
+			let pos = [bufnr('myfile.txt'), 10, 1, 0]
+			let newtag = [{'tagname' : 'mytag', 'from' : pos}]
+			call settagstack(2, {'items' : newtag}, 'a')
+
+<		    Save and restore the tag stack: >
+			let stack = gettagstack(1003)
+			" do something else
+			call settagstack(1003, stack)
+			unlet stack
+<
+setwinvar({nr}, {varname}, {val})			*setwinvar()*
+		Like |settabwinvar()| for the current tab page.
+		Examples: >
+			:call setwinvar(1, "&list", 0)
+			:call setwinvar(2, "myvar", "foobar")
+
+sha256({string})						*sha256()*
+		Returns a String with 64 hex characters, which is the SHA256
+		checksum of {string}.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+cryptv| feature}
+
+shellescape({string} [, {special}])			*shellescape()*
+		Escape {string} for use as a shell command argument.
+		On MS-Windows and MS-DOS, when 'shellslash' is not set, it
+		will enclose {string} in double quotes and double all double
+		quotes within {string}.
+		Otherwise it will enclose {string} in single quotes and
+		replace all "'" with "'\''".
+
+		When the {special} argument is present and it's a non-zero
+		Number or a non-empty String (|non-zero-arg|), then special
+		items such as "!", "%", "#" and "<cword>" will be preceded by
+		a backslash.  This backslash will be removed again by the |:!|
+		command.
+
+		The "!" character will be escaped (again with a |non-zero-arg|
+		{special}) when 'shell' contains "csh" in the tail.  That is
+		because for csh and tcsh "!" is used for history replacement
+		even when inside single quotes.
+
+		With a |non-zero-arg| {special} the <NL> character is also
+		escaped.  When 'shell' containing "csh" in the tail it's
+		escaped a second time.
+
+		Example of use with a |:!| command: >
+		    :exe '!dir ' . shellescape(expand('<cfile>'), 1)
+<		This results in a directory listing for the file under the
+		cursor.  Example of use with |system()|: >
+		    :call system("chmod +w -- " . shellescape(expand("%")))
+<		See also |::S|.
+
+
+shiftwidth([{col}])						*shiftwidth()*
+		Returns the effective value of 'shiftwidth'. This is the
+		'shiftwidth' value unless it is zero, in which case it is the
+		'tabstop' value.  This function was introduced with patch
+		7.3.694 in 2012, everybody should have it by now (however it
+		did not allow for the optional {col} argument until 8.1.542).
+
+		When there is one argument {col} this is used as column number
+		for which to return the 'shiftwidth' value. This matters for the
+		'vartabstop' feature. If the 'vartabstop' setting is enabled and
+		no {col} argument is given, column 1 will be assumed.
+
+sign_define({name} [, {dict}])				*sign_define()*
+		Define a new sign named {name} or modify the attributes of an
+		existing sign.  This is similar to the |:sign-define| command.
+
+		Prefix {name} with a unique text to avoid name collisions.
+		There is no {group} like with placing signs.
+
+		The {name} can be a String or a Number.  The optional {dict}
+		argument specifies the sign attributes.  The following values
+		are supported:
+		   icon		full path to the bitmap file for the sign.
+		   linehl	highlight group used for the whole line the
+				sign is placed in.
+		   text		text that is displayed when there is no icon
+				or the GUI is not being used.
+		   texthl	highlight group used for the text item
+
+		If the sign named {name} already exists, then the attributes
+		of the sign are updated.
+
+		Returns 0 on success and -1 on failure.
+
+		Examples: >
+			call sign_define("mySign", {"text" : "=>", "texthl" :
+					\ "Error", "linehl" : "Search"})
+<
+sign_getdefined([{name}])				*sign_getdefined()*
+		Get a list of defined signs and their attributes.
+		This is similar to the |:sign-list| command.
+
+		If the {name} is not supplied, then a list of all the defined
+		signs is returned. Otherwise the attribute of the specified
+		sign is returned.
+
+		Each list item in the returned value is a dictionary with the
+		following entries:
+		   icon		full path to the bitmap file of the sign
+		   linehl	highlight group used for the whole line the
+				sign is placed in.
+		   name		name of the sign
+		   text		text that is displayed when there is no icon
+				or the GUI is not being used.
+		   texthl	highlight group used for the text item
+
+		Returns an empty List if there are no signs and when {name} is
+		not found.
+
+		Examples: >
+			" Get a list of all the defined signs
+			echo sign_getdefined()
+
+			" Get the attribute of the sign named mySign
+			echo sign_getdefined("mySign")
+<
+sign_getplaced([{expr} [, {dict}]])			*sign_getplaced()*
+		Return a list of signs placed in a buffer or all the buffers.
+		This is similar to the |:sign-place-list| command.
+
+		If the optional buffer name {expr} is specified, then only the
+		list of signs placed in that buffer is returned.  For the use
+		of {expr}, see |bufname()|. The optional {dict} can contain
+		the following entries:
+		   group	select only signs in this group
+		   id		select sign with this identifier
+		   lnum		select signs placed in this line. For the use
+				of {lnum}, see |line()|.
+		If {group} is '*', then signs in all the groups including the
+		global group are returned. If {group} is not supplied or is an
+		empty string, then only signs in the global group are
+		returned.  If no arguments are supplied, then signs in the
+		global group placed in all the buffers are returned.
+		See |sign-group|.
+
+		Each list item in the returned value is a dictionary with the
+		following entries:
+			bufnr	number of the buffer with the sign
+			signs	list of signs placed in {bufnr}. Each list
+				item is a dictionary with the below listed
+				entries
+
+		The dictionary for each sign contains the following entries:
+			group	sign group. Set to '' for the global group.
+			id	identifier of the sign
+			lnum	line number where the sign is placed
+			name	name of the defined sign
+			priority	sign priority
+
+		The returned signs in a buffer are ordered by their line
+		number.
+
+		Returns an empty list on failure or if there are no placed
+		signs.
+
+		Examples: >
+			" Get a List of signs placed in eval.c in the
+			" global group
+			echo sign_getplaced("eval.c")
+
+			" Get a List of signs in group 'g1' placed in eval.c
+			echo sign_getplaced("eval.c", {'group' : 'g1'})
+
+			" Get a List of signs placed at line 10 in eval.c
+			echo sign_getplaced("eval.c", {'lnum' : 10})
+
+			" Get sign with identifier 10 placed in a.py
+			echo sign_getplaced("a.py", {'id' : 10})
+
+			" Get sign with id 20 in group 'g1' placed in a.py
+			echo sign_getplaced("a.py", {'group' : 'g1',
+							\  'id' : 20})
+
+			" Get a List of all the placed signs
+			echo sign_getplaced()
+<
+							*sign_jump()*
+sign_jump({id}, {group}, {expr})
+		Open the buffer {expr} or jump to the window that contains
+		{expr} and position the cursor at sign {id} in group {group}.
+		This is similar to the |:sign-jump| command.
+
+		For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()|.
+
+		Returns the line number of the sign. Returns -1 if the
+		arguments are invalid.
+
+		Example: >
+			" Jump to sign 10 in the current buffer
+			call sign_jump(10, '', '')
+<
+							*sign_place()*
+sign_place({id}, {group}, {name}, {expr} [, {dict}])
+		Place the sign defined as {name} at line {lnum} in file {expr}
+		and assign {id} and {group} to sign.  This is similar to the
+		|:sign-place| command.
+
+		If the sign identifier {id} is zero, then a new identifier is
+		allocated.  Otherwise the specified number is used. {group} is
+		the sign group name. To use the global sign group, use an
+		empty string.  {group} functions as a namespace for {id}, thus
+		two groups can use the same IDs. Refer to |sign-identifier|
+		and |sign-group| for more information.
+
+		{name} refers to a defined sign.
+		{expr} refers to a buffer name or number. For the accepted
+		values, see |bufname()|.
+
+		The optional {dict} argument supports the following entries:
+			lnum		line number in the buffer {expr} where
+					the sign is to be placed. For the
+					accepted values, see |line()|.
+			priority	priority of the sign. See
+					|sign-priority| for more information.
+
+		If the optional {dict} is not specified, then it modifies the
+		placed sign {id} in group {group} to use the defined sign
+		{name}.
+
+		Returns the sign identifier on success and -1 on failure.
+
+		Examples: >
+			" Place a sign named sign1 with id 5 at line 20 in
+			" buffer json.c
+			call sign_place(5, '', 'sign1', 'json.c',
+							\ {'lnum' : 20})
+
+			" Updates sign 5 in buffer json.c to use sign2
+			call sign_place(5, '', 'sign2', 'json.c')
+
+			" Place a sign named sign3 at line 30 in
+			" buffer json.c with a new identifier
+			let id = sign_place(0, '', 'sign3', 'json.c',
+							\ {'lnum' : 30})
+
+			" Place a sign named sign4 with id 10 in group 'g3'
+			" at line 40 in buffer json.c with priority 90
+			call sign_place(10, 'g3', 'sign4', 'json.c',
+					\ {'lnum' : 40, 'priority' : 90})
+<
+sign_undefine([{name}])					*sign_undefine()*
+		Deletes a previously defined sign {name}. This is similar to
+		the |:sign-undefine| command. If {name} is not supplied, then
+		deletes all the defined signs.
+
+		Returns 0 on success and -1 on failure.
+
+		Examples: >
+			" Delete a sign named mySign
+			call sign_undefine("mySign")
+
+			" Delete all the signs
+			call sign_undefine()
+<
+sign_unplace({group} [, {dict}])			*sign_unplace()*
+		Remove a previously placed sign in one or more buffers.  This
+		is similar to the |:sign-unplace| command.
+
+		{group} is the sign group name. To use the global sign group,
+		use an empty string.  If {group} is set to '*', then all the
+		groups including the global group are used.
+		The signs in {group} are selected based on the entries in
+		{dict}.  The following optional entries in {dict} are
+		supported:
+			buffer	buffer name or number. See |bufname()|.
+			id	sign identifier
+		If {dict} is not supplied, then all the signs in {group} are
+		removed.
+
+		Returns 0 on success and -1 on failure.
+
+		Examples: >
+			" Remove sign 10 from buffer a.vim
+			call sign_unplace('', {'buffer' : "a.vim", 'id' : 10})
+
+			" Remove sign 20 in group 'g1' from buffer 3
+			call sign_unplace('g1', {'buffer' : 3, 'id' : 20})
+
+			" Remove all the signs in group 'g2' from buffer 10
+			call sign_unplace('g2', {'buffer' : 10})
+
+			" Remove sign 30 in group 'g3' from all the buffers
+			call sign_unplace('g3', {'id' : 30})
+
+			" Remove all the signs placed in buffer 5
+			call sign_unplace('*', {'buffer' : 5})
+
+			" Remove the signs in group 'g4' from all the buffers
+			call sign_unplace('g4')
+
+			" Remove sign 40 from all the buffers
+			call sign_unplace('*', {'id' : 40})
+
+			" Remove all the placed signs from all the buffers
+			call sign_unplace('*')
+<
+simplify({filename})					*simplify()*
+		Simplify the file name as much as possible without changing
+		the meaning.  Shortcuts (on MS-Windows) or symbolic links (on
+		Unix) are not resolved.  If the first path component in
+		{filename} designates the current directory, this will be
+		valid for the result as well.  A trailing path separator is
+		not removed either.
+		Example: >
+			simplify("./dir/.././/file/") == "./file/"
+<		Note: The combination "dir/.." is only removed if "dir" is
+		a searchable directory or does not exist.  On Unix, it is also
+		removed when "dir" is a symbolic link within the same
+		directory.  In order to resolve all the involved symbolic
+		links before simplifying the path name, use |resolve()|.
+
+
+sin({expr})						*sin()*
+		Return the sine of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float|.
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo sin(100)
+<			-0.506366 >
+			:echo sin(-4.01)
+<			0.763301
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+sinh({expr})						*sinh()*
+		Return the hyperbolic sine of {expr} as a |Float| in the range
+		[-inf, inf].
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo sinh(0.5)
+<			0.521095 >
+			:echo sinh(-0.9)
+<			-1.026517
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+sort({list} [, {func} [, {dict}]])			*sort()* *E702*
+		Sort the items in {list} in-place.  Returns {list}.
+
+		If you want a list to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
+			:let sortedlist = sort(copy(mylist))
+
+<		When {func} is omitted, is empty or zero, then sort() uses the
+		string representation of each item to sort on.  Numbers sort
+		after Strings, |Lists| after Numbers.  For sorting text in the
+		current buffer use |:sort|.
+
+		When {func} is given and it is '1' or 'i' then case is
+		ignored.
+
+		When {func} is given and it is 'n' then all items will be
+		sorted numerical (Implementation detail: This uses the
+		strtod() function to parse numbers, Strings, Lists, Dicts and
+		Funcrefs will be considered as being 0).
+
+		When {func} is given and it is 'N' then all items will be
+		sorted numerical. This is like 'n' but a string containing
+		digits will be used as the number they represent.
+
+		When {func} is given and it is 'f' then all items will be
+		sorted numerical. All values must be a Number or a Float.
+
+		When {func} is a |Funcref| or a function name, this function
+		is called to compare items.  The function is invoked with two
+		items as argument and must return zero if they are equal, 1 or
+		bigger if the first one sorts after the second one, -1 or
+		smaller if the first one sorts before the second one.
+
+		{dict} is for functions with the "dict" attribute.  It will be
+		used to set the local variable "self". |Dictionary-function|
+
+		The sort is stable, items which compare equal (as number or as
+		string) will keep their relative position. E.g., when sorting
+		on numbers, text strings will sort next to each other, in the
+		same order as they were originally.
+
+		Also see |uniq()|.
+
+		Example: >
+			func MyCompare(i1, i2)
+			   return a:i1 == a:i2 ? 0 : a:i1 > a:i2 ? 1 : -1
+			endfunc
+			let sortedlist = sort(mylist, "MyCompare")
+<		A shorter compare version for this specific simple case, which
+		ignores overflow: >
+			func MyCompare(i1, i2)
+			   return a:i1 - a:i2
+			endfunc
+<
+							*soundfold()*
+soundfold({word})
+		Return the sound-folded equivalent of {word}.  Uses the first
+		language in 'spelllang' for the current window that supports
+		soundfolding.  'spell' must be set.  When no sound folding is
+		possible the {word} is returned unmodified.
+		This can be used for making spelling suggestions.  Note that
+		the method can be quite slow.
+
+							*spellbadword()*
+spellbadword([{sentence}])
+		Without argument: The result is the badly spelled word under
+		or after the cursor.  The cursor is moved to the start of the
+		bad word.  When no bad word is found in the cursor line the
+		result is an empty string and the cursor doesn't move.
+
+		With argument: The result is the first word in {sentence} that
+		is badly spelled.  If there are no spelling mistakes the
+		result is an empty string.
+
+		The return value is a list with two items:
+		- The badly spelled word or an empty string.
+		- The type of the spelling error:
+			"bad"		spelling mistake
+			"rare"		rare word
+			"local"		word only valid in another region
+			"caps"		word should start with Capital
+		Example: >
+			echo spellbadword("the quik brown fox")
+<			['quik', 'bad'] ~
+
+		The spelling information for the current window is used.  The
+		'spell' option must be set and the value of 'spelllang' is
+		used.
+
+							*spellsuggest()*
+spellsuggest({word} [, {max} [, {capital}]])
+		Return a |List| with spelling suggestions to replace {word}.
+		When {max} is given up to this number of suggestions are
+		returned.  Otherwise up to 25 suggestions are returned.
+
+		When the {capital} argument is given and it's non-zero only
+		suggestions with a leading capital will be given.  Use this
+		after a match with 'spellcapcheck'.
+
+		{word} can be a badly spelled word followed by other text.
+		This allows for joining two words that were split.  The
+		suggestions also include the following text, thus you can
+		replace a line.
+
+		{word} may also be a good word.  Similar words will then be
+		returned.  {word} itself is not included in the suggestions,
+		although it may appear capitalized.
+
+		The spelling information for the current window is used.  The
+		'spell' option must be set and the values of 'spelllang' and
+		'spellsuggest' are used.
+
+
+split({expr} [, {pattern} [, {keepempty}]])			*split()*
+		Make a |List| out of {expr}.  When {pattern} is omitted or
+		empty each white-separated sequence of characters becomes an
+		item.
+		Otherwise the string is split where {pattern} matches,
+		removing the matched characters. 'ignorecase' is not used
+		here, add \c to ignore case. |/\c|
+		When the first or last item is empty it is omitted, unless the
+		{keepempty} argument is given and it's non-zero.
+		Other empty items are kept when {pattern} matches at least one
+		character or when {keepempty} is non-zero.
+		Example: >
+			:let words = split(getline('.'), '\W\+')
+<		To split a string in individual characters: >
+			:for c in split(mystring, '\zs')
+<		If you want to keep the separator you can also use '\zs' at
+		the end of the pattern: >
+			:echo split('abc:def:ghi', ':\zs')
+<			['abc:', 'def:', 'ghi'] ~
+		Splitting a table where the first element can be empty: >
+			:let items = split(line, ':', 1)
+<		The opposite function is |join()|.
+
+
+sqrt({expr})						*sqrt()*
+		Return the non-negative square root of Float {expr} as a
+		|Float|.
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.  When {expr}
+		is negative the result is NaN (Not a Number).
+		Examples: >
+			:echo sqrt(100)
+<			10.0 >
+			:echo sqrt(-4.01)
+<			nan
+		"nan" may be different, it depends on system libraries.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+str2float({expr})					*str2float()*
+		Convert String {expr} to a Float.  This mostly works the same
+		as when using a floating point number in an expression, see
+		|floating-point-format|.  But it's a bit more permissive.
+		E.g., "1e40" is accepted, while in an expression you need to
+		write "1.0e40".  The hexadecimal form "0x123" is also
+		accepted, but not others, like binary or octal.
+		Text after the number is silently ignored.
+		The decimal point is always '.', no matter what the locale is
+		set to.  A comma ends the number: "12,345.67" is converted to
+		12.0.  You can strip out thousands separators with
+		|substitute()|: >
+			let f = str2float(substitute(text, ',', '', 'g'))
+<		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+str2nr({expr} [, {base}])				*str2nr()*
+		Convert string {expr} to a number.
+		{base} is the conversion base, it can be 2, 8, 10 or 16.
+		When {base} is omitted base 10 is used.  This also means that
+		a leading zero doesn't cause octal conversion to be used, as
+		with the default String to Number conversion.
+		When {base} is 16 a leading "0x" or "0X" is ignored.  With a
+		different base the result will be zero.  Similarly, when
+		{base} is 8 a leading "0" is ignored, and when {base} is 2 a
+		leading "0b" or "0B" is ignored.
+		Text after the number is silently ignored.
+
+
+strchars({expr} [, {skipcc}])					*strchars()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the number of characters
+		in String {expr}.
+		When {skipcc} is omitted or zero, composing characters are
+		counted separately.
+		When {skipcc} set to 1, Composing characters are ignored.
+		Also see |strlen()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strwidth()|.
+
+		{skipcc} is only available after 7.4.755.  For backward
+		compatibility, you can define a wrapper function: >
+		    if has("patch-7.4.755")
+		      function s:strchars(str, skipcc)
+			return strchars(a:str, a:skipcc)
+		      endfunction
+		    else
+		      function s:strchars(str, skipcc)
+			if a:skipcc
+			  return strlen(substitute(a:str, ".", "x", "g"))
+			else
+			  return strchars(a:str)
+			endif
+		      endfunction
+		    endif
+<
+strcharpart({src}, {start} [, {len}])			*strcharpart()*
+		Like |strpart()| but using character index and length instead
+		of byte index and length.
+		When a character index is used where a character does not
+		exist it is assumed to be one character.  For example: >
+			strcharpart('abc', -1, 2)
+<		results in 'a'.
+
+strdisplaywidth({expr} [, {col}])			*strdisplaywidth()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the number of display cells
+		String {expr} occupies on the screen when it starts at {col}.
+		When {col} is omitted zero is used.  Otherwise it is the
+		screen column where to start.  This matters for Tab
+		characters.
+		The option settings of the current window are used.  This
+		matters for anything that's displayed differently, such as
+		'tabstop' and 'display'.
+		When {expr} contains characters with East Asian Width Class
+		Ambiguous, this function's return value depends on 'ambiwidth'.
+		Also see |strlen()|, |strwidth()| and |strchars()|.
+
+strftime({format} [, {time}])				*strftime()*
+		The result is a String, which is a formatted date and time, as
+		specified by the {format} string.  The given {time} is used,
+		or the current time if no time is given.  The accepted
+		{format} depends on your system, thus this is not portable!
+		See the manual page of the C function strftime() for the
+		format.  The maximum length of the result is 80 characters.
+		See also |localtime()| and |getftime()|.
+		The language can be changed with the |:language| command.
+		Examples: >
+		  :echo strftime("%c")		   Sun Apr 27 11:49:23 1997
+		  :echo strftime("%Y %b %d %X")	   1997 Apr 27 11:53:25
+		  :echo strftime("%y%m%d %T")	   970427 11:53:55
+		  :echo strftime("%H:%M")	   11:55
+		  :echo strftime("%c", getftime("file.c"))
+						   Show mod time of file.c.
+<		Not available on all systems.  To check use: >
+			:if exists("*strftime")
+
+strgetchar({str}, {index})				*strgetchar()*
+		Get character {index} from {str}.  This uses a character
+		index, not a byte index.  Composing characters are considered
+		separate characters here.
+		Also see |strcharpart()| and |strchars()|.
+
+stridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}])		*stridx()*
+		The result is a Number, which gives the byte index in
+		{haystack} of the first occurrence of the String {needle}.
+		If {start} is specified, the search starts at index {start}.
+		This can be used to find a second match: >
+			:let colon1 = stridx(line, ":")
+			:let colon2 = stridx(line, ":", colon1 + 1)
+<		The search is done case-sensitive.
+		For pattern searches use |match()|.
+		-1 is returned if the {needle} does not occur in {haystack}.
+		See also |strridx()|.
+		Examples: >
+		  :echo stridx("An Example", "Example")	     3
+		  :echo stridx("Starting point", "Start")    0
+		  :echo stridx("Starting point", "start")   -1
+<						*strstr()* *strchr()*
+		stridx() works similar to the C function strstr().  When used
+		with a single character it works similar to strchr().
+
+							*string()*
+string({expr})	Return {expr} converted to a String.  If {expr} is a Number,
+		Float, String, Blob or a composition of them, then the result
+		can be parsed back with |eval()|.
+			{expr} type	result ~
+			String		'string' (single quotes are doubled)
+			Number		123
+			Float		123.123456 or 1.123456e8
+			Funcref		function('name')
+			Blob		0z00112233.44556677.8899
+			List		[item, item]
+			Dictionary	{key: value, key: value}
+
+		When a List or Dictionary has a recursive reference it is
+		replaced by "[...]" or "{...}".  Using eval() on the result
+		will then fail.
+
+		Also see |strtrans()|.
+
+							*strlen()*
+strlen({expr})	The result is a Number, which is the length of the String
+		{expr} in bytes.
+		If the argument is a Number it is first converted to a String.
+		For other types an error is given.
+		If you want to count the number of multi-byte characters use
+		|strchars()|.
+		Also see |len()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strwidth()|.
+
+strpart({src}, {start} [, {len}])			*strpart()*
+		The result is a String, which is part of {src}, starting from
+		byte {start}, with the byte length {len}.
+		To count characters instead of bytes use |strcharpart()|.
+
+		When bytes are selected which do not exist, this doesn't
+		result in an error, the bytes are simply omitted.
+		If {len} is missing, the copy continues from {start} till the
+		end of the {src}. >
+			strpart("abcdefg", 3, 2)    == "de"
+			strpart("abcdefg", -2, 4)   == "ab"
+			strpart("abcdefg", 5, 4)    == "fg"
+			strpart("abcdefg", 3)	    == "defg"
+
+<		Note: To get the first character, {start} must be 0.  For
+		example, to get three bytes under and after the cursor: >
+			strpart(getline("."), col(".") - 1, 3)
+<
+strridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}])			*strridx()*
+		The result is a Number, which gives the byte index in
+		{haystack} of the last occurrence of the String {needle}.
+		When {start} is specified, matches beyond this index are
+		ignored.  This can be used to find a match before a previous
+		match: >
+			:let lastcomma = strridx(line, ",")
+			:let comma2 = strridx(line, ",", lastcomma - 1)
+<		The search is done case-sensitive.
+		For pattern searches use |match()|.
+		-1 is returned if the {needle} does not occur in {haystack}.
+		If the {needle} is empty the length of {haystack} is returned.
+		See also |stridx()|.  Examples: >
+		  :echo strridx("an angry armadillo", "an")	     3
+<							*strrchr()*
+		When used with a single character it works similar to the C
+		function strrchr().
+
+strtrans({expr})					*strtrans()*
+		The result is a String, which is {expr} with all unprintable
+		characters translated into printable characters |'isprint'|.
+		Like they are shown in a window.  Example: >
+			echo strtrans(@a)
+<		This displays a newline in register a as "^@" instead of
+		starting a new line.
+
+strwidth({expr})					*strwidth()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the number of display cells
+		String {expr} occupies.  A Tab character is counted as one
+		cell, alternatively use |strdisplaywidth()|.
+		When {expr} contains characters with East Asian Width Class
+		Ambiguous, this function's return value depends on 'ambiwidth'.
+		Also see |strlen()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strchars()|.
+
+submatch({nr} [, {list}])			*submatch()* *E935*
+		Only for an expression in a |:substitute| command or
+		substitute() function.
+		Returns the {nr}'th submatch of the matched text.  When {nr}
+		is 0 the whole matched text is returned.
+		Note that a NL in the string can stand for a line break of a
+		multi-line match or a NUL character in the text.
+		Also see |sub-replace-expression|.
+
+		If {list} is present and non-zero then submatch() returns
+		a list of strings, similar to |getline()| with two arguments.
+		NL characters in the text represent NUL characters in the
+		text.
+		Only returns more than one item for |:substitute|, inside
+		|substitute()| this list will always contain one or zero
+		items, since there are no real line breaks.
+
+		When substitute() is used recursively only the submatches in
+		the current (deepest) call can be obtained.
+
+		Examples: >
+			:s/\d\+/\=submatch(0) + 1/
+			:echo substitute(text, '\d\+', '\=submatch(0) + 1', '')
+<		This finds the first number in the line and adds one to it.
+		A line break is included as a newline character.
+
+substitute({expr}, {pat}, {sub}, {flags})		*substitute()*
+		The result is a String, which is a copy of {expr}, in which
+		the first match of {pat} is replaced with {sub}.
+		When {flags} is "g", all matches of {pat} in {expr} are
+		replaced.  Otherwise {flags} should be "".
+
+		This works like the ":substitute" command (without any flags).
+		But the matching with {pat} is always done like the 'magic'
+		option is set and 'cpoptions' is empty (to make scripts
+		portable).  'ignorecase' is still relevant, use |/\c| or |/\C|
+		if you want to ignore or match case and ignore 'ignorecase'.
+		'smartcase' is not used.  See |string-match| for how {pat} is
+		used.
+
+		A "~" in {sub} is not replaced with the previous {sub}.
+		Note that some codes in {sub} have a special meaning
+		|sub-replace-special|.  For example, to replace something with
+		"\n" (two characters), use "\\\\n" or '\\n'.
+
+		When {pat} does not match in {expr}, {expr} is returned
+		unmodified.
+
+		Example: >
+		   :let &path = substitute(&path, ",\\=[^,]*$", "", "")
+<		This removes the last component of the 'path' option. >
+		   :echo substitute("testing", ".*", "\\U\\0", "")
+<		results in "TESTING".
+
+		When {sub} starts with "\=", the remainder is interpreted as
+		an expression. See |sub-replace-expression|.  Example: >
+		   :echo substitute(s, '%\(\x\x\)',
+			   \ '\=nr2char("0x" . submatch(1))', 'g')
+
+<		When {sub} is a Funcref that function is called, with one
+		optional argument.  Example: >
+		   :echo substitute(s, '%\(\x\x\)', SubNr, 'g')
+<		The optional argument is a list which contains the whole
+		matched string and up to nine submatches, like what
+		|submatch()| returns.  Example: >
+		   :echo substitute(s, '%\(\x\x\)', {m -> '0x' . m[1]}, 'g')
+
+swapinfo({fname})					*swapinfo()*
+		The result is a dictionary, which holds information about the
+		swapfile {fname}. The available fields are:
+			version Vim version
+			user	user name
+			host	host name
+			fname	original file name
+			pid	PID of the Vim process that created the swap
+				file
+			mtime	last modification time in seconds
+			inode	Optional: INODE number of the file
+			dirty	1 if file was modified, 0 if not
+		Note that "user" and "host" are truncated to at most 39 bytes.
+		In case of failure an "error" item is added with the reason:
+			Cannot open file: file not found or in accessible
+			Cannot read file: cannot read first block
+			Not a swap file: does not contain correct block ID
+			Magic number mismatch: Info in first block is invalid
+
+swapname({expr})					*swapname()*
+		The result is the swap file path of the buffer {expr}.
+		For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()| above.
+		If buffer {expr} is the current buffer, the result is equal to
+		|:swapname| (unless no swap file).
+		If buffer {expr} has no swap file, returns an empty string.
+
+synID({lnum}, {col}, {trans})				*synID()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the syntax ID at the position
+		{lnum} and {col} in the current window.
+		The syntax ID can be used with |synIDattr()| and
+		|synIDtrans()| to obtain syntax information about text.
+
+		{col} is 1 for the leftmost column, {lnum} is 1 for the first
+		line.  'synmaxcol' applies, in a longer line zero is returned.
+		Note that when the position is after the last character,
+		that's where the cursor can be in Insert mode, synID() returns
+		zero.
+
+		When {trans} is |TRUE|, transparent items are reduced to the
+		item that they reveal.  This is useful when wanting to know
+		the effective color.  When {trans} is |FALSE|, the transparent
+		item is returned.  This is useful when wanting to know which
+		syntax item is effective (e.g. inside parens).
+		Warning: This function can be very slow.  Best speed is
+		obtained by going through the file in forward direction.
+
+		Example (echoes the name of the syntax item under the cursor): >
+			:echo synIDattr(synID(line("."), col("."), 1), "name")
+<
+
+synIDattr({synID}, {what} [, {mode}])			*synIDattr()*
+		The result is a String, which is the {what} attribute of
+		syntax ID {synID}.  This can be used to obtain information
+		about a syntax item.
+		{mode} can be "gui", "cterm" or "term", to get the attributes
+		for that mode.  When {mode} is omitted, or an invalid value is
+		used, the attributes for the currently active highlighting are
+		used (GUI, cterm or term).
+		Use synIDtrans() to follow linked highlight groups.
+		{what}		result
+		"name"		the name of the syntax item
+		"fg"		foreground color (GUI: color name used to set
+				the color, cterm: color number as a string,
+				term: empty string)
+		"bg"		background color (as with "fg")
+		"font"		font name (only available in the GUI)
+				|highlight-font|
+		"sp"		special color (as with "fg") |highlight-guisp|
+		"fg#"		like "fg", but for the GUI and the GUI is
+				running the name in "#RRGGBB" form
+		"bg#"		like "fg#" for "bg"
+		"sp#"		like "fg#" for "sp"
+		"bold"		"1" if bold
+		"italic"	"1" if italic
+		"reverse"	"1" if reverse
+		"inverse"	"1" if inverse (= reverse)
+		"standout"	"1" if standout
+		"underline"	"1" if underlined
+		"undercurl"	"1" if undercurled
+		"strike"	"1" if strikethrough
+
+		Example (echoes the color of the syntax item under the
+		cursor): >
+	:echo synIDattr(synIDtrans(synID(line("."), col("."), 1)), "fg")
+<
+synIDtrans({synID})					*synIDtrans()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the translated syntax ID of
+		{synID}.  This is the syntax group ID of what is being used to
+		highlight the character.  Highlight links given with
+		":highlight link" are followed.
+
+synconcealed({lnum}, {col})				*synconcealed()*
+		The result is a List with currently three items:
+		1. The first item in the list is 0 if the character at the
+		   position {lnum} and {col} is not part of a concealable
+		   region, 1 if it is.
+		2. The second item in the list is a string. If the first item
+		   is 1, the second item contains the text which will be
+		   displayed in place of the concealed text, depending on the
+		   current setting of 'conceallevel' and 'listchars'.
+		3. The third and final item in the list is a number
+		   representing the specific syntax region matched in the
+		   line. When the character is not concealed the value is
+		   zero. This allows detection of the beginning of a new
+		   concealable region if there are two consecutive regions
+		   with the same replacement character.  For an example, if
+		   the text is "123456" and both "23" and "45" are concealed
+		   and replaced by the character "X", then:
+			call			returns ~
+			synconcealed(lnum, 1)   [0, '', 0]
+			synconcealed(lnum, 2)   [1, 'X', 1]
+			synconcealed(lnum, 3)   [1, 'X', 1]
+			synconcealed(lnum, 4)   [1, 'X', 2]
+			synconcealed(lnum, 5)   [1, 'X', 2]
+			synconcealed(lnum, 6)   [0, '', 0]
+
+
+synstack({lnum}, {col})					*synstack()*
+		Return a |List|, which is the stack of syntax items at the
+		position {lnum} and {col} in the current window.  Each item in
+		the List is an ID like what |synID()| returns.
+		The first item in the List is the outer region, following are
+		items contained in that one.  The last one is what |synID()|
+		returns, unless not the whole item is highlighted or it is a
+		transparent item.
+		This function is useful for debugging a syntax file.
+		Example that shows the syntax stack under the cursor: >
+			for id in synstack(line("."), col("."))
+			   echo synIDattr(id, "name")
+			endfor
+<		When the position specified with {lnum} and {col} is invalid
+		nothing is returned.  The position just after the last
+		character in a line and the first column in an empty line are
+		valid positions.
+
+system({expr} [, {input}])				*system()* *E677*
+		Get the output of the shell command {expr} as a string.  See
+		|systemlist()| to get the output as a List.
+
+		When {input} is given and is a string this string is written
+		to a file and passed as stdin to the command.  The string is
+		written as-is, you need to take care of using the correct line
+		separators yourself.
+		If {input} is given and is a |List| it is written to the file
+		in a way |writefile()| does with {binary} set to "b" (i.e.
+		with a newline between each list item with newlines inside
+		list items converted to NULs).
+		When {input} is given and is a number that is a valid id for
+		an existing buffer then the content of the buffer is written
+		to the file line by line, each line terminated by a NL and
+		NULs characters where the text has a NL.
+
+		Pipes are not used, the 'shelltemp' option is not used.
+
+		When prepended by |:silent| the terminal will not be set to
+		cooked mode.  This is meant to be used for commands that do
+		not need the user to type.  It avoids stray characters showing
+		up on the screen which require |CTRL-L| to remove. >
+			:silent let f = system('ls *.vim')
+<
+		Note: Use |shellescape()| or |::S| with |expand()| or
+		|fnamemodify()| to escape special characters in a command
+		argument.  Newlines in {expr} may cause the command to fail.
+		The characters in 'shellquote' and 'shellxquote' may also
+		cause trouble.
+		This is not to be used for interactive commands.
+
+		The result is a String.  Example: >
+		    :let files = system("ls " .  shellescape(expand('%:h')))
+		    :let files = system('ls ' . expand('%:h:S'))
+
+<		To make the result more system-independent, the shell output
+		is filtered to replace <CR> with <NL> for Macintosh, and
+		<CR><NL> with <NL> for DOS-like systems.
+		To avoid the string being truncated at a NUL, all NUL
+		characters are replaced with SOH (0x01).
+
+		The command executed is constructed using several options:
+	'shell' 'shellcmdflag' 'shellxquote' {expr} 'shellredir' {tmp} 'shellxquote'
+		({tmp} is an automatically generated file name).
+		For Unix and OS/2 braces are put around {expr} to allow for
+		concatenated commands.
+
+		The command will be executed in "cooked" mode, so that a
+		CTRL-C will interrupt the command (on Unix at least).
+
+		The resulting error code can be found in |v:shell_error|.
+		This function will fail in |restricted-mode|.
+
+		Note that any wrong value in the options mentioned above may
+		make the function fail.  It has also been reported to fail
+		when using a security agent application.
+		Unlike ":!cmd" there is no automatic check for changed files.
+		Use |:checktime| to force a check.
+
+
+systemlist({expr} [, {input}])				*systemlist()*
+		Same as |system()|, but returns a |List| with lines (parts of
+		output separated by NL) with NULs transformed into NLs. Output
+		is the same as |readfile()| will output with {binary} argument
+		set to "b".  Note that on MS-Windows you may get trailing CR
+		characters.
+
+		Returns an empty string on error.
+
+
+tabpagebuflist([{arg}])					*tabpagebuflist()*
+		The result is a |List|, where each item is the number of the
+		buffer associated with each window in the current tab page.
+		{arg} specifies the number of the tab page to be used. When
+		omitted the current tab page is used.
+		When {arg} is invalid the number zero is returned.
+		To get a list of all buffers in all tabs use this: >
+			let buflist = []
+			for i in range(tabpagenr('$'))
+			   call extend(buflist, tabpagebuflist(i + 1))
+			endfor
+<		Note that a buffer may appear in more than one window.
+
+
+tabpagenr([{arg}])					*tabpagenr()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the number of the current
+		tab page.  The first tab page has number 1.
+		When the optional argument is "$", the number of the last tab
+		page is returned (the tab page count).
+		The number can be used with the |:tab| command.
+
+
+tabpagewinnr({tabarg} [, {arg}])			*tabpagewinnr()*
+		Like |winnr()| but for tab page {tabarg}.
+		{tabarg} specifies the number of tab page to be used.
+		{arg} is used like with |winnr()|:
+		- When omitted the current window number is returned.  This is
+		  the window which will be used when going to this tab page.
+		- When "$" the number of windows is returned.
+		- When "#" the previous window nr is returned.
+		Useful examples: >
+		    tabpagewinnr(1)	    " current window of tab page 1
+		    tabpagewinnr(4, '$')    " number of windows in tab page 4
+<		When {tabarg} is invalid zero is returned.
+
+							*tagfiles()*
+tagfiles()	Returns a |List| with the file names used to search for tags
+		for the current buffer.  This is the 'tags' option expanded.
+
+
+taglist({expr} [, {filename}])				*taglist()*
+		Returns a list of tags matching the regular expression {expr}.
+
+		If {filename} is passed it is used to prioritize the results
+		in the same way that |:tselect| does. See |tag-priority|.
+		{filename} should be the full path of the file.
+
+		Each list item is a dictionary with at least the following
+		entries:
+			name		Name of the tag.
+			filename	Name of the file where the tag is
+					defined.  It is either relative to the
+					current directory or a full path.
+			cmd		Ex command used to locate the tag in
+					the file.
+			kind		Type of the tag.  The value for this
+					entry depends on the language specific
+					kind values.  Only available when
+					using a tags file generated by
+					Exuberant ctags or hdrtag.
+			static		A file specific tag.  Refer to
+					|static-tag| for more information.
+		More entries may be present, depending on the content of the
+		tags file: access, implementation, inherits and signature.
+		Refer to the ctags documentation for information about these
+		fields.  For C code the fields "struct", "class" and "enum"
+		may appear, they give the name of the entity the tag is
+		contained in.
+
+		The ex-command "cmd" can be either an ex search pattern, a
+		line number or a line number followed by a byte number.
+
+		If there are no matching tags, then an empty list is returned.
+
+		To get an exact tag match, the anchors '^' and '$' should be
+		used in {expr}.  This also make the function work faster.
+		Refer to |tag-regexp| for more information about the tag
+		search regular expression pattern.
+
+		Refer to |'tags'| for information about how the tags file is
+		located by Vim. Refer to |tags-file-format| for the format of
+		the tags file generated by the different ctags tools.
+
+tan({expr})						*tan()*
+		Return the tangent of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float|
+		in the range [-inf, inf].
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo tan(10)
+<			0.648361 >
+			:echo tan(-4.01)
+<			-1.181502
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+tanh({expr})						*tanh()*
+		Return the hyperbolic tangent of {expr} as a |Float| in the
+		range [-1, 1].
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo tanh(0.5)
+<			0.462117 >
+			:echo tanh(-1)
+<			-0.761594
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+tempname()					*tempname()* *temp-file-name*
+		The result is a String, which is the name of a file that
+		doesn't exist.  It can be used for a temporary file.  The name
+		is different for at least 26 consecutive calls.  Example: >
+			:let tmpfile = tempname()
+			:exe "redir > " . tmpfile
+<		For Unix, the file will be in a private directory |tempfile|.
+		For MS-Windows forward slashes are used when the 'shellslash'
+		option is set or when 'shellcmdflag' starts with '-'.
+
+							*term_dumpdiff()*
+term_dumpdiff({filename}, {filename} [, {options}])
+		Open a new window displaying the difference between the two
+		files.  The files must have been created with
+		|term_dumpwrite()|.
+		Returns the buffer number or zero when the diff fails.
+		Also see |terminal-diff|.
+		NOTE: this does not work with double-width characters yet.
+
+		The top part of the buffer contains the contents of the first
+		file, the bottom part of the buffer contains the contents of
+		the second file.  The middle part shows the differences.
+		The parts are separated by a line of equals.
+
+		If the {options} argument is present, it must be a Dict with
+		these possible members:
+		   "term_name"	     name to use for the buffer name, instead
+				     of the first file name.
+		   "term_rows"	     vertical size to use for the terminal,
+				     instead of using 'termwinsize'
+		   "term_cols"	     horizontal size to use for the terminal,
+				     instead of using 'termwinsize'
+		   "vertical"	     split the window vertically
+		   "curwin"	     use the current window, do not split the
+				     window; fails if the current buffer
+				     cannot be |abandon|ed
+		   "norestore"	     do not add the terminal window to a
+				     session file
+
+		Each character in the middle part indicates a difference. If
+		there are multiple differences only the first in this list is
+		used:
+			X	different character
+			w	different width
+			f	different foreground color
+			b	different background color
+			a	different attribute
+			+	missing position in first file
+			-	missing position in second file
+
+		Using the "s" key the top and bottom parts are swapped.  This
+		makes it easy to spot a difference.
+
+							*term_dumpload()*
+term_dumpload({filename} [, {options}])
+		Open a new window displaying the contents of {filename}
+		The file must have been created with |term_dumpwrite()|.
+		Returns the buffer number or zero when it fails.
+		Also see |terminal-diff|.
+
+		For {options} see |term_dumpdiff()|.
+
+							*term_dumpwrite()*
+term_dumpwrite({buf}, {filename} [, {options}])
+		Dump the contents of the terminal screen of {buf} in the file
+		{filename}.  This uses a format that can be used with
+		|term_dumpload()| and |term_dumpdiff()|.
+		If the job in the terminal already finished an error is given:
+		*E958*
+		If {filename} already exists an error is given:	*E953*
+		Also see |terminal-diff|.
+
+		{options} is a dictionary with these optional entries:
+			"rows"		maximum number of rows to dump
+			"columns"	maximum number of columns to dump
+
+term_getaltscreen({buf})				*term_getaltscreen()*
+		Returns 1 if the terminal of {buf} is using the alternate
+		screen.
+		{buf} is used as with |term_getsize()|.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_getansicolors({buf})				*term_getansicolors()*
+		Get the ANSI color palette in use by terminal {buf}.
+		Returns a List of length 16 where each element is a String
+		representing a color in hexadecimal "#rrggbb" format.
+		Also see |term_setansicolors()| and |g:terminal_ansi_colors|.
+		If neither was used returns the default colors.
+
+		{buf} is used as with |term_getsize()|.  If the buffer does not
+		exist or is not a terminal window, an empty list is returned.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature and
+		with GUI enabled and/or the |+termguicolors| feature}
+
+term_getattr({attr}, {what})				*term_getattr()*
+		Given {attr}, a value returned by term_scrape() in the "attr"
+		item, return whether {what} is on.  {what} can be one of:
+			bold
+			italic
+			underline
+			strike
+			reverse
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_getcursor({buf})					*term_getcursor()*
+		Get the cursor position of terminal {buf}. Returns a list with
+		two numbers and a dictionary: [row, col, dict].
+
+		"row" and "col" are one based, the first screen cell is row
+		1, column 1.  This is the cursor position of the terminal
+		itself, not of the Vim window.
+
+		"dict" can have these members:
+		   "visible"	one when the cursor is visible, zero when it
+				is hidden.
+		   "blink"	one when the cursor is blinking, zero when it
+				is not blinking.
+		   "shape"	1 for a block cursor, 2 for underline and 3
+				for a vertical bar.
+
+		{buf} must be the buffer number of a terminal window. If the
+		buffer does not exist or is not a terminal window, an empty
+		list is returned.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_getjob({buf})					*term_getjob()*
+		Get the Job associated with terminal window {buf}.
+		{buf} is used as with |term_getsize()|.
+		Returns |v:null| when there is no job.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_getline({buf}, {row})				*term_getline()*
+		Get a line of text from the terminal window of {buf}.
+		{buf} is used as with |term_getsize()|.
+
+		The first line has {row} one.  When {row} is "." the cursor
+		line is used.  When {row} is invalid an empty string is
+		returned.
+
+		To get attributes of each character use |term_scrape()|.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_getscrolled({buf})					*term_getscrolled()*
+		Return the number of lines that scrolled to above the top of
+		terminal {buf}.  This is the offset between the row number
+		used for |term_getline()| and |getline()|, so that: >
+			term_getline(buf, N)
+<		is equal to: >
+			getline(N + term_getscrolled(buf))
+<		(if that line exists).
+
+		{buf} is used as with |term_getsize()|.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_getsize({buf})					*term_getsize()*
+		Get the size of terminal {buf}. Returns a list with two
+		numbers: [rows, cols].  This is the size of the terminal, not
+		the window containing the terminal.
+
+		{buf} must be the buffer number of a terminal window.  Use an
+		empty string for the current buffer.  If the buffer does not
+		exist or is not a terminal window, an empty list is returned.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_getstatus({buf})					*term_getstatus()*
+		Get the status of terminal {buf}. This returns a comma
+		separated list of these items:
+			running		job is running
+			finished	job has finished
+			normal		in Terminal-Normal mode
+		One of "running" or "finished" is always present.
+
+		{buf} must be the buffer number of a terminal window. If the
+		buffer does not exist or is not a terminal window, an empty
+		string is returned.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_gettitle({buf})					*term_gettitle()*
+		Get the title of terminal {buf}. This is the title that the
+		job in the terminal has set.
+
+		{buf} must be the buffer number of a terminal window. If the
+		buffer does not exist or is not a terminal window, an empty
+		string is returned.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_gettty({buf} [, {input}])				*term_gettty()*
+		Get the name of the controlling terminal associated with
+		terminal window {buf}.  {buf} is used as with |term_getsize()|.
+
+		When {input} is omitted or 0, return the name for writing
+		(stdout). When {input} is 1 return the name for reading
+		(stdin). On UNIX, both return same name.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_list()						*term_list()*
+		Return a list with the buffer numbers of all buffers for
+		terminal windows.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_scrape({buf}, {row})				*term_scrape()*
+		Get the contents of {row} of terminal screen of {buf}.
+		For {buf} see |term_getsize()|.
+
+		The first line has {row} one.  When {row} is "." the cursor
+		line is used.  When {row} is invalid an empty string is
+		returned.
+
+		Return a List containing a Dict for each screen cell:
+		    "chars"	character(s) at the cell
+		    "fg"	foreground color as #rrggbb
+		    "bg"	background color as #rrggbb
+		    "attr"	attributes of the cell, use |term_getattr()|
+				to get the individual flags
+		    "width"	cell width: 1 or 2
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_sendkeys({buf}, {keys})				*term_sendkeys()*
+		Send keystrokes {keys} to terminal {buf}.
+		{buf} is used as with |term_getsize()|.
+
+		{keys} are translated as key sequences. For example, "\<c-x>"
+		means the character CTRL-X.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_setansicolors({buf}, {colors})			*term_setansicolors()*
+		Set the ANSI color palette used by terminal {buf}.
+		{colors} must be a List of 16 valid color names or hexadecimal
+		color codes, like those accepted by |highlight-guifg|.
+		Also see |term_getansicolors()| and |g:terminal_ansi_colors|.
+
+		The colors normally are:
+			0    black
+			1    dark red
+			2    dark green
+			3    brown
+			4    dark blue
+			5    dark magenta
+			6    dark cyan
+			7    light grey
+			8    dark grey
+			9    red
+			10   green
+			11   yellow
+			12   blue
+			13   magenta
+			14   cyan
+			15   white
+
+		These colors are used in the GUI and in the terminal when
+		'termguicolors' is set.  When not using GUI colors (GUI mode
+		or 'termguicolors'), the terminal window always uses the 16
+		ANSI colors of the underlying terminal.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature and
+		with GUI enabled and/or the |+termguicolors| feature}
+
+term_setkill({buf}, {how})				*term_setkill()*
+		When exiting Vim or trying to close the terminal window in
+		another way, {how} defines whether the job in the terminal can
+		be stopped.
+		When {how} is empty (the default), the job will not be
+		stopped, trying to exit will result in |E947|.
+		Otherwise, {how} specifies what signal to send to the job.
+		See |job_stop()| for the values.
+
+		After sending the signal Vim will wait for up to a second to
+		check that the job actually stopped.
+
+term_setrestore({buf}, {command})			*term_setrestore()*
+		Set the command to write in a session file to restore the job
+		in this terminal.  The line written in the session file is: >
+			terminal ++curwin ++cols=%d ++rows=%d {command}
+<		Make sure to escape the command properly.
+
+		Use an empty {command} to run 'shell'.
+		Use "NONE" to not restore this window.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_setsize({buf}, {rows}, {cols})		*term_setsize()* *E955*
+		Set the size of terminal {buf}. The size of the window
+		containing the terminal will also be adjusted, if possible.
+		If {rows} or {cols} is zero or negative, that dimension is not
+		changed.
+
+		{buf} must be the buffer number of a terminal window.  Use an
+		empty string for the current buffer.  If the buffer does not
+		exist or is not a terminal window, an error is given.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_start({cmd}, {options})				*term_start()*
+		Open a terminal window and run {cmd} in it.
+
+		{cmd} can be a string or a List, like with |job_start()|. The
+		string "NONE" can be used to open a terminal window without
+		starting a job, the pty of the terminal can be used by a
+		command like gdb.
+
+		Returns the buffer number of the terminal window.  If {cmd}
+		cannot be executed the window does open and shows an error
+		message.
+		If opening the window fails zero is returned.
+
+		{options} are similar to what is used for |job_start()|, see
+		|job-options|.  However, not all options can be used.  These
+		are supported:
+		   all timeout options
+		   "stoponexit", "cwd", "env"
+		   "callback", "out_cb", "err_cb", "exit_cb", "close_cb"
+		   "in_io", "in_top", "in_bot", "in_name", "in_buf"
+		   "out_io", "out_name", "out_buf", "out_modifiable", "out_msg"
+		   "err_io", "err_name", "err_buf", "err_modifiable", "err_msg"
+		However, at least one of stdin, stdout or stderr must be
+		connected to the terminal.  When I/O is connected to the
+		terminal then the callback function for that part is not used.
+
+		There are extra options:
+		   "term_name"	     name to use for the buffer name, instead
+				     of the command name.
+		   "term_rows"	     vertical size to use for the terminal,
+				     instead of using 'termwinsize'
+		   "term_cols"	     horizontal size to use for the terminal,
+				     instead of using 'termwinsize'
+		   "vertical"	     split the window vertically; note that
+				     other window position can be defined with
+				     command modifiers, such as |:belowright|.
+		   "curwin"	     use the current window, do not split the
+				     window; fails if the current buffer
+				     cannot be |abandon|ed
+		   "hidden"	     do not open a window
+		   "norestore"	     do not add the terminal window to a
+				     session file
+		   "term_kill"	     what to do when trying to close the
+				     terminal window, see |term_setkill()|
+		   "term_finish"     What to do when the job is finished:
+					"close": close any windows
+					"open": open window if needed
+				     Note that "open" can be interruptive.
+				     See |term++close| and |term++open|.
+		   "term_opencmd"    command to use for opening the window when
+				     "open" is used for "term_finish"; must
+				     have "%d" where the buffer number goes,
+				     e.g. "10split|buffer %d"; when not
+				     specified "botright sbuf %d" is used
+		   "eof_chars"	     Text to send after all buffer lines were
+				     written to the terminal.  When not set
+				     CTRL-D is used on MS-Windows. For Python
+				     use CTRL-Z or "exit()". For a shell use
+				     "exit".  A CR is always added.
+		   "ansi_colors"     A list of 16 color names or hex codes
+				     defining the ANSI palette used in GUI
+				     color modes.  See |g:terminal_ansi_colors|.
+		   "term_mode"	     (MS-Windows only): Specify which pty to
+				     use:
+					"winpty": Use winpty
+					"conpty": Use ConPTY (if available)
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+term_wait({buf} [, {time}])					*term_wait()*
+		Wait for pending updates of {buf} to be handled.
+		{buf} is used as with |term_getsize()|.
+		{time} is how long to wait for updates to arrive in msec.  If
+		not set then 10 msec will be used.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+terminal| feature}
+
+test_alloc_fail({id}, {countdown}, {repeat})		*test_alloc_fail()*
+		This is for testing: If the memory allocation with {id} is
+		called, then decrement {countdown}, and when it reaches zero
+		let memory allocation fail {repeat} times.  When {repeat} is
+		smaller than one it fails one time.
+
+test_autochdir()					*test_autochdir()*
+		Set a flag to enable the effect of 'autochdir' before Vim
+		startup has finished.
+
+test_feedinput({string})				*test_feedinput()*
+		Characters in {string} are queued for processing as if they
+		were typed by the user. This uses a low level input buffer.
+		This function works only when with |+unix| or GUI is running.
+
+test_garbagecollect_now()			 *test_garbagecollect_now()*
+		Like garbagecollect(), but executed right away.  This must
+		only be called directly to avoid any structure to exist
+		internally, and |v:testing| must have been set before calling
+		any function.
+
+test_ignore_error({expr})			 *test_ignore_error()*
+		Ignore any error containing {expr}.  A normal message is given
+		instead.
+		This is only meant to be used in tests, where catching the
+		error with try/catch cannot be used (because it skips over
+		following code).
+		{expr} is used literally, not as a pattern.
+		When the {expr} is the string "RESET" then the list of ignored
+		errors is made empty.
+
+test_null_blob()					*test_null_blob()*
+		Return a |Blob| that is null. Only useful for testing.
+
+test_null_channel()					*test_null_channel()*
+		Return a |Channel| that is null. Only useful for testing.
+		{only available when compiled with the +channel feature}
+
+test_null_dict()					*test_null_dict()*
+		Return a |Dict| that is null. Only useful for testing.
+
+test_null_job()						*test_null_job()*
+		Return a |Job| that is null. Only useful for testing.
+		{only available when compiled with the +job feature}
+
+test_null_list()					*test_null_list()*
+		Return a |List| that is null. Only useful for testing.
+
+test_null_partial()					*test_null_partial()*
+		Return a |Partial| that is null. Only useful for testing.
+
+test_null_string()					*test_null_string()*
+		Return a |String| that is null. Only useful for testing.
+
+test_option_not_set({name})				*test_option_not_set()*
+		Reset the flag that indicates option {name} was set.  Thus it
+		looks like it still has the default value. Use like this: >
+			set ambiwidth=double
+			call test_option_not_set('ambiwidth')
+<		Now the 'ambiwidth' option behaves like it was never changed,
+		even though the value is "double".
+		Only to be used for testing!
+
+test_override({name}, {val})				*test_override()*
+		Overrides certain parts of Vim's internal processing to be able
+		to run tests. Only to be used for testing Vim!
+		The override is enabled when {val} is non-zero and removed
+		when {val} is zero.
+		Current supported values for name are:
+
+		name	     effect when {val} is non-zero ~
+		redraw       disable the redrawing() function
+		redraw_flag  ignore the RedrawingDisabled flag
+		char_avail   disable the char_avail() function
+		starting     reset the "starting" variable, see below
+		nfa_fail     makes the NFA regexp engine fail to force a
+			     fallback to the old engine
+		ALL	     clear all overrides ({val} is not used)
+
+		"starting" is to be used when a test should behave like
+		startup was done.  Since the tests are run by sourcing a
+		script the "starting" variable is non-zero. This is usually a
+		good thing (tests run faster), but sometimes changes behavior
+		in a way that the test doesn't work properly.
+		When using: >
+			call test_override('starting', 1)
+<		The value of "starting" is saved.  It is restored by: >
+			call test_override('starting', 0)
+
+test_scrollbar({which}, {value}, {dragging})		*test_scrollbar()*
+		Pretend using scrollbar {which} to move it to position
+		{value}.  {which} can be:
+			left	Left scrollbar of the current window
+			right	Right scrollbar of the current window
+			hor	Horizontal scrollbar
+
+		For the vertical scrollbars {value} can be 1 to the
+		line-count of the buffer.  For the horizontal scrollbar the
+		{value} can be between 1 and the maximum line length, assuming
+		'wrap' is not set.
+
+		When {dragging} is non-zero it's like dragging the scrollbar,
+		otherwise it's like clicking in the scrollbar.
+		Only works when the {which} scrollbar actually exists,
+		obviously only when using the GUI.
+
+test_settime({expr})					*test_settime()*
+		Set the time Vim uses internally.  Currently only used for
+		timestamps in the history, as they are used in viminfo, and
+		for undo.
+		Using a value of 1 makes Vim not sleep after a warning or
+		error message.
+		{expr} must evaluate to a number.  When the value is zero the
+		normal behavior is restored.
+
+							*timer_info()*
+timer_info([{id}])
+		Return a list with information about timers.
+		When {id} is given only information about this timer is
+		returned.  When timer {id} does not exist an empty list is
+		returned.
+		When {id} is omitted information about all timers is returned.
+
+		For each timer the information is stored in a Dictionary with
+		these items:
+		    "id"	    the timer ID
+		    "time"	    time the timer was started with
+		    "remaining"	    time until the timer fires
+		    "repeat"	    number of times the timer will still fire;
+				    -1 means forever
+		    "callback"	    the callback
+		    "paused"	    1 if the timer is paused, 0 otherwise
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature}
+
+timer_pause({timer}, {paused})				*timer_pause()*
+		Pause or unpause a timer.  A paused timer does not invoke its
+		callback when its time expires.  Unpausing a timer may cause
+		the callback to be invoked almost immediately if enough time
+		has passed.
+
+		Pausing a timer is useful to avoid the callback to be called
+		for a short time.
+
+		If {paused} evaluates to a non-zero Number or a non-empty
+		String, then the timer is paused, otherwise it is unpaused.
+		See |non-zero-arg|.
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature}
+
+						*timer_start()* *timer* *timers*
+timer_start({time}, {callback} [, {options}])
+		Create a timer and return the timer ID.
+
+		{time} is the waiting time in milliseconds. This is the
+		minimum time before invoking the callback.  When the system is
+		busy or Vim is not waiting for input the time will be longer.
+
+		{callback} is the function to call.  It can be the name of a
+		function or a |Funcref|.  It is called with one argument, which
+		is the timer ID.  The callback is only invoked when Vim is
+		waiting for input.
+
+		{options} is a dictionary.  Supported entries:
+		   "repeat"	Number of times to repeat calling the
+				callback.  -1 means forever.  When not present
+				the callback will be called once.
+				If the timer causes an error three times in a
+				row the repeat is cancelled.  This avoids that
+				Vim becomes unusable because of all the error
+				messages.
+
+		Example: >
+			func MyHandler(timer)
+			  echo 'Handler called'
+			endfunc
+			let timer = timer_start(500, 'MyHandler',
+				\ {'repeat': 3})
+<		This will invoke MyHandler() three times at 500 msec
+		intervals.
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature}
+
+timer_stop({timer})					*timer_stop()*
+		Stop a timer.  The timer callback will no longer be invoked.
+		{timer} is an ID returned by timer_start(), thus it must be a
+		Number.  If {timer} does not exist there is no error.
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature}
+
+timer_stopall()						*timer_stopall()*
+		Stop all timers.  The timer callbacks will no longer be
+		invoked.  Useful if some timers is misbehaving.  If there are
+		no timers there is no error.
+
+		{only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature}
+
+tolower({expr})						*tolower()*
+		The result is a copy of the String given, with all uppercase
+		characters turned into lowercase (just like applying |gu| to
+		the string).
+
+toupper({expr})						*toupper()*
+		The result is a copy of the String given, with all lowercase
+		characters turned into uppercase (just like applying |gU| to
+		the string).
+
+tr({src}, {fromstr}, {tostr})				*tr()*
+		The result is a copy of the {src} string with all characters
+		which appear in {fromstr} replaced by the character in that
+		position in the {tostr} string.  Thus the first character in
+		{fromstr} is translated into the first character in {tostr}
+		and so on.  Exactly like the unix "tr" command.
+		This code also deals with multibyte characters properly.
+
+		Examples: >
+			echo tr("hello there", "ht", "HT")
+<		returns "Hello THere" >
+			echo tr("<blob>", "<>", "{}")
+<		returns "{blob}"
+
+trim({text} [, {mask}])						*trim()*
+		Return {text} as a String where any character in {mask} is
+		removed from the beginning and  end of {text}.
+		If {mask} is not given, {mask} is all characters up to 0x20,
+		which includes Tab, space, NL and CR, plus the non-breaking
+		space character 0xa0.
+		This code deals with multibyte characters properly.
+
+		Examples: >
+			echo trim("   some text ")
+<		returns "some text" >
+			echo trim("  \r\t\t\r RESERVE \t\n\x0B\xA0") . "_TAIL"
+<		returns "RESERVE_TAIL" >
+			echo trim("rm<Xrm<>X>rrm", "rm<>")
+<		returns "Xrm<>X" (characters in the middle are not removed)
+
+trunc({expr})							*trunc()*
+		Return the largest integral value with magnitude less than or
+		equal to {expr} as a |Float| (truncate towards zero).
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			echo trunc(1.456)
+<			1.0  >
+			echo trunc(-5.456)
+<			-5.0  >
+			echo trunc(4.0)
+<			4.0
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+							*type()*
+type({expr})	The result is a Number representing the type of {expr}.
+		Instead of using the number directly, it is better to use the
+		v:t_ variable that has the value:
+			Number:	    0  |v:t_number|
+			String:	    1  |v:t_string|
+			Funcref:    2  |v:t_func|
+			List:	    3  |v:t_list|
+			Dictionary: 4  |v:t_dict|
+			Float:	    5  |v:t_float|
+			Boolean:    6  |v:t_bool| (v:false and v:true)
+			None:	    7  |v:t_none| (v:null and v:none)
+			Job:	    8  |v:t_job|
+			Channel:    9  |v:t_channel|
+			Blob:	   10  |v:t_blob|
+		For backward compatibility, this method can be used: >
+			:if type(myvar) == type(0)
+			:if type(myvar) == type("")
+			:if type(myvar) == type(function("tr"))
+			:if type(myvar) == type([])
+			:if type(myvar) == type({})
+			:if type(myvar) == type(0.0)
+			:if type(myvar) == type(v:false)
+			:if type(myvar) == type(v:none)
+<		To check if the v:t_ variables exist use this: >
+			:if exists('v:t_number')
+
+undofile({name})					*undofile()*
+		Return the name of the undo file that would be used for a file
+		with name {name} when writing.  This uses the 'undodir'
+		option, finding directories that exist.  It does not check if
+		the undo file exists.
+		{name} is always expanded to the full path, since that is what
+		is used internally.
+		If {name} is empty undofile() returns an empty string, since a
+		buffer without a file name will not write an undo file.
+		Useful in combination with |:wundo| and |:rundo|.
+		When compiled without the |+persistent_undo| option this always
+		returns an empty string.
+
+undotree()						*undotree()*
+		Return the current state of the undo tree in a dictionary with
+		the following items:
+		  "seq_last"	The highest undo sequence number used.
+		  "seq_cur"	The sequence number of the current position in
+				the undo tree.  This differs from "seq_last"
+				when some changes were undone.
+		  "time_cur"	Time last used for |:earlier| and related
+				commands.  Use |strftime()| to convert to
+				something readable.
+		  "save_last"	Number of the last file write.  Zero when no
+				write yet.
+		  "save_cur"	Number of the current position in the undo
+				tree.
+		  "synced"	Non-zero when the last undo block was synced.
+				This happens when waiting from input from the
+				user.  See |undo-blocks|.
+		  "entries"	A list of dictionaries with information about
+				undo blocks.
+
+		The first item in the "entries" list is the oldest undo item.
+		Each List item is a Dictionary with these items:
+		  "seq"		Undo sequence number.  Same as what appears in
+				|:undolist|.
+		  "time"	Timestamp when the change happened.  Use
+				|strftime()| to convert to something readable.
+		  "newhead"	Only appears in the item that is the last one
+				that was added.  This marks the last change
+				and where further changes will be added.
+		  "curhead"	Only appears in the item that is the last one
+				that was undone.  This marks the current
+				position in the undo tree, the block that will
+				be used by a redo command.  When nothing was
+				undone after the last change this item will
+				not appear anywhere.
+		  "save"	Only appears on the last block before a file
+				write.  The number is the write count.  The
+				first write has number 1, the last one the
+				"save_last" mentioned above.
+		  "alt"		Alternate entry.  This is again a List of undo
+				blocks.  Each item may again have an "alt"
+				item.
+
+uniq({list} [, {func} [, {dict}]])			*uniq()* *E882*
+		Remove second and succeeding copies of repeated adjacent
+		{list} items in-place.  Returns {list}.  If you want a list
+		to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
+			:let newlist = uniq(copy(mylist))
+<		The default compare function uses the string representation of
+		each item.  For the use of {func} and {dict} see |sort()|.
+
+values({dict})						*values()*
+		Return a |List| with all the values of {dict}.  The |List| is
+		in arbitrary order.  Also see |items()| and |keys()|.
+
+
+virtcol({expr})						*virtcol()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the screen column of the file
+		position given with {expr}.  That is, the last screen position
+		occupied by the character at that position, when the screen
+		would be of unlimited width.  When there is a <Tab> at the
+		position, the returned Number will be the column at the end of
+		the <Tab>.  For example, for a <Tab> in column 1, with 'ts'
+		set to 8, it returns 8. |conceal| is ignored.
+		For the byte position use |col()|.
+		For the use of {expr} see |col()|.
+		When 'virtualedit' is used {expr} can be [lnum, col, off], where
+		"off" is the offset in screen columns from the start of the
+		character.  E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last
+		character.  When "off" is omitted zero is used.
+		When Virtual editing is active in the current mode, a position
+		beyond the end of the line can be returned. |'virtualedit'|
+		The accepted positions are:
+		    .	    the cursor position
+		    $	    the end of the cursor line (the result is the
+			    number of displayed characters in the cursor line
+			    plus one)
+		    'x	    position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is
+			    returned)
+		    v       In Visual mode: the start of the Visual area (the
+			    cursor is the end).  When not in Visual mode
+			    returns the cursor position.  Differs from |'<| in
+			    that it's updated right away.
+		Note that only marks in the current file can be used.
+		Examples: >
+  virtcol(".")	   with text "foo^Lbar", with cursor on the "^L", returns 5
+  virtcol("$")	   with text "foo^Lbar", returns 9
+  virtcol("'t")    with text "	  there", with 't at 'h', returns 6
+<		The first column is 1.  0 is returned for an error.
+		A more advanced example that echoes the maximum length of
+		all lines: >
+		    echo max(map(range(1, line('$')), "virtcol([v:val, '$'])"))
+
+
+visualmode([expr])						*visualmode()*
+		The result is a String, which describes the last Visual mode
+		used in the current buffer.  Initially it returns an empty
+		string, but once Visual mode has been used, it returns "v",
+		"V", or "<CTRL-V>" (a single CTRL-V character) for
+		character-wise, line-wise, or block-wise Visual mode
+		respectively.
+		Example: >
+			:exe "normal " . visualmode()
+<		This enters the same Visual mode as before.  It is also useful
+		in scripts if you wish to act differently depending on the
+		Visual mode that was used.
+		If Visual mode is active, use |mode()| to get the Visual mode
+		(e.g., in a |:vmap|).
+		If [expr] is supplied and it evaluates to a non-zero Number or
+		a non-empty String, then the Visual mode will be cleared and
+		the old value is returned.  See |non-zero-arg|.
+
+wildmenumode()					*wildmenumode()*
+		Returns |TRUE| when the wildmenu is active and |FALSE|
+		otherwise.  See 'wildmenu' and 'wildmode'.
+		This can be used in mappings to handle the 'wildcharm' option
+		gracefully. (Makes only sense with |mapmode-c| mappings).
+
+		For example to make <c-j> work like <down> in wildmode, use: >
+    :cnoremap <expr> <C-j> wildmenumode() ? "\<Down>\<Tab>" : "\<c-j>"
+<
+		(Note, this needs the 'wildcharm' option set appropriately).
+
+
+win_findbuf({bufnr})					*win_findbuf()*
+		Returns a list with |window-ID|s for windows that contain
+		buffer {bufnr}.  When there is none the list is empty.
+
+win_getid([{win} [, {tab}]])				*win_getid()*
+		Get the |window-ID| for the specified window.
+		When {win} is missing use the current window.
+		With {win} this is the window number.  The top window has
+		number 1.
+		Without {tab} use the current tab, otherwise the tab with
+		number {tab}.  The first tab has number one.
+		Return zero if the window cannot be found.
+
+win_gotoid({expr})					*win_gotoid()*
+		Go to window with ID {expr}.  This may also change the current
+		tabpage.
+		Return 1 if successful, 0 if the window cannot be found.
+
+win_id2tabwin({expr})					*win_id2tabwin()*
+		Return a list with the tab number and window number of window
+		with ID {expr}: [tabnr, winnr].
+		Return [0, 0] if the window cannot be found.
+
+win_id2win({expr})					*win_id2win()*
+		Return the window number of window with ID {expr}.
+		Return 0 if the window cannot be found in the current tabpage.
+
+win_screenpos({nr})					*win_screenpos()*
+		Return the screen position of window {nr} as a list with two
+		numbers: [row, col].  The first window always has position
+		[1, 1], unless there is a tabline, then it is [2, 1].
+		{nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
+		Return [0, 0] if the window cannot be found in the current
+		tabpage.
+
+							*winbufnr()*
+winbufnr({nr})	The result is a Number, which is the number of the buffer
+		associated with window {nr}.  {nr} can be the window number or
+		the |window-ID|.
+		When {nr} is zero, the number of the buffer in the current
+		window is returned.
+		When window {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned.
+		Example: >
+  :echo "The file in the current window is " . bufname(winbufnr(0))
+<
+							*wincol()*
+wincol()	The result is a Number, which is the virtual column of the
+		cursor in the window.  This is counting screen cells from the
+		left side of the window.  The leftmost column is one.
+
+winheight({nr})						*winheight()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the height of window {nr}.
+		{nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
+		When {nr} is zero, the height of the current window is
+		returned.  When window {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned.
+		An existing window always has a height of zero or more.
+		This excludes any window toolbar line.
+		Examples: >
+  :echo "The current window has " . winheight(0) . " lines."
+<
+winlayout([{tabnr}])					*winlayout()*
+		The result is a nested List containing the layout of windows
+		in a tabpage.
+
+		Without {tabnr} use the current tabpage, otherwise the tabpage
+		with number {tabnr}. If the tabpage {tabnr} is not found,
+		returns an empty list.
+
+		For a leaf window, it returns:
+			['leaf', {winid}]
+		For horizontally split windows, which form a column, it
+		returns:
+			['col', [{nested list of windows}]]
+		For vertically split windows, which form a row, it returns:
+			['row', [{nested list of windows}]]
+
+		Example: >
+			" Only one window in the tab page
+			:echo winlayout()
+			['leaf', 1000]
+			" Two horizontally split windows
+			:echo winlayout()
+			['col', [['leaf', 1000], ['leaf', 1001]]]
+			" Three horizontally split windows, with two
+			" vertically split windows in the middle window
+			:echo winlayout(2)
+			['col', [['leaf', 1002], ['row', ['leaf', 1003],
+					     ['leaf', 1001]]], ['leaf', 1000]]
+<
+							*winline()*
+winline()	The result is a Number, which is the screen line of the cursor
+		in the window.  This is counting screen lines from the top of
+		the window.  The first line is one.
+		If the cursor was moved the view on the file will be updated
+		first, this may cause a scroll.
+
+							*winnr()*
+winnr([{arg}])	The result is a Number, which is the number of the current
+		window.  The top window has number 1.
+		When the optional argument is "$", the number of the
+		last window is returned (the window count). >
+			let window_count = winnr('$')
+<		When the optional argument is "#", the number of the last
+		accessed window is returned (where |CTRL-W_p| goes to).
+		If there is no previous window or it is in another tab page 0
+		is returned.
+		The number can be used with |CTRL-W_w| and ":wincmd w"
+		|:wincmd|.
+		Also see |tabpagewinnr()| and |win_getid()|.
+
+							*winrestcmd()*
+winrestcmd()	Returns a sequence of |:resize| commands that should restore
+		the current window sizes.  Only works properly when no windows
+		are opened or closed and the current window and tab page is
+		unchanged.
+		Example: >
+			:let cmd = winrestcmd()
+			:call MessWithWindowSizes()
+			:exe cmd
+<
+							*winrestview()*
+winrestview({dict})
+		Uses the |Dictionary| returned by |winsaveview()| to restore
+		the view of the current window.
+		Note: The {dict} does not have to contain all values, that are
+		returned by |winsaveview()|. If values are missing, those
+		settings won't be restored. So you can use: >
+		    :call winrestview({'curswant': 4})
+<
+		This will only set the curswant value (the column the cursor
+		wants to move on vertical movements) of the cursor to column 5
+		(yes, that is 5), while all other settings will remain the
+		same. This is useful, if you set the cursor position manually.
+
+		If you have changed the values the result is unpredictable.
+		If the window size changed the result won't be the same.
+
+							*winsaveview()*
+winsaveview()	Returns a |Dictionary| that contains information to restore
+		the view of the current window.  Use |winrestview()| to
+		restore the view.
+		This is useful if you have a mapping that jumps around in the
+		buffer and you want to go back to the original view.
+		This does not save fold information.  Use the 'foldenable'
+		option to temporarily switch off folding, so that folds are
+		not opened when moving around. This may have side effects.
+		The return value includes:
+			lnum		cursor line number
+			col		cursor column (Note: the first column
+					zero, as opposed to what getpos()
+					returns)
+			coladd		cursor column offset for 'virtualedit'
+			curswant	column for vertical movement
+			topline		first line in the window
+			topfill		filler lines, only in diff mode
+			leftcol		first column displayed
+			skipcol		columns skipped
+		Note that no option values are saved.
+
+
+winwidth({nr})						*winwidth()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the width of window {nr}.
+		{nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|.
+		When {nr} is zero, the width of the current window is
+		returned.  When window {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned.
+		An existing window always has a width of zero or more.
+		Examples: >
+  :echo "The current window has " . winwidth(0) . " columns."
+  :if winwidth(0) <= 50
+  :  50 wincmd |
+  :endif
+<		For getting the terminal or screen size, see the 'columns'
+		option.
+
+
+wordcount()						*wordcount()*
+		The result is a dictionary of byte/chars/word statistics for
+		the current buffer.  This is the same info as provided by
+		|g_CTRL-G|
+		The return value includes:
+			bytes		Number of bytes in the buffer
+			chars		Number of chars in the buffer
+			words		Number of words in the buffer
+			cursor_bytes    Number of bytes before cursor position
+					(not in Visual mode)
+			cursor_chars    Number of chars before cursor position
+					(not in Visual mode)
+			cursor_words    Number of words before cursor position
+					(not in Visual mode)
+			visual_bytes    Number of bytes visually selected
+					(only in Visual mode)
+			visual_chars    Number of chars visually selected
+					(only in Visual mode)
+			visual_words    Number of words visually selected
+					(only in Visual mode)
+
+
+							*writefile()*
+writefile({object}, {fname} [, {flags}])
+		When {object} is a |List| write it to file {fname}.  Each list
+		item is separated with a NL.  Each list item must be a String
+		or Number.
+		When {flags} contains "b" then binary mode is used: There will
+		not be a NL after the last list item.  An empty item at the
+		end does cause the last line in the file to end in a NL.
+
+		When {object} is a |Blob| write the bytes to file {fname}
+		unmodified.
+
+		When {flags} contains "a" then append mode is used, lines are
+		appended to the file: >
+			:call writefile(["foo"], "event.log", "a")
+			:call writefile(["bar"], "event.log", "a")
+<
+		When {flags} contains "s" then fsync() is called after writing
+		the file.  This flushes the file to disk, if possible.  This
+		takes more time but avoids losing the file if the system
+		crashes.
+		When {flags} does not contain "S" or "s" then fsync() is
+		called if the 'fsync' option is set.
+		When {flags} contains "S" then fsync() is not called, even
+		when 'fsync' is set.
+
+		All NL characters are replaced with a NUL character.
+		Inserting CR characters needs to be done before passing {list}
+		to writefile().
+		An existing file is overwritten, if possible.
+		When the write fails -1 is returned, otherwise 0.  There is an
+		error message if the file can't be created or when writing
+		fails.
+		Also see |readfile()|.
+		To copy a file byte for byte: >
+			:let fl = readfile("foo", "b")
+			:call writefile(fl, "foocopy", "b")
+
+
+xor({expr}, {expr})					*xor()*
+		Bitwise XOR on the two arguments.  The arguments are converted
+		to a number.  A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error.
+		Example: >
+			:let bits = xor(bits, 0x80)
+<
+
+
+							*feature-list*
+There are four types of features:
+1.  Features that are only supported when they have been enabled when Vim
+    was compiled |+feature-list|.  Example: >
+	:if has("cindent")
+2.  Features that are only supported when certain conditions have been met.
+    Example: >
+	:if has("gui_running")
+<							*has-patch*
+3.  Beyond a certain version or at a certain version and including a specific
+    patch.  The "patch-7.4.248" feature means that the Vim version is 7.5 or
+    later, or it is version 7.4 and patch 248 was included.  Example: >
+	:if has("patch-7.4.248")
+<    Note that it's possible for patch 248 to be omitted even though 249 is
+    included.  Only happens when cherry-picking patches.
+    Note that this form only works for patch 7.4.237 and later, before that
+    you need to check for the patch and the  v:version.  Example (checking
+    version 6.2.148 or later): >
+	:if v:version > 602 || (v:version == 602 && has("patch148"))
+
+Hint: To find out if Vim supports backslashes in a file name (MS-Windows),
+use: `if exists('+shellslash')`
+
+
+acl			Compiled with |ACL| support.
+all_builtin_terms	Compiled with all builtin terminals enabled.
+amiga			Amiga version of Vim.
+arabic			Compiled with Arabic support |Arabic|.
+arp			Compiled with ARP support (Amiga).
+autocmd			Compiled with autocommand support. (always true)
+autochdir		Compiled with support for 'autochdir'
+autoservername		Automatically enable |clientserver|
+balloon_eval		Compiled with |balloon-eval| support.
+balloon_multiline	GUI supports multiline balloons.
+beos			BeOS version of Vim.
+browse			Compiled with |:browse| support, and browse() will
+			work.
+browsefilter		Compiled with support for |browsefilter|.
+bsd			Compiled on an OS in the BSD family (excluding macOS).
+builtin_terms		Compiled with some builtin terminals.
+byte_offset		Compiled with support for 'o' in 'statusline'
+cindent			Compiled with 'cindent' support.
+clientserver		Compiled with remote invocation support |clientserver|.
+clipboard		Compiled with 'clipboard' support.
+cmdline_compl		Compiled with |cmdline-completion| support.
+cmdline_hist		Compiled with |cmdline-history| support.
+cmdline_info		Compiled with 'showcmd' and 'ruler' support.
+comments		Compiled with |'comments'| support.
+compatible		Compiled to be very Vi compatible.
+conpty			Platform where |ConPTY| can be used.
+cryptv			Compiled with encryption support |encryption|.
+cscope			Compiled with |cscope| support.
+cursorbind		Compiled with |'cursorbind'| (always true)
+debug			Compiled with "DEBUG" defined.
+dialog_con		Compiled with console dialog support.
+dialog_gui		Compiled with GUI dialog support.
+diff			Compiled with |vimdiff| and 'diff' support.
+digraphs		Compiled with support for digraphs.
+directx			Compiled with support for DirectX and 'renderoptions'.
+dnd			Compiled with support for the "~ register |quote_~|.
+ebcdic			Compiled on a machine with ebcdic character set.
+emacs_tags		Compiled with support for Emacs tags.
+eval			Compiled with expression evaluation support.  Always
+			true, of course!
+ex_extra		|+ex_extra| (always true)
+extra_search		Compiled with support for |'incsearch'| and
+			|'hlsearch'|
+farsi			Compiled with Farsi support |farsi|.
+file_in_path		Compiled with support for |gf| and |<cfile>|
+filterpipe		When 'shelltemp' is off pipes are used for shell
+			read/write/filter commands
+find_in_path		Compiled with support for include file searches
+			|+find_in_path|.
+float			Compiled with support for |Float|.
+fname_case		Case in file names matters (for Amiga, MS-DOS, and
+			Windows this is not present).
+folding			Compiled with |folding| support.
+footer			Compiled with GUI footer support. |gui-footer|
+fork			Compiled to use fork()/exec() instead of system().
+gettext			Compiled with message translation |multi-lang|
+gui			Compiled with GUI enabled.
+gui_athena		Compiled with Athena GUI.
+gui_gnome		Compiled with Gnome support (gui_gtk is also defined).
+gui_gtk			Compiled with GTK+ GUI (any version).
+gui_gtk2		Compiled with GTK+ 2 GUI (gui_gtk is also defined).
+gui_gtk3		Compiled with GTK+ 3 GUI (gui_gtk is also defined).
+gui_mac			Compiled with Macintosh GUI.
+gui_motif		Compiled with Motif GUI.
+gui_photon		Compiled with Photon GUI.
+gui_running		Vim is running in the GUI, or it will start soon.
+gui_win32		Compiled with MS Windows Win32 GUI.
+gui_win32s		idem, and Win32s system being used (Windows 3.1)
+hangul_input		Compiled with Hangul input support. |hangul|
+hpux			HP-UX version of Vim.
+iconv			Can use iconv() for conversion.
+insert_expand		Compiled with support for CTRL-X expansion commands in
+			Insert mode.
+jumplist		Compiled with |jumplist| support.
+keymap			Compiled with 'keymap' support.
+lambda			Compiled with |lambda| support.
+langmap			Compiled with 'langmap' support.
+libcall			Compiled with |libcall()| support.
+linebreak		Compiled with 'linebreak', 'breakat', 'showbreak' and
+			'breakindent' support.
+linux			Linux version of Vim.
+lispindent		Compiled with support for lisp indenting.
+listcmds		Compiled with commands for the buffer list |:files|
+			and the argument list |arglist|.
+localmap		Compiled with local mappings and abbr. |:map-local|
+lua			Compiled with Lua interface |Lua|.
+mac			Any Macintosh version of Vim  cf. osx
+macunix			Synonym for osxdarwin
+menu			Compiled with support for |:menu|.
+mksession		Compiled with support for |:mksession|.
+modify_fname		Compiled with file name modifiers. |filename-modifiers|
+mouse			Compiled with support mouse.
+mouse_dec		Compiled with support for Dec terminal mouse.
+mouse_gpm		Compiled with support for gpm (Linux console mouse)
+mouse_netterm		Compiled with support for netterm mouse.
+mouse_pterm		Compiled with support for qnx pterm mouse.
+mouse_sysmouse		Compiled with support for sysmouse (*BSD console mouse)
+mouse_sgr		Compiled with support for sgr mouse.
+mouse_urxvt		Compiled with support for urxvt mouse.
+mouse_xterm		Compiled with support for xterm mouse.
+mouseshape		Compiled with support for 'mouseshape'.
+multi_byte		Compiled with support for 'encoding'
+multi_byte_encoding	'encoding' is set to a multi-byte encoding.
+multi_byte_ime		Compiled with support for IME input method.
+multi_lang		Compiled with support for multiple languages.
+mzscheme		Compiled with MzScheme interface |mzscheme|.
+netbeans_enabled	Compiled with support for |netbeans| and connected.
+netbeans_intg		Compiled with support for |netbeans|.
+num64			Compiled with 64-bit |Number| support.
+ole			Compiled with OLE automation support for Win32.
+osx			Compiled for macOS  cf. mac
+osxdarwin		Compiled for macOS, with |mac-darwin-feature|
+packages		Compiled with |packages| support.
+path_extra		Compiled with up/downwards search in 'path' and 'tags'
+perl			Compiled with Perl interface.
+persistent_undo		Compiled with support for persistent undo history.
+postscript		Compiled with PostScript file printing.
+printer			Compiled with |:hardcopy| support.
+profile			Compiled with |:profile| support.
+python			Python 2.x interface available. |has-python|
+python_compiled		Compiled with Python 2.x interface. |has-python|
+python_dynamic		Python 2.x interface is dynamically loaded. |has-python|
+python3			Python 3.x interface available. |has-python|
+python3_compiled	Compiled with Python 3.x interface. |has-python|
+python3_dynamic		Python 3.x interface is dynamically loaded. |has-python|
+pythonx			Compiled with |python_x| interface. |has-pythonx|
+qnx			QNX version of Vim.
+quickfix		Compiled with |quickfix| support.
+reltime			Compiled with |reltime()| support.
+rightleft		Compiled with 'rightleft' support.
+ruby			Compiled with Ruby interface |ruby|.
+scrollbind		Compiled with 'scrollbind' support. (always true)
+showcmd			Compiled with 'showcmd' support.
+signs			Compiled with |:sign| support.
+smartindent		Compiled with 'smartindent' support.
+spell			Compiled with spell checking support |spell|.
+startuptime		Compiled with |--startuptime| support.
+statusline		Compiled with support for 'statusline', 'rulerformat'
+			and special formats of 'titlestring' and 'iconstring'.
+sun			SunOS version of Vim.
+sun_workshop		Support for Sun |workshop| has been removed.
+syntax			Compiled with syntax highlighting support |syntax|.
+syntax_items		There are active syntax highlighting items for the
+			current buffer.
+system			Compiled to use system() instead of fork()/exec().
+tag_binary		Compiled with binary searching in tags files
+			|tag-binary-search|.
+tag_old_static		Compiled with support for old static tags
+			|tag-old-static|.
+tag_any_white		Compiled with support for any white characters in tags
+			files |tag-any-white|.
+tcl			Compiled with Tcl interface.
+termguicolors		Compiled with true color in terminal support.
+terminal		Compiled with |terminal| support.
+terminfo		Compiled with terminfo instead of termcap.
+termresponse		Compiled with support for |t_RV| and |v:termresponse|.
+textobjects		Compiled with support for |text-objects|.
+textprop		Compiled with support for |text-properties|.
+tgetent			Compiled with tgetent support, able to use a termcap
+			or terminfo file.
+timers			Compiled with |timer_start()| support.
+title			Compiled with window title support |'title'|.
+toolbar			Compiled with support for |gui-toolbar|.
+ttyin			input is a terminal (tty)
+ttyout			output is a terminal (tty)
+unix			Unix version of Vim. *+unix*
+unnamedplus		Compiled with support for "unnamedplus" in 'clipboard'
+user_commands		User-defined commands.
+vcon			Win32: Virtual console support is working, can use
+			'termguicolors'. Also see |+vtp|.
+vertsplit		Compiled with vertically split windows |:vsplit|.
+			(always true)
+vim_starting		True while initial source'ing takes place. |startup|
+			*vim_starting*
+viminfo			Compiled with viminfo support.
+virtualedit		Compiled with 'virtualedit' option. (always true)
+visual			Compiled with Visual mode. (always true)
+visualextra		Compiled with extra Visual mode commands. (always
+			true) |blockwise-operators|.
+vms			VMS version of Vim.
+vreplace		Compiled with |gR| and |gr| commands. (always true)
+vtp			Compiled for vcon support |+vtp| (check vcon to find
+			out if it works in the current console).
+wildignore		Compiled with 'wildignore' option.
+wildmenu		Compiled with 'wildmenu' option.
+win16			old version for MS-Windows 3.1 (always false)
+win32			Win32 version of Vim (MS-Windows 95 and later, 32 or
+			64 bits)
+win32unix		Win32 version of Vim, using Unix files (Cygwin)
+win64			Win64 version of Vim (MS-Windows 64 bit).
+win95			Win32 version for MS-Windows 95/98/ME (always false)
+winaltkeys		Compiled with 'winaltkeys' option.
+windows			Compiled with support for more than one window.
+			(always true)
+writebackup		Compiled with 'writebackup' default on.
+xfontset		Compiled with X fontset support |xfontset|.
+xim			Compiled with X input method support |xim|.
+xpm			Compiled with pixmap support.
+xpm_w32			Compiled with pixmap support for Win32. (Only for
+			backward compatibility. Use "xpm" instead.)
+xsmp			Compiled with X session management support.
+xsmp_interact		Compiled with interactive X session management support.
+xterm_clipboard		Compiled with support for xterm clipboard.
+xterm_save		Compiled with support for saving and restoring the
+			xterm screen.
+x11			Compiled with X11 support.
+
+							*string-match*
+Matching a pattern in a String
+
+A regexp pattern as explained at |pattern| is normally used to find a match in
+the buffer lines.  When a pattern is used to find a match in a String, almost
+everything works in the same way.  The difference is that a String is handled
+like it is one line.  When it contains a "\n" character, this is not seen as a
+line break for the pattern.  It can be matched with a "\n" in the pattern, or
+with ".".  Example: >
+	:let a = "aaaa\nxxxx"
+	:echo matchstr(a, "..\n..")
+	aa
+	xx
+	:echo matchstr(a, "a.x")
+	a
+	x
+
+Don't forget that "^" will only match at the first character of the String and
+"$" at the last character of the string.  They don't match after or before a
+"\n".
+
+==============================================================================
+5. Defining functions					*user-functions*
+
+New functions can be defined.  These can be called just like builtin
+functions.  The function executes a sequence of Ex commands.  Normal mode
+commands can be executed with the |:normal| command.
+
+The function name must start with an uppercase letter, to avoid confusion with
+builtin functions.  To prevent from using the same name in different scripts
+avoid obvious, short names.  A good habit is to start the function name with
+the name of the script, e.g., "HTMLcolor()".
+
+It's also possible to use curly braces, see |curly-braces-names|.  And the
+|autoload| facility is useful to define a function only when it's called.
+
+							*local-function*
+A function local to a script must start with "s:".  A local script function
+can only be called from within the script and from functions, user commands
+and autocommands defined in the script.  It is also possible to call the
+function from a mapping defined in the script, but then |<SID>| must be used
+instead of "s:" when the mapping is expanded outside of the script.
+There are only script-local functions, no buffer-local or window-local
+functions.
+
+					*:fu* *:function* *E128* *E129* *E123*
+:fu[nction]		List all functions and their arguments.
+
+:fu[nction] {name}	List function {name}.
+			{name} can also be a |Dictionary| entry that is a
+			|Funcref|: >
+				:function dict.init
+
+:fu[nction] /{pattern}	List functions with a name matching {pattern}.
+			Example that lists all functions ending with "File": >
+				:function /File$
+<
+							*:function-verbose*
+When 'verbose' is non-zero, listing a function will also display where it was
+last defined. Example: >
+
+    :verbose function SetFileTypeSH
+	function SetFileTypeSH(name)
+	    Last set from /usr/share/vim/vim-7.0/filetype.vim
+<
+See |:verbose-cmd| for more information.
+
+						*E124* *E125* *E853* *E884*
+:fu[nction][!] {name}([arguments]) [range] [abort] [dict] [closure]
+			Define a new function by the name {name}.  The body of
+			the function follows in the next lines, until the
+			matching |:endfunction|.
+
+			The name must be made of alphanumeric characters and
+			'_', and must start with a capital or "s:" (see
+			above).  Note that using "b:" or "g:" is not allowed.
+			(since patch 7.4.260 E884 is given if the function
+			name has a colon in the name, e.g. for "foo:bar()".
+			Before that patch no error was given).
+
+			{name} can also be a |Dictionary| entry that is a
+			|Funcref|: >
+				:function dict.init(arg)
+<			"dict" must be an existing dictionary.  The entry
+			"init" is added if it didn't exist yet.  Otherwise [!]
+			is required to overwrite an existing function.  The
+			result is a |Funcref| to a numbered function.  The
+			function can only be used with a |Funcref| and will be
+			deleted if there are no more references to it.
+								*E127* *E122*
+			When a function by this name already exists and [!] is
+			not used an error message is given.  There is one
+			exception: When sourcing a script again, a function
+			that was previously defined in that script will be
+			silently replaced.
+			When [!] is used, an existing function is silently
+			replaced.  Unless it is currently being executed, that
+			is an error.
+			NOTE: Use ! wisely.  If used without care it can cause
+			an existing function to be replaced unexpectedly,
+			which is hard to debug.
+
+			For the {arguments} see |function-argument|.
+
+					*:func-range* *a:firstline* *a:lastline*
+			When the [range] argument is added, the function is
+			expected to take care of a range itself.  The range is
+			passed as "a:firstline" and "a:lastline".  If [range]
+			is excluded, ":{range}call" will call the function for
+			each line in the range, with the cursor on the start
+			of each line.  See |function-range-example|.
+			The cursor is still moved to the first line of the
+			range, as is the case with all Ex commands.
+								*:func-abort*
+			When the [abort] argument is added, the function will
+			abort as soon as an error is detected.
+								*:func-dict*
+			When the [dict] argument is added, the function must
+			be invoked through an entry in a |Dictionary|.  The
+			local variable "self" will then be set to the
+			dictionary.  See |Dictionary-function|.
+						*:func-closure* *E932*
+			When the [closure] argument is added, the function
+			can access variables and arguments from the outer
+			scope.  This is usually called a closure.  In this
+			example Bar() uses "x" from the scope of Foo().  It
+			remains referenced even after Foo() returns: >
+				:function! Foo()
+				:  let x = 0
+				:  function! Bar() closure
+				:    let x += 1
+				:    return x
+				:  endfunction
+				:  return funcref('Bar')
+				:endfunction
+
+				:let F = Foo()
+				:echo F()
+<				1 >
+				:echo F()
+<				2 >
+				:echo F()
+<				3
+
+						*function-search-undo*
+			The last used search pattern and the redo command "."
+			will not be changed by the function.  This also
+			implies that the effect of |:nohlsearch| is undone
+			when the function returns.
+
+				*:endf* *:endfunction* *E126* *E193* *W22*
+:endf[unction] [argument]
+			The end of a function definition.  Best is to put it
+			on a line by its own, without [argument].
+
+			[argument] can be:
+				| command	command to execute next
+				\n command	command to execute next
+				" comment	always ignored
+				anything else	ignored, warning given when
+						'verbose' is non-zero
+			The support for a following command was added in Vim
+			8.0.0654, before that any argument was silently
+			ignored.
+
+			To be able to define a function inside an `:execute`
+			command, use line breaks instead of |:bar|: >
+				:exe "func Foo()\necho 'foo'\nendfunc"
+<
+				*:delf* *:delfunction* *E130* *E131* *E933*
+:delf[unction][!] {name}
+			Delete function {name}.
+			{name} can also be a |Dictionary| entry that is a
+			|Funcref|: >
+				:delfunc dict.init
+<			This will remove the "init" entry from "dict".  The
+			function is deleted if there are no more references to
+			it.
+			With the ! there is no error if the function does not
+			exist.
+							*:retu* *:return* *E133*
+:retu[rn] [expr]	Return from a function.  When "[expr]" is given, it is
+			evaluated and returned as the result of the function.
+			If "[expr]" is not given, the number 0 is returned.
+			When a function ends without an explicit ":return",
+			the number 0 is returned.
+			Note that there is no check for unreachable lines,
+			thus there is no warning if commands follow ":return".
+
+			If the ":return" is used after a |:try| but before the
+			matching |:finally| (if present), the commands
+			following the ":finally" up to the matching |:endtry|
+			are executed first.  This process applies to all
+			nested ":try"s inside the function.  The function
+			returns at the outermost ":endtry".
+
+						*function-argument* *a:var*
+An argument can be defined by giving its name.  In the function this can then
+be used as "a:name" ("a:" for argument).
+					*a:0* *a:1* *a:000* *E740* *...*
+Up to 20 arguments can be given, separated by commas.  After the named
+arguments an argument "..." can be specified, which means that more arguments
+may optionally be following.  In the function the extra arguments can be used
+as "a:1", "a:2", etc.  "a:0" is set to the number of extra arguments (which
+can be 0).  "a:000" is set to a |List| that contains these arguments.  Note
+that "a:1" is the same as "a:000[0]".
+								*E742*
+The a: scope and the variables in it cannot be changed, they are fixed.
+However, if a composite type is used, such as |List| or |Dictionary| , you can
+change their contents.  Thus you can pass a |List| to a function and have the
+function add an item to it.  If you want to make sure the function cannot
+change a |List| or |Dictionary| use |:lockvar|.
+
+When not using "...", the number of arguments in a function call must be equal
+to the number of named arguments.  When using "...", the number of arguments
+may be larger.
+
+It is also possible to define a function without any arguments.  You must
+still supply the () then.
+
+It is allowed to define another function inside a function body.
+
+							*local-variables*
+Inside a function local variables can be used.  These will disappear when the
+function returns.  Global variables need to be accessed with "g:".
+
+Example: >
+  :function Table(title, ...)
+  :  echohl Title
+  :  echo a:title
+  :  echohl None
+  :  echo a:0 . " items:"
+  :  for s in a:000
+  :    echon ' ' . s
+  :  endfor
+  :endfunction
+
+This function can then be called with: >
+  call Table("Table", "line1", "line2")
+  call Table("Empty Table")
+
+To return more than one value, return a |List|: >
+  :function Compute(n1, n2)
+  :  if a:n2 == 0
+  :    return ["fail", 0]
+  :  endif
+  :  return ["ok", a:n1 / a:n2]
+  :endfunction
+
+This function can then be called with: >
+  :let [success, div] = Compute(102, 6)
+  :if success == "ok"
+  :  echo div
+  :endif
+<
+						*:cal* *:call* *E107* *E117*
+:[range]cal[l] {name}([arguments])
+		Call a function.  The name of the function and its arguments
+		are as specified with |:function|.  Up to 20 arguments can be
+		used.  The returned value is discarded.
+		Without a range and for functions that accept a range, the
+		function is called once.  When a range is given the cursor is
+		positioned at the start of the first line before executing the
+		function.
+		When a range is given and the function doesn't handle it
+		itself, the function is executed for each line in the range,
+		with the cursor in the first column of that line.  The cursor
+		is left at the last line (possibly moved by the last function
+		call).  The arguments are re-evaluated for each line.  Thus
+		this works:
+						*function-range-example*  >
+	:function Mynumber(arg)
+	:  echo line(".") . " " . a:arg
+	:endfunction
+	:1,5call Mynumber(getline("."))
+<
+		The "a:firstline" and "a:lastline" are defined anyway, they
+		can be used to do something different at the start or end of
+		the range.
+
+		Example of a function that handles the range itself: >
+
+	:function Cont() range
+	:  execute (a:firstline + 1) . "," . a:lastline . 's/^/\t\\ '
+	:endfunction
+	:4,8call Cont()
+<
+		This function inserts the continuation character "\" in front
+		of all the lines in the range, except the first one.
+
+		When the function returns a composite value it can be further
+		dereferenced, but the range will not be used then.  Example: >
+	:4,8call GetDict().method()
+<		Here GetDict() gets the range but method() does not.
+
+								*E132*
+The recursiveness of user functions is restricted with the |'maxfuncdepth'|
+option.
+
+
+AUTOMATICALLY LOADING FUNCTIONS ~
+							*autoload-functions*
+When using many or large functions, it's possible to automatically define them
+only when they are used.  There are two methods: with an autocommand and with
+the "autoload" directory in 'runtimepath'.
+
+
+Using an autocommand ~
+
+This is introduced in the user manual, section |41.14|.
+
+The autocommand is useful if you have a plugin that is a long Vim script file.
+You can define the autocommand and quickly quit the script with |:finish|.
+That makes Vim startup faster.  The autocommand should then load the same file
+again, setting a variable to skip the |:finish| command.
+
+Use the FuncUndefined autocommand event with a pattern that matches the
+function(s) to be defined.  Example: >
+
+	:au FuncUndefined BufNet* source ~/vim/bufnetfuncs.vim
+
+The file "~/vim/bufnetfuncs.vim" should then define functions that start with
+"BufNet".  Also see |FuncUndefined|.
+
+
+Using an autoload script ~
+							*autoload* *E746*
+This is introduced in the user manual, section |41.15|.
+
+Using a script in the "autoload" directory is simpler, but requires using
+exactly the right file name.  A function that can be autoloaded has a name
+like this: >
+
+	:call filename#funcname()
+
+When such a function is called, and it is not defined yet, Vim will search the
+"autoload" directories in 'runtimepath' for a script file called
+"filename.vim".  For example "~/.vim/autoload/filename.vim".  That file should
+then define the function like this: >
+
+	function filename#funcname()
+	   echo "Done!"
+	endfunction
+
+The file name and the name used before the # in the function must match
+exactly, and the defined function must have the name exactly as it will be
+called.
+
+It is possible to use subdirectories.  Every # in the function name works like
+a path separator.  Thus when calling a function: >
+
+	:call foo#bar#func()
+
+Vim will look for the file "autoload/foo/bar.vim" in 'runtimepath'.
+
+This also works when reading a variable that has not been set yet: >
+
+	:let l = foo#bar#lvar
+
+However, when the autoload script was already loaded it won't be loaded again
+for an unknown variable.
+
+When assigning a value to such a variable nothing special happens.  This can
+be used to pass settings to the autoload script before it's loaded: >
+
+	:let foo#bar#toggle = 1
+	:call foo#bar#func()
+
+Note that when you make a mistake and call a function that is supposed to be
+defined in an autoload script, but the script doesn't actually define the
+function, the script will be sourced every time you try to call the function.
+And you will get an error message every time.
+
+Also note that if you have two script files, and one calls a function in the
+other and vice versa, before the used function is defined, it won't work.
+Avoid using the autoload functionality at the toplevel.
+
+Hint: If you distribute a bunch of scripts you can pack them together with the
+|vimball| utility.  Also read the user manual |distribute-script|.
+
+==============================================================================
+6. Curly braces names					*curly-braces-names*
+
+In most places where you can use a variable, you can use a "curly braces name"
+variable.  This is a regular variable name with one or more expressions
+wrapped in braces {} like this: >
+	my_{adjective}_variable
+
+When Vim encounters this, it evaluates the expression inside the braces, puts
+that in place of the expression, and re-interprets the whole as a variable
+name.  So in the above example, if the variable "adjective" was set to
+"noisy", then the reference would be to "my_noisy_variable", whereas if
+"adjective" was set to "quiet", then it would be to "my_quiet_variable".
+
+One application for this is to create a set of variables governed by an option
+value.  For example, the statement >
+	echo my_{&background}_message
+
+would output the contents of "my_dark_message" or "my_light_message" depending
+on the current value of 'background'.
+
+You can use multiple brace pairs: >
+	echo my_{adverb}_{adjective}_message
+..or even nest them: >
+	echo my_{ad{end_of_word}}_message
+where "end_of_word" is either "verb" or "jective".
+
+However, the expression inside the braces must evaluate to a valid single
+variable name, e.g. this is invalid: >
+	:let foo='a + b'
+	:echo c{foo}d
+.. since the result of expansion is "ca + bd", which is not a variable name.
+
+						*curly-braces-function-names*
+You can call and define functions by an evaluated name in a similar way.
+Example: >
+	:let func_end='whizz'
+	:call my_func_{func_end}(parameter)
+
+This would call the function "my_func_whizz(parameter)".
+
+This does NOT work: >
+  :let i = 3
+  :let @{i} = ''  " error
+  :echo @{i}      " error
+
+==============================================================================
+7. Commands						*expression-commands*
+
+:let {var-name} = {expr1}				*:let* *E18*
+			Set internal variable {var-name} to the result of the
+			expression {expr1}.  The variable will get the type
+			from the {expr}.  If {var-name} didn't exist yet, it
+			is created.
+
+:let {var-name}[{idx}] = {expr1}			*E689*
+			Set a list item to the result of the expression
+			{expr1}.  {var-name} must refer to a list and {idx}
+			must be a valid index in that list.  For nested list
+			the index can be repeated.
+			This cannot be used to add an item to a |List|.
+			This cannot be used to set a byte in a String.  You
+			can do that like this: >
+				:let var = var[0:2] . 'X' . var[4:]
+<			When {var-name} is a |Blob| then {idx} can be the
+			length of the blob, in which case one byte is
+			appended.
+
+							*E711* *E719*
+:let {var-name}[{idx1}:{idx2}] = {expr1}		*E708* *E709* *E710*
+			Set a sequence of items in a |List| to the result of
+			the expression {expr1}, which must be a list with the
+			correct number of items.
+			{idx1} can be omitted, zero is used instead.
+			{idx2} can be omitted, meaning the end of the list.
+			When the selected range of items is partly past the
+			end of the list, items will be added.
+
+					*:let+=* *:let-=* *:let.=* *E734*
+:let {var} += {expr1}	Like ":let {var} = {var} + {expr1}".
+:let {var} -= {expr1}	Like ":let {var} = {var} - {expr1}".
+:let {var} .= {expr1}	Like ":let {var} = {var} . {expr1}".
+			These fail if {var} was not set yet and when the type
+			of {var} and {expr1} don't fit the operator.
+
+
+:let ${env-name} = {expr1}			*:let-environment* *:let-$*
+			Set environment variable {env-name} to the result of
+			the expression {expr1}.  The type is always String.
+:let ${env-name} .= {expr1}
+			Append {expr1} to the environment variable {env-name}.
+			If the environment variable didn't exist yet this
+			works like "=".
+
+:let @{reg-name} = {expr1}			*:let-register* *:let-@*
+			Write the result of the expression {expr1} in register
+			{reg-name}.  {reg-name} must be a single letter, and
+			must be the name of a writable register (see
+			|registers|).  "@@" can be used for the unnamed
+			register, "@/" for the search pattern.
+			If the result of {expr1} ends in a <CR> or <NL>, the
+			register will be linewise, otherwise it will be set to
+			characterwise.
+			This can be used to clear the last search pattern: >
+				:let @/ = ""
+<			This is different from searching for an empty string,
+			that would match everywhere.
+
+:let @{reg-name} .= {expr1}
+			Append {expr1} to register {reg-name}.  If the
+			register was empty it's like setting it to {expr1}.
+
+:let &{option-name} = {expr1}			*:let-option* *:let-&*
+			Set option {option-name} to the result of the
+			expression {expr1}.  A String or Number value is
+			always converted to the type of the option.
+			For an option local to a window or buffer the effect
+			is just like using the |:set| command: both the local
+			value and the global value are changed.
+			Example: >
+				:let &path = &path . ',/usr/local/include'
+<			This also works for terminal codes in the form t_xx.
+			But only for alphanumerical names.  Example: >
+				:let &t_k1 = "\<Esc>[234;"
+<			When the code does not exist yet it will be created as
+			a terminal key code, there is no error.
+
+:let &{option-name} .= {expr1}
+			For a string option: Append {expr1} to the value.
+			Does not insert a comma like |:set+=|.
+
+:let &{option-name} += {expr1}
+:let &{option-name} -= {expr1}
+			For a number or boolean option: Add or subtract
+			{expr1}.
+
+:let &l:{option-name} = {expr1}
+:let &l:{option-name} .= {expr1}
+:let &l:{option-name} += {expr1}
+:let &l:{option-name} -= {expr1}
+			Like above, but only set the local value of an option
+			(if there is one).  Works like |:setlocal|.
+
+:let &g:{option-name} = {expr1}
+:let &g:{option-name} .= {expr1}
+:let &g:{option-name} += {expr1}
+:let &g:{option-name} -= {expr1}
+			Like above, but only set the global value of an option
+			(if there is one).  Works like |:setglobal|.
+
+:let [{name1}, {name2}, ...] = {expr1}		*:let-unpack* *E687* *E688*
+			{expr1} must evaluate to a |List|.  The first item in
+			the list is assigned to {name1}, the second item to
+			{name2}, etc.
+			The number of names must match the number of items in
+			the |List|.
+			Each name can be one of the items of the ":let"
+			command as mentioned above.
+			Example: >
+				:let [s, item] = GetItem(s)
+<			Detail: {expr1} is evaluated first, then the
+			assignments are done in sequence.  This matters if
+			{name2} depends on {name1}.  Example: >
+				:let x = [0, 1]
+				:let i = 0
+				:let [i, x[i]] = [1, 2]
+				:echo x
+<			The result is [0, 2].
+
+:let [{name1}, {name2}, ...] .= {expr1}
+:let [{name1}, {name2}, ...] += {expr1}
+:let [{name1}, {name2}, ...] -= {expr1}
+			Like above, but append/add/subtract the value for each
+			|List| item.
+
+:let [{name}, ..., ; {lastname}] = {expr1}
+			Like |:let-unpack| above, but the |List| may have more
+			items than there are names.  A list of the remaining
+			items is assigned to {lastname}.  If there are no
+			remaining items {lastname} is set to an empty list.
+			Example: >
+				:let [a, b; rest] = ["aval", "bval", 3, 4]
+<
+:let [{name}, ..., ; {lastname}] .= {expr1}
+:let [{name}, ..., ; {lastname}] += {expr1}
+:let [{name}, ..., ; {lastname}] -= {expr1}
+			Like above, but append/add/subtract the value for each
+			|List| item.
+
+								*E121*
+:let {var-name}	..	List the value of variable {var-name}.  Multiple
+			variable names may be given.  Special names recognized
+			here:				*E738*
+			  g:	global variables
+			  b:	local buffer variables
+			  w:	local window variables
+			  t:	local tab page variables
+			  s:	script-local variables
+			  l:	local function variables
+			  v:	Vim variables.
+
+:let			List the values of all variables.  The type of the
+			variable is indicated before the value:
+			    <nothing>	String
+				#	Number
+				*	Funcref
+
+
+:unl[et][!] {name} ...				*:unlet* *:unl* *E108* *E795*
+			Remove the internal variable {name}.  Several variable
+			names can be given, they are all removed.  The name
+			may also be a |List| or |Dictionary| item.
+			With [!] no error message is given for non-existing
+			variables.
+			One or more items from a |List| can be removed: >
+				:unlet list[3]	  " remove fourth item
+				:unlet list[3:]   " remove fourth item to last
+<			One item from a |Dictionary| can be removed at a time: >
+				:unlet dict['two']
+				:unlet dict.two
+<			This is especially useful to clean up used global
+			variables and script-local variables (these are not
+			deleted when the script ends).  Function-local
+			variables are automatically deleted when the function
+			ends.
+
+:unl[et] ${env-name} ...			*:unlet-environment* *:unlet-$*
+			Remove environment variable {env-name}.
+			Can mix {name} and ${env-name} in one :unlet command.
+			No error message is given for a non-existing
+			variable, also without !.
+			If the system does not support deleting an environment
+			variable, it is made emtpy.
+
+:lockv[ar][!] [depth] {name} ...			*:lockvar* *:lockv*
+			Lock the internal variable {name}.  Locking means that
+			it can no longer be changed (until it is unlocked).
+			A locked variable can be deleted: >
+				:lockvar v
+				:let v = 'asdf'		" fails!
+				:unlet v
+<							*E741* *E940*
+			If you try to change a locked variable you get an
+			error message: "E741: Value is locked: {name}".
+			If you try to lock or unlock a built-in variable you
+			get an error message: "E940: Cannot lock or unlock
+			variable {name}".
+
+			[depth] is relevant when locking a |List| or
+			|Dictionary|.  It specifies how deep the locking goes:
+				1	Lock the |List| or |Dictionary| itself,
+					cannot add or remove items, but can
+					still change their values.
+				2	Also lock the values, cannot change
+					the items.  If an item is a |List| or
+					|Dictionary|, cannot add or remove
+					items, but can still change the
+					values.
+				3	Like 2 but for the |List| /
+					|Dictionary| in the |List| /
+					|Dictionary|, one level deeper.
+			The default [depth] is 2, thus when {name} is a |List|
+			or |Dictionary| the values cannot be changed.
+								*E743*
+			For unlimited depth use [!] and omit [depth].
+			However, there is a maximum depth of 100 to catch
+			loops.
+
+			Note that when two variables refer to the same |List|
+			and you lock one of them, the |List| will also be
+			locked when used through the other variable.
+			Example: >
+				:let l = [0, 1, 2, 3]
+				:let cl = l
+				:lockvar l
+				:let cl[1] = 99		" won't work!
+<			You may want to make a copy of a list to avoid this.
+			See |deepcopy()|.
+
+
+:unlo[ckvar][!] [depth] {name} ...			*:unlockvar* *:unlo*
+			Unlock the internal variable {name}.  Does the
+			opposite of |:lockvar|.
+
+
+:if {expr1}			*:if* *:endif* *:en* *E171* *E579* *E580*
+:en[dif]		Execute the commands until the next matching ":else"
+			or ":endif" if {expr1} evaluates to non-zero.
+
+			From Vim version 4.5 until 5.0, every Ex command in
+			between the ":if" and ":endif" is ignored.  These two
+			commands were just to allow for future expansions in a
+			backward compatible way.  Nesting was allowed.  Note
+			that any ":else" or ":elseif" was ignored, the "else"
+			part was not executed either.
+
+			You can use this to remain compatible with older
+			versions: >
+				:if version >= 500
+				:  version-5-specific-commands
+				:endif
+<			The commands still need to be parsed to find the
+			"endif".  Sometimes an older Vim has a problem with a
+			new command.  For example, ":silent" is recognized as
+			a ":substitute" command.  In that case ":execute" can
+			avoid problems: >
+				:if version >= 600
+				:  execute "silent 1,$delete"
+				:endif
+<
+			NOTE: The ":append" and ":insert" commands don't work
+			properly in between ":if" and ":endif".
+
+						*:else* *:el* *E581* *E583*
+:el[se]			Execute the commands until the next matching ":else"
+			or ":endif" if they previously were not being
+			executed.
+
+					*:elseif* *:elsei* *E582* *E584*
+:elsei[f] {expr1}	Short for ":else" ":if", with the addition that there
+			is no extra ":endif".
+
+:wh[ile] {expr1}			*:while* *:endwhile* *:wh* *:endw*
+						*E170* *E585* *E588* *E733*
+:endw[hile]		Repeat the commands between ":while" and ":endwhile",
+			as long as {expr1} evaluates to non-zero.
+			When an error is detected from a command inside the
+			loop, execution continues after the "endwhile".
+			Example: >
+				:let lnum = 1
+				:while lnum <= line("$")
+				   :call FixLine(lnum)
+				   :let lnum = lnum + 1
+				:endwhile
+<
+			NOTE: The ":append" and ":insert" commands don't work
+			properly inside a ":while" and ":for" loop.
+
+:for {var} in {object}					*:for* *E690* *E732*
+:endfo[r]						*:endfo* *:endfor*
+			Repeat the commands between ":for" and ":endfor" for
+			each item in {object}.  {object} can be a |List| or
+			a |Blob|.  Variable {var} is set to the value of each
+			item.  When an error is detected for a command inside
+			the loop, execution continues after the "endfor".
+			Changing {object} inside the loop affects what items
+			are used.  Make a copy if this is unwanted: >
+				:for item in copy(mylist)
+<
+			When {object} is a |List| and not making a copy, Vim
+			stores a reference to the next item in the |List|
+			before executing the commands with the current item.
+			Thus the current item can be removed without effect.
+			Removing any later item means it will not be found.
+			Thus the following example works (an inefficient way
+			to make a |List| empty): >
+				for item in mylist
+				   call remove(mylist, 0)
+				endfor
+<			Note that reordering the |List| (e.g., with sort() or
+			reverse()) may have unexpected effects.
+
+			When {object} is a |Blob|, Vim always makes a copy to
+			iterate over.  Unlike with |List|, modifying the
+			|Blob| does not affect the iteration.
+
+:for [{var1}, {var2}, ...] in {listlist}
+:endfo[r]
+			Like ":for" above, but each item in {listlist} must be
+			a list, of which each item is assigned to {var1},
+			{var2}, etc.  Example: >
+				:for [lnum, col] in [[1, 3], [2, 5], [3, 8]]
+				   :echo getline(lnum)[col]
+				:endfor
+<
+						*:continue* *:con* *E586*
+:con[tinue]		When used inside a ":while" or ":for" loop, jumps back
+			to the start of the loop.
+			If it is used after a |:try| inside the loop but
+			before the matching |:finally| (if present), the
+			commands following the ":finally" up to the matching
+			|:endtry| are executed first.  This process applies to
+			all nested ":try"s inside the loop.  The outermost
+			":endtry" then jumps back to the start of the loop.
+
+						*:break* *:brea* *E587*
+:brea[k]		When used inside a ":while" or ":for" loop, skips to
+			the command after the matching ":endwhile" or
+			":endfor".
+			If it is used after a |:try| inside the loop but
+			before the matching |:finally| (if present), the
+			commands following the ":finally" up to the matching
+			|:endtry| are executed first.  This process applies to
+			all nested ":try"s inside the loop.  The outermost
+			":endtry" then jumps to the command after the loop.
+
+:try				*:try* *:endt* *:endtry* *E600* *E601* *E602*
+:endt[ry]		Change the error handling for the commands between
+			":try" and ":endtry" including everything being
+			executed across ":source" commands, function calls,
+			or autocommand invocations.
+
+			When an error or interrupt is detected and there is
+			a |:finally| command following, execution continues
+			after the ":finally".  Otherwise, or when the
+			":endtry" is reached thereafter, the next
+			(dynamically) surrounding ":try" is checked for
+			a corresponding ":finally" etc.  Then the script
+			processing is terminated.  (Whether a function
+			definition has an "abort" argument does not matter.)
+			Example: >
+		:try | edit too much | finally | echo "cleanup" | endtry
+		:echo "impossible"	" not reached, script terminated above
+<
+			Moreover, an error or interrupt (dynamically) inside
+			":try" and ":endtry" is converted to an exception.  It
+			can be caught as if it were thrown by a |:throw|
+			command (see |:catch|).  In this case, the script
+			processing is not terminated.
+
+			The value "Vim:Interrupt" is used for an interrupt
+			exception.  An error in a Vim command is converted
+			to a value of the form "Vim({command}):{errmsg}",
+			other errors are converted to a value of the form
+			"Vim:{errmsg}".  {command} is the full command name,
+			and {errmsg} is the message that is displayed if the
+			error exception is not caught, always beginning with
+			the error number.
+			Examples: >
+		:try | sleep 100 | catch /^Vim:Interrupt$/ | endtry
+		:try | edit | catch /^Vim(edit):E\d\+/ | echo "error" | endtry
+<
+					*:cat* *:catch* *E603* *E604* *E605*
+:cat[ch] /{pattern}/	The following commands until the next |:catch|,
+			|:finally|, or |:endtry| that belongs to the same
+			|:try| as the ":catch" are executed when an exception
+			matching {pattern} is being thrown and has not yet
+			been caught by a previous ":catch".  Otherwise, these
+			commands are skipped.
+			When {pattern} is omitted all errors are caught.
+			Examples: >
+		:catch /^Vim:Interrupt$/	" catch interrupts (CTRL-C)
+		:catch /^Vim\%((\a\+)\)\=:E/	" catch all Vim errors
+		:catch /^Vim\%((\a\+)\)\=:/	" catch errors and interrupts
+		:catch /^Vim(write):/		" catch all errors in :write
+		:catch /^Vim\%((\a\+)\)\=:E123/	" catch error E123
+		:catch /my-exception/		" catch user exception
+		:catch /.*/			" catch everything
+		:catch				" same as /.*/
+<
+			Another character can be used instead of / around the
+			{pattern}, so long as it does not have a special
+			meaning (e.g., '|' or '"') and doesn't occur inside
+			{pattern}.
+			Information about the exception is available in
+			|v:exception|.  Also see |throw-variables|.
+			NOTE: It is not reliable to ":catch" the TEXT of
+			an error message because it may vary in different
+			locales.
+
+					*:fina* *:finally* *E606* *E607*
+:fina[lly]		The following commands until the matching |:endtry|
+			are executed whenever the part between the matching
+			|:try| and the ":finally" is left:  either by falling
+			through to the ":finally" or by a |:continue|,
+			|:break|, |:finish|, or |:return|, or by an error or
+			interrupt or exception (see |:throw|).
+
+							*:th* *:throw* *E608*
+:th[row] {expr1}	The {expr1} is evaluated and thrown as an exception.
+			If the ":throw" is used after a |:try| but before the
+			first corresponding |:catch|, commands are skipped
+			until the first ":catch" matching {expr1} is reached.
+			If there is no such ":catch" or if the ":throw" is
+			used after a ":catch" but before the |:finally|, the
+			commands following the ":finally" (if present) up to
+			the matching |:endtry| are executed.  If the ":throw"
+			is after the ":finally", commands up to the ":endtry"
+			are skipped.  At the ":endtry", this process applies
+			again for the next dynamically surrounding ":try"
+			(which may be found in a calling function or sourcing
+			script), until a matching ":catch" has been found.
+			If the exception is not caught, the command processing
+			is terminated.
+			Example: >
+		:try | throw "oops" | catch /^oo/ | echo "caught" | endtry
+<			Note that "catch" may need to be on a separate line
+			for when an error causes the parsing to skip the whole
+			line and not see the "|" that separates the commands.
+
+							*:ec* *:echo*
+:ec[ho] {expr1} ..	Echoes each {expr1}, with a space in between.  The
+			first {expr1} starts on a new line.
+			Also see |:comment|.
+			Use "\n" to start a new line.  Use "\r" to move the
+			cursor to the first column.
+			Uses the highlighting set by the |:echohl| command.
+			Cannot be followed by a comment.
+			Example: >
+		:echo "the value of 'shell' is" &shell
+<							*:echo-redraw*
+			A later redraw may make the message disappear again.
+			And since Vim mostly postpones redrawing until it's
+			finished with a sequence of commands this happens
+			quite often.  To avoid that a command from before the
+			":echo" causes a redraw afterwards (redraws are often
+			postponed until you type something), force a redraw
+			with the |:redraw| command.  Example: >
+		:new | redraw | echo "there is a new window"
+<
+							*:echon*
+:echon {expr1} ..	Echoes each {expr1}, without anything added.  Also see
+			|:comment|.
+			Uses the highlighting set by the |:echohl| command.
+			Cannot be followed by a comment.
+			Example: >
+				:echon "the value of 'shell' is " &shell
+<
+			Note the difference between using ":echo", which is a
+			Vim command, and ":!echo", which is an external shell
+			command: >
+		:!echo %		--> filename
+<			The arguments of ":!" are expanded, see |:_%|. >
+		:!echo "%"		--> filename or "filename"
+<			Like the previous example.  Whether you see the double
+			quotes or not depends on your 'shell'. >
+		:echo %			--> nothing
+<			The '%' is an illegal character in an expression. >
+		:echo "%"		--> %
+<			This just echoes the '%' character. >
+		:echo expand("%")	--> filename
+<			This calls the expand() function to expand the '%'.
+
+							*:echoh* *:echohl*
+:echoh[l] {name}	Use the highlight group {name} for the following
+			|:echo|, |:echon| and |:echomsg| commands.  Also used
+			for the |input()| prompt.  Example: >
+		:echohl WarningMsg | echo "Don't panic!" | echohl None
+<			Don't forget to set the group back to "None",
+			otherwise all following echo's will be highlighted.
+
+							*:echom* *:echomsg*
+:echom[sg] {expr1} ..	Echo the expression(s) as a true message, saving the
+			message in the |message-history|.
+			Spaces are placed between the arguments as with the
+			|:echo| command.  But unprintable characters are
+			displayed, not interpreted.
+			The parsing works slightly different from |:echo|,
+			more like |:execute|.  All the expressions are first
+			evaluated and concatenated before echoing anything.
+			If expressions does not evaluate to a Number or
+			String, string() is used to turn it into a string.
+			Uses the highlighting set by the |:echohl| command.
+			Example: >
+		:echomsg "It's a Zizzer Zazzer Zuzz, as you can plainly see."
+<			See |:echo-redraw| to avoid the message disappearing
+			when the screen is redrawn.
+							*:echoe* *:echoerr*
+:echoe[rr] {expr1} ..	Echo the expression(s) as an error message, saving the
+			message in the |message-history|.  When used in a
+			script or function the line number will be added.
+			Spaces are placed between the arguments as with the
+			|:echomsg| command.  When used inside a try conditional,
+			the message is raised as an error exception instead
+			(see |try-echoerr|).
+			Example: >
+		:echoerr "This script just failed!"
+<			If you just want a highlighted message use |:echohl|.
+			And to get a beep: >
+		:exe "normal \<Esc>"
+<
+							*:exe* *:execute*
+:exe[cute] {expr1} ..	Executes the string that results from the evaluation
+			of {expr1} as an Ex command.
+			Multiple arguments are concatenated, with a space in
+			between.  To avoid the extra space use the "."
+			operator to concatenate strings into one argument.
+			{expr1} is used as the processed command, command line
+			editing keys are not recognized.
+			Cannot be followed by a comment.
+			Examples: >
+		:execute "buffer" nextbuf
+		:execute "normal" count . "w"
+<
+			":execute" can be used to append a command to commands
+			that don't accept a '|'.  Example: >
+		:execute '!ls' | echo "theend"
+
+<			":execute" is also a nice way to avoid having to type
+			control characters in a Vim script for a ":normal"
+			command: >
+		:execute "normal ixxx\<Esc>"
+<			This has an <Esc> character, see |expr-string|.
+
+			Be careful to correctly escape special characters in
+			file names.  The |fnameescape()| function can be used
+			for Vim commands, |shellescape()| for |:!| commands.
+			Examples: >
+		:execute "e " . fnameescape(filename)
+		:execute "!ls " . shellescape(filename, 1)
+<
+			Note: The executed string may be any command-line, but
+			starting or ending "if", "while" and "for" does not
+			always work, because when commands are skipped the
+			":execute" is not evaluated and Vim loses track of
+			where blocks start and end.  Also "break" and
+			"continue" should not be inside ":execute".
+			This example does not work, because the ":execute" is
+			not evaluated and Vim does not see the "while", and
+			gives an error for finding an ":endwhile": >
+		:if 0
+		: execute 'while i > 5'
+		:  echo "test"
+		: endwhile
+		:endif
+<
+			It is allowed to have a "while" or "if" command
+			completely in the executed string: >
+		:execute 'while i < 5 | echo i | let i = i + 1 | endwhile'
+<
+
+							*:exe-comment*
+			":execute", ":echo" and ":echon" cannot be followed by
+			a comment directly, because they see the '"' as the
+			start of a string.  But, you can use '|' followed by a
+			comment.  Example: >
+		:echo "foo" | "this is a comment
+
+==============================================================================
+8. Exception handling					*exception-handling*
+
+The Vim script language comprises an exception handling feature.  This section
+explains how it can be used in a Vim script.
+
+Exceptions may be raised by Vim on an error or on interrupt, see
+|catch-errors| and |catch-interrupt|.  You can also explicitly throw an
+exception by using the ":throw" command, see |throw-catch|.
+
+
+TRY CONDITIONALS					*try-conditionals*
+
+Exceptions can be caught or can cause cleanup code to be executed.  You can
+use a try conditional to specify catch clauses (that catch exceptions) and/or
+a finally clause (to be executed for cleanup).
+   A try conditional begins with a |:try| command and ends at the matching
+|:endtry| command.  In between, you can use a |:catch| command to start
+a catch clause, or a |:finally| command to start a finally clause.  There may
+be none or multiple catch clauses, but there is at most one finally clause,
+which must not be followed by any catch clauses.  The lines before the catch
+clauses and the finally clause is called a try block. >
+
+     :try
+     :	...
+     :	...				TRY BLOCK
+     :	...
+     :catch /{pattern}/
+     :	...
+     :	...				CATCH CLAUSE
+     :	...
+     :catch /{pattern}/
+     :	...
+     :	...				CATCH CLAUSE
+     :	...
+     :finally
+     :	...
+     :	...				FINALLY CLAUSE
+     :	...
+     :endtry
+
+The try conditional allows to watch code for exceptions and to take the
+appropriate actions.  Exceptions from the try block may be caught.  Exceptions
+from the try block and also the catch clauses may cause cleanup actions.
+   When no exception is thrown during execution of the try block, the control
+is transferred to the finally clause, if present.  After its execution, the
+script continues with the line following the ":endtry".
+   When an exception occurs during execution of the try block, the remaining
+lines in the try block are skipped.  The exception is matched against the
+patterns specified as arguments to the ":catch" commands.  The catch clause
+after the first matching ":catch" is taken, other catch clauses are not
+executed.  The catch clause ends when the next ":catch", ":finally", or
+":endtry" command is reached - whatever is first.  Then, the finally clause
+(if present) is executed.  When the ":endtry" is reached, the script execution
+continues in the following line as usual.
+   When an exception that does not match any of the patterns specified by the
+":catch" commands is thrown in the try block, the exception is not caught by
+that try conditional and none of the catch clauses is executed.  Only the
+finally clause, if present, is taken.  The exception pends during execution of
+the finally clause.  It is resumed at the ":endtry", so that commands after
+the ":endtry" are not executed and the exception might be caught elsewhere,
+see |try-nesting|.
+   When during execution of a catch clause another exception is thrown, the
+remaining lines in that catch clause are not executed.  The new exception is
+not matched against the patterns in any of the ":catch" commands of the same
+try conditional and none of its catch clauses is taken.  If there is, however,
+a finally clause, it is executed, and the exception pends during its
+execution.  The commands following the ":endtry" are not executed.  The new
+exception might, however, be caught elsewhere, see |try-nesting|.
+   When during execution of the finally clause (if present) an exception is
+thrown, the remaining lines in the finally clause are skipped.  If the finally
+clause has been taken because of an exception from the try block or one of the
+catch clauses, the original (pending) exception is discarded.  The commands
+following the ":endtry" are not executed, and the exception from the finally
+clause is propagated and can be caught elsewhere, see |try-nesting|.
+
+The finally clause is also executed, when a ":break" or ":continue" for
+a ":while" loop enclosing the complete try conditional is executed from the
+try block or a catch clause.  Or when a ":return" or ":finish" is executed
+from the try block or a catch clause of a try conditional in a function or
+sourced script, respectively.  The ":break", ":continue", ":return", or
+":finish" pends during execution of the finally clause and is resumed when the
+":endtry" is reached.  It is, however, discarded when an exception is thrown
+from the finally clause.
+   When a ":break" or ":continue" for a ":while" loop enclosing the complete
+try conditional or when a ":return" or ":finish" is encountered in the finally
+clause, the rest of the finally clause is skipped, and the ":break",
+":continue", ":return" or ":finish" is executed as usual.  If the finally
+clause has been taken because of an exception or an earlier ":break",
+":continue", ":return", or ":finish" from the try block or a catch clause,
+this pending exception or command is discarded.
+
+For examples see |throw-catch| and |try-finally|.
+
+
+NESTING	OF TRY CONDITIONALS				*try-nesting*
+
+Try conditionals can be nested arbitrarily.  That is, a complete try
+conditional can be put into the try block, a catch clause, or the finally
+clause of another try conditional.  If the inner try conditional does not
+catch an exception thrown in its try block or throws a new exception from one
+of its catch clauses or its finally clause, the outer try conditional is
+checked according to the rules above.  If the inner try conditional is in the
+try block of the outer try conditional, its catch clauses are checked, but
+otherwise only the finally clause is executed.  It does not matter for
+nesting, whether the inner try conditional is directly contained in the outer
+one, or whether the outer one sources a script or calls a function containing
+the inner try conditional.
+
+When none of the active try conditionals catches an exception, just their
+finally clauses are executed.  Thereafter, the script processing terminates.
+An error message is displayed in case of an uncaught exception explicitly
+thrown by a ":throw" command.  For uncaught error and interrupt exceptions
+implicitly raised by Vim, the error message(s) or interrupt message are shown
+as usual.
+
+For examples see |throw-catch|.
+
+
+EXAMINING EXCEPTION HANDLING CODE			*except-examine*
+
+Exception handling code can get tricky.  If you are in doubt what happens, set
+'verbose' to 13 or use the ":13verbose" command modifier when sourcing your
+script file.  Then you see when an exception is thrown, discarded, caught, or
+finished.  When using a verbosity level of at least 14, things pending in
+a finally clause are also shown.  This information is also given in debug mode
+(see |debug-scripts|).
+
+
+THROWING AND CATCHING EXCEPTIONS			*throw-catch*
+
+You can throw any number or string as an exception.  Use the |:throw| command
+and pass the value to be thrown as argument: >
+	:throw 4711
+	:throw "string"
+<							*throw-expression*
+You can also specify an expression argument.  The expression is then evaluated
+first, and the result is thrown: >
+	:throw 4705 + strlen("string")
+	:throw strpart("strings", 0, 6)
+
+An exception might be thrown during evaluation of the argument of the ":throw"
+command.  Unless it is caught there, the expression evaluation is abandoned.
+The ":throw" command then does not throw a new exception.
+   Example: >
+
+	:function! Foo(arg)
+	:  try
+	:    throw a:arg
+	:  catch /foo/
+	:  endtry
+	:  return 1
+	:endfunction
+	:
+	:function! Bar()
+	:  echo "in Bar"
+	:  return 4710
+	:endfunction
+	:
+	:throw Foo("arrgh") + Bar()
+
+This throws "arrgh", and "in Bar" is not displayed since Bar() is not
+executed. >
+	:throw Foo("foo") + Bar()
+however displays "in Bar" and throws 4711.
+
+Any other command that takes an expression as argument might also be
+abandoned by an (uncaught) exception during the expression evaluation.  The
+exception is then propagated to the caller of the command.
+   Example: >
+
+	:if Foo("arrgh")
+	:  echo "then"
+	:else
+	:  echo "else"
+	:endif
+
+Here neither of "then" or "else" is displayed.
+
+							*catch-order*
+Exceptions can be caught by a try conditional with one or more |:catch|
+commands, see |try-conditionals|.   The values to be caught by each ":catch"
+command can be specified as a pattern argument.  The subsequent catch clause
+gets executed when a matching exception is caught.
+   Example: >
+
+	:function! Foo(value)
+	:  try
+	:    throw a:value
+	:  catch /^\d\+$/
+	:    echo "Number thrown"
+	:  catch /.*/
+	:    echo "String thrown"
+	:  endtry
+	:endfunction
+	:
+	:call Foo(0x1267)
+	:call Foo('string')
+
+The first call to Foo() displays "Number thrown", the second "String thrown".
+An exception is matched against the ":catch" commands in the order they are
+specified.  Only the first match counts.  So you should place the more
+specific ":catch" first.  The following order does not make sense: >
+
+	:  catch /.*/
+	:    echo "String thrown"
+	:  catch /^\d\+$/
+	:    echo "Number thrown"
+
+The first ":catch" here matches always, so that the second catch clause is
+never taken.
+
+							*throw-variables*
+If you catch an exception by a general pattern, you may access the exact value
+in the variable |v:exception|: >
+
+	:  catch /^\d\+$/
+	:    echo "Number thrown.  Value is" v:exception
+
+You may also be interested where an exception was thrown.  This is stored in
+|v:throwpoint|.  Note that "v:exception" and "v:throwpoint" are valid for the
+exception most recently caught as long it is not finished.
+   Example: >
+
+	:function! Caught()
+	:  if v:exception != ""
+	:    echo 'Caught "' . v:exception . '" in ' . v:throwpoint
+	:  else
+	:    echo 'Nothing caught'
+	:  endif
+	:endfunction
+	:
+	:function! Foo()
+	:  try
+	:    try
+	:      try
+	:	 throw 4711
+	:      finally
+	:	 call Caught()
+	:      endtry
+	:    catch /.*/
+	:      call Caught()
+	:      throw "oops"
+	:    endtry
+	:  catch /.*/
+	:    call Caught()
+	:  finally
+	:    call Caught()
+	:  endtry
+	:endfunction
+	:
+	:call Foo()
+
+This displays >
+
+	Nothing caught
+	Caught "4711" in function Foo, line 4
+	Caught "oops" in function Foo, line 10
+	Nothing caught
+
+A practical example:  The following command ":LineNumber" displays the line
+number in the script or function where it has been used: >
+
+	:function! LineNumber()
+	:    return substitute(v:throwpoint, '.*\D\(\d\+\).*', '\1', "")
+	:endfunction
+	:command! LineNumber try | throw "" | catch | echo LineNumber() | endtry
+<
+							*try-nested*
+An exception that is not caught by a try conditional can be caught by
+a surrounding try conditional: >
+
+	:try
+	:  try
+	:    throw "foo"
+	:  catch /foobar/
+	:    echo "foobar"
+	:  finally
+	:    echo "inner finally"
+	:  endtry
+	:catch /foo/
+	:  echo "foo"
+	:endtry
+
+The inner try conditional does not catch the exception, just its finally
+clause is executed.  The exception is then caught by the outer try
+conditional.  The example displays "inner finally" and then "foo".
+
+							*throw-from-catch*
+You can catch an exception and throw a new one to be caught elsewhere from the
+catch clause: >
+
+	:function! Foo()
+	:  throw "foo"
+	:endfunction
+	:
+	:function! Bar()
+	:  try
+	:    call Foo()
+	:  catch /foo/
+	:    echo "Caught foo, throw bar"
+	:    throw "bar"
+	:  endtry
+	:endfunction
+	:
+	:try
+	:  call Bar()
+	:catch /.*/
+	:  echo "Caught" v:exception
+	:endtry
+
+This displays "Caught foo, throw bar" and then "Caught bar".
+
+							*rethrow*
+There is no real rethrow in the Vim script language, but you may throw
+"v:exception" instead: >
+
+	:function! Bar()
+	:  try
+	:    call Foo()
+	:  catch /.*/
+	:    echo "Rethrow" v:exception
+	:    throw v:exception
+	:  endtry
+	:endfunction
+<							*try-echoerr*
+Note that this method cannot be used to "rethrow" Vim error or interrupt
+exceptions, because it is not possible to fake Vim internal exceptions.
+Trying so causes an error exception.  You should throw your own exception
+denoting the situation.  If you want to cause a Vim error exception containing
+the original error exception value, you can use the |:echoerr| command: >
+
+	:try
+	:  try
+	:    asdf
+	:  catch /.*/
+	:    echoerr v:exception
+	:  endtry
+	:catch /.*/
+	:  echo v:exception
+	:endtry
+
+This code displays
+
+	Vim(echoerr):Vim:E492: Not an editor command:	asdf ~
+
+
+CLEANUP CODE						*try-finally*
+
+Scripts often change global settings and restore them at their end.  If the
+user however interrupts the script by pressing CTRL-C, the settings remain in
+an inconsistent state.  The same may happen to you in the development phase of
+a script when an error occurs or you explicitly throw an exception without
+catching it.  You can solve these problems by using a try conditional with
+a finally clause for restoring the settings.  Its execution is guaranteed on
+normal control flow, on error, on an explicit ":throw", and on interrupt.
+(Note that errors and interrupts from inside the try conditional are converted
+to exceptions.  When not caught, they terminate the script after the finally
+clause has been executed.)
+Example: >
+
+	:try
+	:  let s:saved_ts = &ts
+	:  set ts=17
+	:
+	:  " Do the hard work here.
+	:
+	:finally
+	:  let &ts = s:saved_ts
+	:  unlet s:saved_ts
+	:endtry
+
+This method should be used locally whenever a function or part of a script
+changes global settings which need to be restored on failure or normal exit of
+that function or script part.
+
+							*break-finally*
+Cleanup code works also when the try block or a catch clause is left by
+a ":continue", ":break", ":return", or ":finish".
+   Example: >
+
+	:let first = 1
+	:while 1
+	:  try
+	:    if first
+	:      echo "first"
+	:      let first = 0
+	:      continue
+	:    else
+	:      throw "second"
+	:    endif
+	:  catch /.*/
+	:    echo v:exception
+	:    break
+	:  finally
+	:    echo "cleanup"
+	:  endtry
+	:  echo "still in while"
+	:endwhile
+	:echo "end"
+
+This displays "first", "cleanup", "second", "cleanup", and "end". >
+
+	:function! Foo()
+	:  try
+	:    return 4711
+	:  finally
+	:    echo "cleanup\n"
+	:  endtry
+	:  echo "Foo still active"
+	:endfunction
+	:
+	:echo Foo() "returned by Foo"
+
+This displays "cleanup" and "4711 returned by Foo".  You don't need to add an
+extra ":return" in the finally clause.  (Above all, this would override the
+return value.)
+
+							*except-from-finally*
+Using either of ":continue", ":break", ":return", ":finish", or ":throw" in
+a finally clause is possible, but not recommended since it abandons the
+cleanup actions for the try conditional.  But, of course, interrupt and error
+exceptions might get raised from a finally clause.
+   Example where an error in the finally clause stops an interrupt from
+working correctly: >
+
+	:try
+	:  try
+	:    echo "Press CTRL-C for interrupt"
+	:    while 1
+	:    endwhile
+	:  finally
+	:    unlet novar
+	:  endtry
+	:catch /novar/
+	:endtry
+	:echo "Script still running"
+	:sleep 1
+
+If you need to put commands that could fail into a finally clause, you should
+think about catching or ignoring the errors in these commands, see
+|catch-errors| and |ignore-errors|.
+
+
+CATCHING ERRORS						*catch-errors*
+
+If you want to catch specific errors, you just have to put the code to be
+watched in a try block and add a catch clause for the error message.  The
+presence of the try conditional causes all errors to be converted to an
+exception.  No message is displayed and |v:errmsg| is not set then.  To find
+the right pattern for the ":catch" command, you have to know how the format of
+the error exception is.
+   Error exceptions have the following format: >
+
+	Vim({cmdname}):{errmsg}
+or >
+	Vim:{errmsg}
+
+{cmdname} is the name of the command that failed; the second form is used when
+the command name is not known.  {errmsg} is the error message usually produced
+when the error occurs outside try conditionals.  It always begins with
+a capital "E", followed by a two or three-digit error number, a colon, and
+a space.
+
+Examples:
+
+The command >
+	:unlet novar
+normally produces the error message >
+	E108: No such variable: "novar"
+which is converted inside try conditionals to an exception >
+	Vim(unlet):E108: No such variable: "novar"
+
+The command >
+	:dwim
+normally produces the error message >
+	E492: Not an editor command: dwim
+which is converted inside try conditionals to an exception >
+	Vim:E492: Not an editor command: dwim
+
+You can catch all ":unlet" errors by a >
+	:catch /^Vim(unlet):/
+or all errors for misspelled command names by a >
+	:catch /^Vim:E492:/
+
+Some error messages may be produced by different commands: >
+	:function nofunc
+and >
+	:delfunction nofunc
+both produce the error message >
+	E128: Function name must start with a capital: nofunc
+which is converted inside try conditionals to an exception >
+	Vim(function):E128: Function name must start with a capital: nofunc
+or >
+	Vim(delfunction):E128: Function name must start with a capital: nofunc
+respectively.  You can catch the error by its number independently on the
+command that caused it if you use the following pattern: >
+	:catch /^Vim(\a\+):E128:/
+
+Some commands like >
+	:let x = novar
+produce multiple error messages, here: >
+	E121: Undefined variable: novar
+	E15: Invalid expression:  novar
+Only the first is used for the exception value, since it is the most specific
+one (see |except-several-errors|).  So you can catch it by >
+	:catch /^Vim(\a\+):E121:/
+
+You can catch all errors related to the name "nofunc" by >
+	:catch /\<nofunc\>/
+
+You can catch all Vim errors in the ":write" and ":read" commands by >
+	:catch /^Vim(\(write\|read\)):E\d\+:/
+
+You can catch all Vim errors by the pattern >
+	:catch /^Vim\((\a\+)\)\=:E\d\+:/
+<
+							*catch-text*
+NOTE: You should never catch the error message text itself: >
+	:catch /No such variable/
+only works in the English locale, but not when the user has selected
+a different language by the |:language| command.  It is however helpful to
+cite the message text in a comment: >
+	:catch /^Vim(\a\+):E108:/   " No such variable
+
+
+IGNORING ERRORS						*ignore-errors*
+
+You can ignore errors in a specific Vim command by catching them locally: >
+
+	:try
+	:  write
+	:catch
+	:endtry
+
+But you are strongly recommended NOT to use this simple form, since it could
+catch more than you want.  With the ":write" command, some autocommands could
+be executed and cause errors not related to writing, for instance: >
+
+	:au BufWritePre * unlet novar
+
+There could even be such errors you are not responsible for as a script
+writer: a user of your script might have defined such autocommands.  You would
+then hide the error from the user.
+   It is much better to use >
+
+	:try
+	:  write
+	:catch /^Vim(write):/
+	:endtry
+
+which only catches real write errors.  So catch only what you'd like to ignore
+intentionally.
+
+For a single command that does not cause execution of autocommands, you could
+even suppress the conversion of errors to exceptions by the ":silent!"
+command: >
+	:silent! nunmap k
+This works also when a try conditional is active.
+
+
+CATCHING INTERRUPTS					*catch-interrupt*
+
+When there are active try conditionals, an interrupt (CTRL-C) is converted to
+the exception "Vim:Interrupt".  You can catch it like every exception.  The
+script is not terminated, then.
+   Example: >
+
+	:function! TASK1()
+	:  sleep 10
+	:endfunction
+
+	:function! TASK2()
+	:  sleep 20
+	:endfunction
+
+	:while 1
+	:  let command = input("Type a command: ")
+	:  try
+	:    if command == ""
+	:      continue
+	:    elseif command == "END"
+	:      break
+	:    elseif command == "TASK1"
+	:      call TASK1()
+	:    elseif command == "TASK2"
+	:      call TASK2()
+	:    else
+	:      echo "\nIllegal command:" command
+	:      continue
+	:    endif
+	:  catch /^Vim:Interrupt$/
+	:    echo "\nCommand interrupted"
+	:    " Caught the interrupt.  Continue with next prompt.
+	:  endtry
+	:endwhile
+
+You can interrupt a task here by pressing CTRL-C; the script then asks for
+a new command.  If you press CTRL-C at the prompt, the script is terminated.
+
+For testing what happens when CTRL-C would be pressed on a specific line in
+your script, use the debug mode and execute the |>quit| or |>interrupt|
+command on that line.  See |debug-scripts|.
+
+
+CATCHING ALL						*catch-all*
+
+The commands >
+
+	:catch /.*/
+	:catch //
+	:catch
+
+catch everything, error exceptions, interrupt exceptions and exceptions
+explicitly thrown by the |:throw| command.  This is useful at the top level of
+a script in order to catch unexpected things.
+   Example: >
+
+	:try
+	:
+	:  " do the hard work here
+	:
+	:catch /MyException/
+	:
+	:  " handle known problem
+	:
+	:catch /^Vim:Interrupt$/
+	:    echo "Script interrupted"
+	:catch /.*/
+	:  echo "Internal error (" . v:exception . ")"
+	:  echo " - occurred at " . v:throwpoint
+	:endtry
+	:" end of script
+
+Note: Catching all might catch more things than you want.  Thus, you are
+strongly encouraged to catch only for problems that you can really handle by
+specifying a pattern argument to the ":catch".
+   Example: Catching all could make it nearly impossible to interrupt a script
+by pressing CTRL-C: >
+
+	:while 1
+	:  try
+	:    sleep 1
+	:  catch
+	:  endtry
+	:endwhile
+
+
+EXCEPTIONS AND AUTOCOMMANDS				*except-autocmd*
+
+Exceptions may be used during execution of autocommands.  Example: >
+
+	:autocmd User x try
+	:autocmd User x   throw "Oops!"
+	:autocmd User x catch
+	:autocmd User x   echo v:exception
+	:autocmd User x endtry
+	:autocmd User x throw "Arrgh!"
+	:autocmd User x echo "Should not be displayed"
+	:
+	:try
+	:  doautocmd User x
+	:catch
+	:  echo v:exception
+	:endtry
+
+This displays "Oops!" and "Arrgh!".
+
+							*except-autocmd-Pre*
+For some commands, autocommands get executed before the main action of the
+command takes place.  If an exception is thrown and not caught in the sequence
+of autocommands, the sequence and the command that caused its execution are
+abandoned and the exception is propagated to the caller of the command.
+   Example: >
+
+	:autocmd BufWritePre * throw "FAIL"
+	:autocmd BufWritePre * echo "Should not be displayed"
+	:
+	:try
+	:  write
+	:catch
+	:  echo "Caught:" v:exception "from" v:throwpoint
+	:endtry
+
+Here, the ":write" command does not write the file currently being edited (as
+you can see by checking 'modified'), since the exception from the BufWritePre
+autocommand abandons the ":write".  The exception is then caught and the
+script displays: >
+
+	Caught: FAIL from BufWrite Auto commands for "*"
+<
+							*except-autocmd-Post*
+For some commands, autocommands get executed after the main action of the
+command has taken place.  If this main action fails and the command is inside
+an active try conditional, the autocommands are skipped and an error exception
+is thrown that can be caught by the caller of the command.
+   Example: >
+
+	:autocmd BufWritePost * echo "File successfully written!"
+	:
+	:try
+	:  write /i/m/p/o/s/s/i/b/l/e
+	:catch
+	:  echo v:exception
+	:endtry
+
+This just displays: >
+
+	Vim(write):E212: Can't open file for writing (/i/m/p/o/s/s/i/b/l/e)
+
+If you really need to execute the autocommands even when the main action
+fails, trigger the event from the catch clause.
+   Example: >
+
+	:autocmd BufWritePre  * set noreadonly
+	:autocmd BufWritePost * set readonly
+	:
+	:try
+	:  write /i/m/p/o/s/s/i/b/l/e
+	:catch
+	:  doautocmd BufWritePost /i/m/p/o/s/s/i/b/l/e
+	:endtry
+<
+You can also use ":silent!": >
+
+	:let x = "ok"
+	:let v:errmsg = ""
+	:autocmd BufWritePost * if v:errmsg != ""
+	:autocmd BufWritePost *   let x = "after fail"
+	:autocmd BufWritePost * endif
+	:try
+	:  silent! write /i/m/p/o/s/s/i/b/l/e
+	:catch
+	:endtry
+	:echo x
+
+This displays "after fail".
+
+If the main action of the command does not fail, exceptions from the
+autocommands will be catchable by the caller of the command:  >
+
+	:autocmd BufWritePost * throw ":-("
+	:autocmd BufWritePost * echo "Should not be displayed"
+	:
+	:try
+	:  write
+	:catch
+	:  echo v:exception
+	:endtry
+<
+							*except-autocmd-Cmd*
+For some commands, the normal action can be replaced by a sequence of
+autocommands.  Exceptions from that sequence will be catchable by the caller
+of the command.
+   Example:  For the ":write" command, the caller cannot know whether the file
+had actually been written when the exception occurred.  You need to tell it in
+some way. >
+
+	:if !exists("cnt")
+	:  let cnt = 0
+	:
+	:  autocmd BufWriteCmd * if &modified
+	:  autocmd BufWriteCmd *   let cnt = cnt + 1
+	:  autocmd BufWriteCmd *   if cnt % 3 == 2
+	:  autocmd BufWriteCmd *     throw "BufWriteCmdError"
+	:  autocmd BufWriteCmd *   endif
+	:  autocmd BufWriteCmd *   write | set nomodified
+	:  autocmd BufWriteCmd *   if cnt % 3 == 0
+	:  autocmd BufWriteCmd *     throw "BufWriteCmdError"
+	:  autocmd BufWriteCmd *   endif
+	:  autocmd BufWriteCmd *   echo "File successfully written!"
+	:  autocmd BufWriteCmd * endif
+	:endif
+	:
+	:try
+	:	write
+	:catch /^BufWriteCmdError$/
+	:  if &modified
+	:    echo "Error on writing (file contents not changed)"
+	:  else
+	:    echo "Error after writing"
+	:  endif
+	:catch /^Vim(write):/
+	:    echo "Error on writing"
+	:endtry
+
+When this script is sourced several times after making changes, it displays
+first >
+	File successfully written!
+then >
+	Error on writing (file contents not changed)
+then >
+	Error after writing
+etc.
+
+							*except-autocmd-ill*
+You cannot spread a try conditional over autocommands for different events.
+The following code is ill-formed: >
+
+	:autocmd BufWritePre  * try
+	:
+	:autocmd BufWritePost * catch
+	:autocmd BufWritePost *   echo v:exception
+	:autocmd BufWritePost * endtry
+	:
+	:write
+
+
+EXCEPTION HIERARCHIES AND PARAMETERIZED EXCEPTIONS	*except-hier-param*
+
+Some programming languages allow to use hierarchies of exception classes or to
+pass additional information with the object of an exception class.  You can do
+similar things in Vim.
+   In order to throw an exception from a hierarchy, just throw the complete
+class name with the components separated by a colon, for instance throw the
+string "EXCEPT:MATHERR:OVERFLOW" for an overflow in a mathematical library.
+   When you want to pass additional information with your exception class, add
+it in parentheses, for instance throw the string "EXCEPT:IO:WRITEERR(myfile)"
+for an error when writing "myfile".
+   With the appropriate patterns in the ":catch" command, you can catch for
+base classes or derived classes of your hierarchy.  Additional information in
+parentheses can be cut out from |v:exception| with the ":substitute" command.
+   Example: >
+
+	:function! CheckRange(a, func)
+	:  if a:a < 0
+	:    throw "EXCEPT:MATHERR:RANGE(" . a:func . ")"
+	:  endif
+	:endfunction
+	:
+	:function! Add(a, b)
+	:  call CheckRange(a:a, "Add")
+	:  call CheckRange(a:b, "Add")
+	:  let c = a:a + a:b
+	:  if c < 0
+	:    throw "EXCEPT:MATHERR:OVERFLOW"
+	:  endif
+	:  return c
+	:endfunction
+	:
+	:function! Div(a, b)
+	:  call CheckRange(a:a, "Div")
+	:  call CheckRange(a:b, "Div")
+	:  if (a:b == 0)
+	:    throw "EXCEPT:MATHERR:ZERODIV"
+	:  endif
+	:  return a:a / a:b
+	:endfunction
+	:
+	:function! Write(file)
+	:  try
+	:    execute "write" fnameescape(a:file)
+	:  catch /^Vim(write):/
+	:    throw "EXCEPT:IO(" . getcwd() . ", " . a:file . "):WRITEERR"
+	:  endtry
+	:endfunction
+	:
+	:try
+	:
+	:  " something with arithmetics and I/O
+	:
+	:catch /^EXCEPT:MATHERR:RANGE/
+	:  let function = substitute(v:exception, '.*(\(\a\+\)).*', '\1', "")
+	:  echo "Range error in" function
+	:
+	:catch /^EXCEPT:MATHERR/	" catches OVERFLOW and ZERODIV
+	:  echo "Math error"
+	:
+	:catch /^EXCEPT:IO/
+	:  let dir = substitute(v:exception, '.*(\(.\+\),\s*.\+).*', '\1', "")
+	:  let file = substitute(v:exception, '.*(.\+,\s*\(.\+\)).*', '\1', "")
+	:  if file !~ '^/'
+	:    let file = dir . "/" . file
+	:  endif
+	:  echo 'I/O error for "' . file . '"'
+	:
+	:catch /^EXCEPT/
+	:  echo "Unspecified error"
+	:
+	:endtry
+
+The exceptions raised by Vim itself (on error or when pressing CTRL-C) use
+a flat hierarchy:  they are all in the "Vim" class.  You cannot throw yourself
+exceptions with the "Vim" prefix; they are reserved for Vim.
+   Vim error exceptions are parameterized with the name of the command that
+failed, if known.  See |catch-errors|.
+
+
+PECULIARITIES
+							*except-compat*
+The exception handling concept requires that the command sequence causing the
+exception is aborted immediately and control is transferred to finally clauses
+and/or a catch clause.
+
+In the Vim script language there are cases where scripts and functions
+continue after an error: in functions without the "abort" flag or in a command
+after ":silent!", control flow goes to the following line, and outside
+functions, control flow goes to the line following the outermost ":endwhile"
+or ":endif".  On the other hand, errors should be catchable as exceptions
+(thus, requiring the immediate abortion).
+
+This problem has been solved by converting errors to exceptions and using
+immediate abortion (if not suppressed by ":silent!") only when a try
+conditional is active.  This is no restriction since an (error) exception can
+be caught only from an active try conditional.  If you want an immediate
+termination without catching the error, just use a try conditional without
+catch clause.  (You can cause cleanup code being executed before termination
+by specifying a finally clause.)
+
+When no try conditional is active, the usual abortion and continuation
+behavior is used instead of immediate abortion.  This ensures compatibility of
+scripts written for Vim 6.1 and earlier.
+
+However, when sourcing an existing script that does not use exception handling
+commands (or when calling one of its functions) from inside an active try
+conditional of a new script, you might change the control flow of the existing
+script on error.  You get the immediate abortion on error and can catch the
+error in the new script.  If however the sourced script suppresses error
+messages by using the ":silent!" command (checking for errors by testing
+|v:errmsg| if appropriate), its execution path is not changed.  The error is
+not converted to an exception.  (See |:silent|.)  So the only remaining cause
+where this happens is for scripts that don't care about errors and produce
+error messages.  You probably won't want to use such code from your new
+scripts.
+
+							*except-syntax-err*
+Syntax errors in the exception handling commands are never caught by any of
+the ":catch" commands of the try conditional they belong to.  Its finally
+clauses, however, is executed.
+   Example: >
+
+	:try
+	:  try
+	:    throw 4711
+	:  catch /\(/
+	:    echo "in catch with syntax error"
+	:  catch
+	:    echo "inner catch-all"
+	:  finally
+	:    echo "inner finally"
+	:  endtry
+	:catch
+	:  echo 'outer catch-all caught "' . v:exception . '"'
+	:  finally
+	:    echo "outer finally"
+	:endtry
+
+This displays: >
+    inner finally
+    outer catch-all caught "Vim(catch):E54: Unmatched \("
+    outer finally
+The original exception is discarded and an error exception is raised, instead.
+
+							*except-single-line*
+The ":try", ":catch", ":finally", and ":endtry" commands can be put on
+a single line, but then syntax errors may make it difficult to recognize the
+"catch" line, thus you better avoid this.
+   Example: >
+	:try | unlet! foo # | catch | endtry
+raises an error exception for the trailing characters after the ":unlet!"
+argument, but does not see the ":catch" and ":endtry" commands, so that the
+error exception is discarded and the "E488: Trailing characters" message gets
+displayed.
+
+							*except-several-errors*
+When several errors appear in a single command, the first error message is
+usually the most specific one and therefor converted to the error exception.
+   Example: >
+	echo novar
+causes >
+	E121: Undefined variable: novar
+	E15: Invalid expression: novar
+The value of the error exception inside try conditionals is: >
+	Vim(echo):E121: Undefined variable: novar
+<							*except-syntax-error*
+But when a syntax error is detected after a normal error in the same command,
+the syntax error is used for the exception being thrown.
+   Example: >
+	unlet novar #
+causes >
+	E108: No such variable: "novar"
+	E488: Trailing characters
+The value of the error exception inside try conditionals is: >
+	Vim(unlet):E488: Trailing characters
+This is done because the syntax error might change the execution path in a way
+not intended by the user.  Example: >
+	try
+	    try | unlet novar # | catch | echo v:exception | endtry
+	catch /.*/
+	    echo "outer catch:" v:exception
+	endtry
+This displays "outer catch: Vim(unlet):E488: Trailing characters", and then
+a "E600: Missing :endtry" error message is given, see |except-single-line|.
+
+==============================================================================
+9. Examples						*eval-examples*
+
+Printing in Binary ~
+>
+  :" The function Nr2Bin() returns the binary string representation of a number.
+  :func Nr2Bin(nr)
+  :  let n = a:nr
+  :  let r = ""
+  :  while n
+  :    let r = '01'[n % 2] . r
+  :    let n = n / 2
+  :  endwhile
+  :  return r
+  :endfunc
+
+  :" The function String2Bin() converts each character in a string to a
+  :" binary string, separated with dashes.
+  :func String2Bin(str)
+  :  let out = ''
+  :  for ix in range(strlen(a:str))
+  :    let out = out . '-' . Nr2Bin(char2nr(a:str[ix]))
+  :  endfor
+  :  return out[1:]
+  :endfunc
+
+Example of its use: >
+  :echo Nr2Bin(32)
+result: "100000" >
+  :echo String2Bin("32")
+result: "110011-110010"
+
+
+Sorting lines ~
+
+This example sorts lines with a specific compare function. >
+
+  :func SortBuffer()
+  :  let lines = getline(1, '$')
+  :  call sort(lines, function("Strcmp"))
+  :  call setline(1, lines)
+  :endfunction
+
+As a one-liner: >
+  :call setline(1, sort(getline(1, '$'), function("Strcmp")))
+
+
+scanf() replacement ~
+							*sscanf*
+There is no sscanf() function in Vim.  If you need to extract parts from a
+line, you can use matchstr() and substitute() to do it.  This example shows
+how to get the file name, line number and column number out of a line like
+"foobar.txt, 123, 45". >
+   :" Set up the match bit
+   :let mx='\(\f\+\),\s*\(\d\+\),\s*\(\d\+\)'
+   :"get the part matching the whole expression
+   :let l = matchstr(line, mx)
+   :"get each item out of the match
+   :let file = substitute(l, mx, '\1', '')
+   :let lnum = substitute(l, mx, '\2', '')
+   :let col = substitute(l, mx, '\3', '')
+
+The input is in the variable "line", the results in the variables "file",
+"lnum" and "col". (idea from Michael Geddes)
+
+
+getting the scriptnames in a Dictionary ~
+						*scriptnames-dictionary*
+The |:scriptnames| command can be used to get a list of all script files that
+have been sourced.  There is no equivalent function or variable for this
+(because it's rarely needed).  In case you need to manipulate the list this
+code can be used: >
+    " Get the output of ":scriptnames" in the scriptnames_output variable.
+    let scriptnames_output = ''
+    redir => scriptnames_output
+    silent scriptnames
+    redir END
+
+    " Split the output into lines and parse each line.	Add an entry to the
+    " "scripts" dictionary.
+    let scripts = {}
+    for line in split(scriptnames_output, "\n")
+      " Only do non-blank lines.
+      if line =~ '\S'
+	" Get the first number in the line.
+	let nr = matchstr(line, '\d\+')
+	" Get the file name, remove the script number " 123: ".
+	let name = substitute(line, '.\+:\s*', '', '')
+	" Add an item to the Dictionary
+	let scripts[nr] = name
+      endif
+    endfor
+    unlet scriptnames_output
+
+==============================================================================
+10. No +eval feature				*no-eval-feature*
+
+When the |+eval| feature was disabled at compile time, none of the expression
+evaluation commands are available.  To prevent this from causing Vim scripts
+to generate all kinds of errors, the ":if" and ":endif" commands are still
+recognized, though the argument of the ":if" and everything between the ":if"
+and the matching ":endif" is ignored.  Nesting of ":if" blocks is allowed, but
+only if the commands are at the start of the line.  The ":else" command is not
+recognized.
+
+Example of how to avoid executing commands when the |+eval| feature is
+missing: >
+
+	:if 1
+	:  echo "Expression evaluation is compiled in"
+	:else
+	:  echo "You will _never_ see this message"
+	:endif
+
+To execute a command only when the |+eval| feature is disabled requires a trick,
+as this example shows: >
+
+	silent! while 0
+	  set history=111
+	silent! endwhile
+
+When the |+eval| feature is available the command is skipped because of the
+"while 0".  Without the |+eval| feature the "while 0" is an error, which is
+silently ignored, and the command is executed.
+
+==============================================================================
+11. The sandbox					*eval-sandbox* *sandbox* *E48*
+
+The 'foldexpr', 'formatexpr', 'includeexpr', 'indentexpr', 'statusline' and
+'foldtext' options may be evaluated in a sandbox.  This means that you are
+protected from these expressions having nasty side effects.  This gives some
+safety for when these options are set from a modeline.  It is also used when
+the command from a tags file is executed and for CTRL-R = in the command line.
+The sandbox is also used for the |:sandbox| command.
+
+These items are not allowed in the sandbox:
+	- changing the buffer text
+	- defining or changing mapping, autocommands, user commands
+	- setting certain options (see |option-summary|)
+	- setting certain v: variables (see |v:var|)  *E794*
+	- executing a shell command
+	- reading or writing a file
+	- jumping to another buffer or editing a file
+	- executing Python, Perl, etc. commands
+This is not guaranteed 100% secure, but it should block most attacks.
+
+							*:san* *:sandbox*
+:san[dbox] {cmd}	Execute {cmd} in the sandbox.  Useful to evaluate an
+			option that may have been set from a modeline, e.g.
+			'foldexpr'.
+
+							*sandbox-option*
+A few options contain an expression.  When this expression is evaluated it may
+have to be done in the sandbox to avoid a security risk.  But the sandbox is
+restrictive, thus this only happens when the option was set from an insecure
+location.  Insecure in this context are:
+- sourcing a .vimrc or .exrc in the current directory
+- while executing in the sandbox
+- value coming from a modeline
+- executing a function that was defined in the sandbox
+
+Note that when in the sandbox and saving an option value and restoring it, the
+option will still be marked as it was set in the sandbox.
+
+==============================================================================
+12. Textlock							*textlock*
+
+In a few situations it is not allowed to change the text in the buffer, jump
+to another window and some other things that might confuse or break what Vim
+is currently doing.  This mostly applies to things that happen when Vim is
+actually doing something else.  For example, evaluating the 'balloonexpr' may
+happen any moment the mouse cursor is resting at some position.
+
+This is not allowed when the textlock is active:
+	- changing the buffer text
+	- jumping to another buffer or window
+	- editing another file
+	- closing a window or quitting Vim
+	- etc.
+
+==============================================================================
+13. Testing							*testing*
+
+Vim can be tested after building it, usually with "make test".
+The tests are located in the directory "src/testdir".
+
+There are several types of tests added over time:
+	test33.in		oldest, don't add any more
+	test_something.in	old style tests
+	test_something.vim	new style tests
+
+						*new-style-testing*
+New tests should be added as new style tests.  These use functions such as
+|assert_equal()| to keep the test commands and the expected result in one
+place.
+						*old-style-testing*
+In some cases an old style test needs to be used.  E.g. when testing Vim
+without the |+eval| feature.
+
+Find more information in the file src/testdir/README.txt.
+
+
+ vim:tw=78:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl: